Handbook: Faculty of Medicine 1978

THE UNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

FACULTY OF MEDICINE

HANDBOOK 197в

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY

This handbook gives specific information for students of the faculty of Medicine. It should be read in conjunction with the general publi-cation, Students' Information Booklet for 1978, available free to all Students at enrolment or re-enrolment.

In exceptional circumstances the Council is empowered to suspend subjects and to vary the syllabus of a subject. Any such alteration to the details of subjects will be announced on departmental notice-boards by the beginning of Orientation Week, 1978.

TABLE OF CONTENTS Faculty Administration

6

Faculty of Medicine

5 Teaching and Research Staff 8 Staff of Associated Institutions 31

CHAPTER 1 Important Dates Applications, Enrolments, Terms and Examinations, Graduation 64

CHAPTER 2 Degrees and Diplomas M.B., B.S. 65 Combined course in Medicine and Medical Science 65 M.D., M.S. and M.G.O. 65 Postgraduate Diplomas 66 Ph.D 66

CHAPTER 3 Advice to Those Preparing to Enter the Medical Course Special Course Requirements; Preparatory Studies 67

CHAPTER 4 Policies Governing Admission First Year 68 Second Year 69 Third Year 70 Fourth Year 70 Fifth and Sixth Years 70 Admission Ad Eundem Statum 71

CHAPTER 5 Scholarships, Bursaries, Undergraduate Awards 73 Postgraduate Awards 74

CHAPTER 6 Notices to Medical Graduates Hospital Appointments 75 Commonwealth Medical Advisory Bureau Registration in the United Kingdom

CHAPTER 7 Regulations Preliminary Examination 77 Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery 77 Degree of Bachelor of Medical Science 79 Degree of Doctor of Medicine 79 Degree of Master of Surgery 80 Degree of Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics 81 Diploma in Public Health 82 Postgraduate Medical Diplomas 82

CHAPTER 8 Details for Degrees of M.B., B.S. 1. General Requirements:

Matriculation; Prerequisites; Admission to First Year; Atten-dance at Lectures; Vacation Study; Honour Work; Years, Subjects and Times of Examination; Examinations; Special Consideration, Repetition of Year 88

2. Time Tables 92 3. Summary of Principal Dates 96 4. Years, Subjects and Books 97 5. Clinical Instruction 123

CHAPTER 9 Details for Higher Degrees Degree of Doctor of Medicine 132 Degree of Master of Surgery 134 Degree of Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics 135

CHAPTER 10 Details for Postgraduate Diplomas 140 Appendix: University General Principles of Selection 174

Prizes

76 76

FACULTY ADMINISTRATION

Dean, PROFESSOR D. G. PENINGTON

Deputy Dean,

tAssistant Registrar (Medicine), C. D. RICHARDS

Senior Adiminstrative Assistant (Medicine), MISS JOAN WILCOCK

Administrative Assistant (Medicine), P. T. O'Keefe

Correspondence should be addressed to the Registrar.

Personal enquries should be made to the Assistant Registrar (Medicine).

FACULTY OF MEDICINE

DEAN—PROFESSOR D. G. PENINGTON

DEPUTY DEAN—

ASSISTANT DEAN (Pre-Clinical)—PROFESSOR D. O. WHITE

ASSISTANT DEAN (Clinical)—PROFESSOR HARE

THE VICE-CHANCELLOR

THE DEPUTY VICE-CHANCELLOR

Council Members:

PROFESSOR EMERITUS R. D. WRIGHT MR A. R. MOORE

Representative of the Graduate Committee:

MR. J. I. HAYWARD

Professors:

PROFESSOR ATTWOOD PROFESSOR BEISCHER PROFESSOR BENNETT PROFESSOR BROWN PROFESSOR CAMERON PROFESSOR CAMPBELL PROFESSOR CHEEK PROFESSOR CHRISTIE PROFESSOR CLARK PROFESSOR CROCK PROFESSOR DARIAN-SMITH PROFESSOR B. M. DAVIES PROFESSOR DANKS PROFESSOR DAY PROFESSOR DOYLE PROFESSOR EWING PROFESSOR HARDY PROFESSOR HARE PROFESSOR HIRD PROFESSOR KINCAID-SMITH PROFESSOR KUNE

t Formerly titled "Secretary to Faculty of Medicine". Wherever this or such words as "faculty secretary" occur In the handbook, "Assistant Registrar (Medicine)" should now be read.

5

Faculty of Medicine

PROFESSOR LEACH PROFESSOR LOUIS PROFESSOR LOVELL PROFESSOR MARTIN PROFESSOR McKELLAR PROFESSOR SIR GUSTAV NOSSAL PROFESSOR PENINGTON PROFESSOR PITTARD PROFESSOR PRINSLEY PROFESSOR RAND PROFESSOR RAY PROFESSOR SCHREIBER PROFESSOR WEBSTER PROFESSOR D. O. WHITE

Ex Offiс io: Chief Health Officer—DR B. P. McCLOSKEY Chairman, Mental Health Authority—DR J. L. EVANS Chairman, Hospitals and Charities Commission—DR E. WILDER Comwlth Director Health (Vic.)—DR R. C. WEBB

Associate Deans (Clinical): Royal Melbourne Hospital—DR K. J. GRICE St Vincent's Hospital—DR J. J. BILLINGS Austin and Repatriation General Hospitals—DR B. SWEET

Representatives of Clinical Schools:

Royal Melbourne Hospital—MR D. G. Ма cLEISH, MR I. S. RUSSELL, DR W. M. ROSE

St Vincent's Hospital—MR J. L. CONNEL, DR L. MURPHY Austin and Repatriation General Hospitals—DR A. CAMPBELL,

MR H. STORY Royal Children's Hospital—MR R. FOWLER, DR B. W. NEAL Royal Women's Hospital—DR B. L. G. KNEALE, MR I. C. ROSS Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital—DR W. E. GILLIES Fairfield Hospital—DR J. A. FORBES Peter MacCallum Clinic—DR J. P. MADIGAN Mercy Maternity Hospital—DR K. A. BARHAM

Representative of:

Victorian Medical Postgraduate Foundation—MR I. S. RUSSELL Australian Medical Association (Victorian Branch)—DR F. B. M.

PHILLIPS Poard of Studies in Psychiatry—DR G. D. BURROWS

Non-professorial Staff Representatives:

DR D. A. ABELL DR D. CHRISTIE MR M. C. DOUGLAS DR J. R. L. FORSYTH DR J. V. HURLEY DR I. H. JONES DR J. O. LAVARACK DR C. J. LOUIS

8

Faculty Members

DR C. A. M. lAURITZEN DR D. A. McCREDIE DR J. S. McKENZIE DR F. A. О . MENDELSOHN DR M. NOTT DR R. J. PEPPERELL MR J. T. G. RENNEY DR J. SHAW MR R. J. S. THOMAS DR G. WHELAN

Elected Student Representatives:

MR A. COHEN MR I. DEVLIN MR В . KAY MISS A. MOULDEN MR W. PROUDLOCK MISS R. RYAN MR D. SCHEPISI

7

TEACHING AND RESEARCH STAFF

Staff are listed alphabetically within categories, not according to seniority.

• Indicates part-time staff t Indicates associated staff

Anatomy

Chairman of Department and Professor

LESLIE JOHN RAY, MB BS PhD HonFRACS

Professor

VACANT

Reader in Histology and Embryology JOHN OCHILTREE LAVARACK, MB BS PhD FRCPA

Reader in Histology NEIL CAMERON RAOUL MERRILLEES, MB BS

Senior Lecturers in Anatomy BOYCE DARRYL BOWDEN, BDSG Q'Id MDSc FDS DOrth RCS CYRIL HARCOURT CHAMBERS, MB BS DDR FORA GEOFFREY CHARLES TREADGOLD KENNY, MB BS Q'id MSc

Senior Lecturers in Histology and Embryology PETER MAXWELL ROBINSON, BSc PhD BERNICE FRANCES STRATFORD, MB BS PhD

Senior Demonstrators

DAINE ALCORN, MSc PETER FRANCIS BURT, MB BS NORMAN EIZENBERG, MB BS JOSEPH ANTHONY GIRAMONDO, MB BS ROSLYN ANNE PERRY, MSc MARY BLYTHE WHEELER, BSc MB BS JILLIAN ROSE WHITNEY, MB BS •EVELYN LIVINGSTON BILLINGS, MB BS DCH Lind. •THERESA MARIE COCKBILL, BSc MB BS FFARACS •JILL JOHNSTON, BSc Syd. •COLIN JOHN McRAE, MB BS MRCP FRALP •REES JAMES RIDDELL, MB BS DTM&H RCP&S •EFFIE MAXWELL ROSS, MB BS •JOAN WHYTE TOWNS, MB BS

Tutor •CORALIE KENNY, DPhys MAPA

Biochemistry

Chairman of Department and Reader CHARLES ALBERT MICHAEL HAURITZEN, Assoc H.W.-C.

Phd Edin. ARIL

8

Teaching Staff

Professor FRANCIS JOHN RAYMOND HIRD, PhD Cantab. MAgrSc DSc Professor SIMON JOSHUA LEACH, BScTech Ma п c. PhD DSc Leeds

Professor of Biochemistry (Medical)

GERHARD HANS SCHREIBER, Dried DozBiochim Freiburg I. Br.

Readers PATRICK ROBERT CARNEGIE, BSc st. And. PhD Aberd. LLOYD ROSS FINCH, BSc W.Aust. PhD JOHN WILLIAMSON LEGGE, MSc MARY TERESA McQUILLAN, MSc PhD

Senior Lecturers

BARRIE ERNEST DAVIDSON, BAgrSc BSc PhD KENWYN RONALD GAVLER, BAgrSc Adel. PhD Q'/d BRUCE RAYMOND GRANT, BAgrSc Q'/d MSc PhD Purdue ROBERT WILLIAM HENDERSON, BSc PhD MAXWELL ARTHUR MARGINBON, BSc WILLIAM HUGH SAWYER, MSc Minn. PhD A.N.U. BAgrSc

Lecturers

ROBERT CORNELIS AUGUSTEYN, BSc PhD Q'id PAMELA ELLEN EMINA TODD, BSc PhD

Senior Tutors

FLORENCE CHUN 1 FELLOWS, MA Cantal. PhD Beif. GEOFFREY HAMILTON McKENZIE, BSc PhD ALANA MITCHELL, BSc PhD VIMLA PATEL, BSc Otago JOHN WILLIAM PHILLIPS, BSc PhD KARL MALCOLM ROGERS, MSc PhD Well.

Senior Research Fellow

tGEORGE RICHARD JAGO, BSc Syd. PhD HDD

Research Fellow

JÖRG URBAN, Drrernat Berlin

Senior Associate

tDAVID GORDON CAMPBELL, MB ChB N.Z. BSc Well. FRALP FRCPA

Community Health

Chairman of the Department and Professor ROSS WHARTON WEBSTER, MB BS FRACGP

First Assistant in Clinical Epidemiology DAVID GORDON STUART CHRISTIE, MB BS Q'1ó MD Lind. FRACP MFCM

Second Assistant DENIS URMSTON SHEPHERD, MB BS FRACGP FRSH

Third Assistant •NICHOLAS PETER SIEMENSMA, MB BS PhD FRALP

Lecturer •PETER CAMPBELL RENNIE, MB BS

Senior Associates tFREDERIC NICOLET BOUVIER, SBStJ MB BS FRACGP t К E1TH EDGAR BROWN, MB BS

9

Faculty of Medicine

tALLAN NOEL CARTER, MB BS tEDWARD PRUEN CORONER, MD FRALP FRACGP tANDREW NOEL FRASER, MB BS FRACGP FRCGP tDOUGLAS ANTHONY GAMMON, MB BS tBRUCE HOCKING, MB BS DPI Syd. FRACGP tPETER WARREN JOSEPH LEIGHTON, MB BS FRACGP tJOHN DAVID LIVINGSTON, MB BS tDONALD ROSS MACDONALD, MB BS tDOUGLAS WILLIAM RANKIN, MB BS DPI Lend. MFCM RCP

FRSH tMARY PATRICIA WILKINSON, BSc MD Lind. MRCP MRACP

Associates

tDOROTHY BARBARA BORGE, MB BS tMICHAEL SEAN GARVAN, MB BS FRACGP tGARRY LYTON JOSLIN, MB BS

Research Associates tLORRAINE LAWRENCE, BCom DipSocStud tJANE PALFREY MATTHEWS, PhD Sheff. BSc

Medical Biology Director of the Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Medical Research

Professor Sir GUSTAV JOSEPH VICTOR NOSSAL, KBE BSc(Med) BS Syd. PhD FRALP FRCPA FACIA FAA

Senior Associates

tIAN REAP MACKAY, MD FRCP FRALP FRCPA tDONALD METCALF, AO BSc(Med) Syd. MD FRCPA

FRACP FAA tJACQUES FRANCIS ALBERT PIERRE MILLER, BSc( М ed) MB

BS Syd. PhD DSc Lend. FAA FRS tKENNETH DOUGLAS SHORTMAN, BSc Syd. PhD

Medical History

Senior Associates • Professor Emeritus KENNETH FITZPATRICK RUSSELL, MB

MS DLitt FRACS FRACP • JEAN FOGO RUSSELL

Medicine: Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital


AUSTIN ERIC DOYLE, MD BS Lind. FRCP FRALP

Merck Sharpe & Dohme Professor of Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics

WILLIAM JOHN LOUIS, MD BS FRALP Professor THOMAS JOHN MARTIN, MD BS FRACP

First Assistant FREDERICK ARTHUR OSCAR MENDELSOHN, MD BS PhD

FRACP

Reader IAN FARQUHAR CAMPBELL McKENZIE, MD BS FRACP

Reader in Psychiatry

RUSSELL AINSLIE MEARES, MD 8S DPM Lind. MRCPsych. FANZCP

MB

10

Teaching Staff

Second Assistants

JAMES SAVILLE WILEY, BSc MD BS MRACP NEVILLE DAVID YEOMANS, MB BS FRACP

Second Assistant in Psychological Medicine (Repatriation General Hospital)

PAUL EDWARD DEBENHAM, MA MB BChir Canteb. MRCP Eng. MRCPsych MPhIl Lind. MANZCP

Third Assistant in Psychiatry VACANT

Senior Lecturer in Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics BEVYN JARROTT, BPharm PhD

Temporary Lecturer in Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics PHILLIP MART BEART, BSc PhD

Clive & Vera Ramaciotti Foundation Research Fellow DOUGLAS JOHN BROWN, MB BS Mon. MRACP

National Health and Medical Research Council Postgraduate Medical Research Scholars NICHOLAS CHIRSTOPHIDIS, MB BS JOHN JAMES McNEIL, MB BS Adel.

Postgraduate Research Students JEANETTE FRIEDMAN, BSc BARBARA RAYSON, MSc CHARLES FRANCIS BUTTIGIEG, BSc HENNIG IMBERGER, BMecEng BRUCE EDWARD LOVELAND, BSc GEORGE WILLIAM MIHALY, BPharm MSc ARLIE McQUEEN, MSc MAURO SERGIO SANDRIN, BSc ANNE JULIA CULVENOR, BSc ELIZABETH LYN CONWAY, BSc OLAF HEINO OSKAR DRUMMER, BAppChem RM/T STEWART GRANT DUFFY, BSc Mon.

Professorial Associates tPETER FRANCIS BLADIN, BSc MD BS FRALP tPETER ANTHONY CASTALDI, MD BS Syd. FRALP tJOHN KINGSLEY DAWBORN, MB BS PhD Lind. FRALP tRICHARD ALAN SMALLWOOD, MD BS FRALP

Senior Associates tWILLIAM ROBERT ADAM, MD BS PhD MRACP tLIONEL BARRY ARKLES, MRCS LRCP FRALP tCOLIN EDWIN BARTER, MB BS FRALP tALAISTAIR RERIDT CAMPBELL, MD BS FRALP tRICHARD ASKIN CHENOWETH, MB BS FRALP tGRAHAM WYNDHAM COOPER, MB BS MRCP FRALP tJOHN PAUL COGHLAN, PhD DSc tBRIAN ROGER ENTWISLE, MB BS DDM Syd. FALD

* Personal Chair in the Department of Anatomy and Medical History

11

Faculty of Medicine

tLEWIS WILLIAM FAULKS, MB BS MRACP FACMA tANDREW NOEL FRASER, MB BS FRACGP tKEVIN JAMES FRASER, MB BS MRCP MRACP tJOHN GREEN, BSc MB ChB Glas. MRCP Edin. FRCPath tWALTER FALCONER REALE, MB BS FRALP tDOUGLAS ROLAND HOCKING, MB BS Syd. FRALP tROBERT NEIL HOPE, MB BS FRALP tGEORGE JERUMS, MD BS FRALP !DAVID GEORGE LEGGE, MD BS FRALP tELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP tWALTER JOSEPH MOON, MB BS tANDREW COLGATE NEWELL, MD BS FRALP tDESMOND PARKIN, MB BS FRALP FRCPA tNEWMAN PINKUS, MB BS FRALP tMAURICE ROSENBAUM, MB BS FRALP tJONATHAN ARTHUR STREETON, MB BS FRALP FCCP tBERNARD SWEET, MB BS MRCP FRALP tBERNARD TREISTER, MB ChB N.Z. MRCP Edin. FACC tFRANK JOHN VAJDA, MD BS MRCP Edin. FRALP tJOHN VERNEA. MD Bucharest tDIANE MARIE WILSON. MB BS FRALP

Associates

tMICHAEL GERALD DARKE, MB BS Q'1d MRACP tDOUGLAS ROBERT GAULD, MB BS FRALP tHUGH WARWICK GREVILLE, MB BS BMedSc tPETER WILLIAM HOLMES, MB BS MRACP BARRIE RAYMOND MILLER, FSHP PhC NPs tJOHN MICHAEL O'CONNELL, MB BS MRACP tROBERT PIERCE, MB BS MRACP tG. RAJAH RAM RAJENDRA MB BS Singapore MRACP tJEFFREY MAX SLONIM, MB BS MRACP tMARY ROSE STEWART, MB BS MRACP

Medicine: Department of James Stewart Professor, The Royal Melbourne Hospital

Chairman of Department and Professor RICHARD ROBERT HAYNES LOVELL, MD BS Lind. MSc FRCP

MRCS FRACP HonFACP

Professor PRISCILLA SHEATH KINCAID-SMITH CBE BSc MB BCh Rand. MD DCP Lind. FRCP FRACP2

First Assistant, Reader and Assistant Director

JOSEPH ROBERT EMMOTT FRASER, MD BS FRCP FRALP

First Assistants and Readers ROGER AZIZ MELICK, MD BS Syd. FRCP FRALP KENNETH DAVID MUIRDEN, MD BS FRALP

First Assistant in Clinical Epidemiology

•DAVID GORDON CHRISTIE, MB BS Q'id MD Lind. FRALP MFCM

First Assistant in Clinical Pharmacology

JOHN SHAW, MB BS PhD Syd. FRALP FACC

! Personal Chair to the Department of Medicine (R.M.H.)

12

Teaching Staff

Second Assistant (Temporary)

ROBERT FRANCIS WESTLAND MOULDS, BMedSc MB BS PhD FRALP

Third Assistant ANTHONY LAWRENCE CUNNINGHAM, BMedSc MB BS

Research Fellow MARGARET URSULA BULLEN, MB BChir MA Cantab.

National Health and Medical Research Council Research Fellow JOHN DUNCAN MATHEWS, MD BS BSc PhD FRALP

National HeaIth and Medical Reseach Council Research Fellow in Rheumatology

BARRY JAMES CLARRIS, BAgrSc PhD DipEd National Health and Medical Research Council Senior Research Officer

ELSMAREE BAXTER, MSc PhD Lind. National Health and Medical Research Council Postgraduate Research

Scholar MARIO ANTHONY DE LUISE, BMedSc MB BS

National Health and Medical Research Council Research Assistants HELEN LOUISE PHILLIPS, BSc DipEd KAYLENE JOY QUELCH, BSc Syd.

Graduate Research Assistants STELLA CLARK, BAppSc RMIT CHRISTOPER WESTON SLEE, BA Adel. SIEW KIM TAY, BSc Malaya JANETTE ROSE TEMPERLEY, BA LaT.

Professorial Associates in Medicine

tKENNETH FAIRBAIRN FAIRLEY, MD BS FRCP FRALP tTHOMAS HENRY HURLEY, MD BS FRCP FRALP tIAN REAV MACKAY, MD BS FRCP FRALP tFRANK IAN RUSSELL MARTIN, MD BS FRALP tJOHN GRAEME SLOMAN, BSc MB BS FRALP FRCP Edin,

MRCP FACC Lecturer in Medicine to Dental Students

HAROLD STANLEY SYMONS, MB BS MRCP FRALP Senior Research Associate

KINGSLEY WALLIS MILLS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS

Senior Associates in Medicine

tJOHN THOMAS ANDREWS, MB BS Lind. LRCP MRCS DObst RCOG FRACP MCRA

tANTHONY JOHN FREDERICK D'APICE, BS Syd. MD Melb. FRACP

tSOL BRAND, MD BS tJOHN FRANCIS CADE, MD BS PhD FRALP tKEITH COWAN, MB BS tDAVID CROSBY COWLING, MD BS FRALP FRCPath tERWIN ARNOLD DODGE, BSc MB BS MRACP tRENE HENRI DUPUCHE, MB BS MRCP Lind. tPETER EBELING, BSc MD BS FRCP FRALP tJOHN ALLAN FORGES, MB BS FRALP tPETER BERT GREENBERG, MD BS PhD FRALP tROBERT JOHN HJORTH, MD BS FRALP tVERE DAVID URQUHART HUNT, MD BS FRALP

13

Faculty of Medicine

tRICHARD GRAEME LARKINS, MB BS FRALP ?ELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DipCH MRCP ?WALTER JOSEPH MOON, MB BS ?MICHAEL COWPER FRANKLYN PAIN, MD Syd. BS FRALP tWlLLlAM MclNTOSH ROSE, MD BS MRCP FRALP tSTUART JOHN HUNT SHEPHERD, MB BS DiplospAdmin

LIA 1JOHN GRAEME SLOMAN, BSc MB BS FRALP FRCP Edin.

MRCP Lind. FACC tiAN OLIVER STARLE, MD BS DDM Syd. MRCP FRALP ?JOHN RICHARD SULLIVAN, MB BS MRCP FRALP tPETER WILLIAM SUTHERLAND, MD BS FRALP ?HAROLD STANLEY SYMONS, MB BS MRCP FRALP ?PETER ALEXANDER VALENTINE, MB BS FRALP MRCP tALFRED JOHN WALL, MD BS FRALP ?JUDITH ANN WHITWORTH, MD BS FRALP tSAUL WIENER, MD Zurich PhD FRACP ?JOHN SAMUEL YEATMAN, MB BS FRALP

Associates in Medicine GAVIN JOHN BECKER, MB BS MRACP RICHARD GEORGE BELL, MB BS MRACP JOHN DAVID BUCHANAN, MB BS MRACP IAN KAYE FORGES, MB BS MRACP tERlC CAMPBELL LAIRD, MB BS FRACP tWILLIAM JOHN MACKAY, MB BS tJEANNINE WHITECROSS MILLS, BSc MB BS MARGARET ELIZABETH MITCHELL, MB BS GWYNNE WILTON THOMAS, MB ChB Cape T. PhD Oxon.

MRCP POORIA VIKRAMAN, MB BS FRACP 1JITENDRA KANTlLAL VOLRA, MD BS Bom.

Medicine: St. Vincent's Hospital


DAVID GEOFFREY PENINGTON, MA DM BCh Oxon FRCP FRACP FRCPA

First Assistant GREGORY WHELAN, MB BS Syd. FRALP

Reader in Clinical Pharmacology

MAURICE LAURENCE MASHFORD, MB BS Syd. MSc FRALP

Second Assistants COLIN NICHOLSON CHESTERMAN, MB BS Syd. PhD Oxon.

FRACP DONALD JOHN CHlSN0LM, MB BS Syd. FRAEP FRANK CALEB FIRKIN, BSc(Med) MB BS Syd. PhD Monash

FRACP John Hayden Research Fellow

RICHARD JOHN FISHER, BSc MB BS Senior Tutor

VALDO MICHELANGELI, FRMIT MMedSci She/i.

14

Teaching Staff

Graduate Research Assistants ROSS WILLIAM BURY, PhD GLORIA MARIA CARUSO, BSc HELEN AUDREY CULLIVER, BSc ALLISON MARJORIE HILL, BSc PAUL WILLIAM KENT, BSc •JANICE MARGARET LYALL, PhD A.N.U. JENNIFER ROBIN McGREADY, MSc IAN DAVID MANSELL, BSc SUSAN HOPE PROCTOR, BSc

Professorial Associate

tIAN GREGORY McDONALD, MD BS FRALP tFRANCIS JOHN MORGAN, BA MD BS

Senior Associates

tFRANK PETER ALFORD, MD BS FRALP tKERRY JOHN BREEN, MD BS FRALP tWILLIAM IVON BURNS, MB BS FRALP tRUD0LFN LEOPOLD CHMIEL, MB BS DTR FRALP tBERNARD GEORGE CLARKE, MB BS MRCP FRALP tDENIS NORLEY CLARKE, MB BS DDM Syd. tRONALD KEITH DOIG, MD BS FRALP IRENE HENRI DUPUCHE, MB BS MRCP FRACP tBRIAN JAMES FEERY, MB BS MRAOGP tJAMES EDWARD FITZGERALD, MD BS FRACP tBRYAN PETER GALBALLY, MB BS FRACP tOLGA MARGARET GARSON, MB BS FRCPA FRACP tGEORGE STEWART HALE, MD BS FRACP tWILLIAM CARRICK HEATH, MB BS FRACP tJOHN MARTIN McNAMARA, MB BS FRACP tLUKE MURPHY, MD BS FRACP MRCP tJOHN FRANCIS N1ALL, MD BS FRACP MRCP tBRYAN McKAY RUSH, MB BS Syd. FRACP FRCPA tJOSEPH NATALINO SANTAMARIA, MB BS FRACP tJOHN DAMIEN TANGE, MB BS Q'id MRCP FRACP

Associates

tDAVID CHARLES CADE, MB BS FRACP tVLADIMIR MICHAEL JELINEK, MD BS FRACP tELIZA8ETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DCH Lond. MRCP tWlCClAN MAURICE McCUBBERY, MB BS tJOHN EDMOND O'DONOVAN, MB BS FRACP tEDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRACP tMARGARET ANN PICKLES, MB BS BSc DPM MANZCP EDWARD BRUCE TOMIINSON, MB BS FRACP

Microbiology

Chairman of Department and Professor DAVID OGILVIE WHITE, MD BS Syd. PhD A.N.U. MSc FRCPA

Professor ALFRED JAMES PITTARD, PhD Yale DSc DipPharm FAA

Readers WILLIAM BOYLE, PhD Glas. IAN HAMILTON HOLMES, PhD A.N.U. BSc NANCY MILL'S, MBE PhD Brist. MAgrSc

15

Faculty of Medicine

Senior Lecturer and Assistant Director of the Microbiological Diagnostic Unit

JOCELYN ROBERT LANE FORSYTH, MD ChB Cape T. DipBact Lind. FRCPA

Senior Lecturers

JOAN FORREST GARDNER, DPhil Oxon. MSc •GWENDOLYN LESLEY GILBERT, MB BS FRACP DORIS MARY GRAHAM, MSc A.N.U. PhD Lind. BSc BRIAN HODGSON, PhD Leeds DOROTHY JOAN SCHIAVONE, MB BS FRCPA RUSSELL GEORGE WILKINSON, MSc W.Auat. PhD Lind.

Lecturer CHRISTINA CHEERS, PhD

Senior Tutors

• ROSEMARY DAVIDSON, BSc • LYNETTE HOWDEN, BSc ENE READE, BSc Adel. • DOROTHY SLATER, MSc NEVILLE JOHN TUDROSZEN, BSc

Research Fellows

ELIZABETH MARGOT ANDERS, BSc PhD HERBERT JOHN SAVOR, MSc lii. PhD Louisiana ROBERT BRENT DAVEY, PhD DAVID JACKSON, BSc Lind. PhD A.N.U. ROGER DIETER SCHNAGL, PhD

Senior Associates

tEUGENE ROBIN PAVILLARD, MB BS Lind. FRCPA tIAN DAVID GUST, MD BS BSc( М ed) DipBact Lind. FRCPA 1BRYAN CRAIG AEKINS STRATFORD, ED MD BS MRACP

FRCPA MRCPath

Associate

1FREDERIGK ANGELO TOSOLINl, MB BS Adel. PhD A.N.U. FRCPA

Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Royal Women's Hospital

Chairman of Department and Dunbar looper Professor

SIR LANCE TOWNSEND, Kt VRD MD BS DTM&H Lind. FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS FRCOG Hon,FRCSCan. Hon.FACOGS.Afr. lon.FACOG (until 31/12/77)

Professor JAMES BOYER BROWN, MSc N.Z. & Meib. PhD DSc Edin.t

First Assistant (Neonatal Paediatrics)

WILLIAM HENRY KITCHEN, MD BS FRACP

First Assistants (Obstetrics and Gynaecology)

JOHN RICHARD HENRY FLIEGNER, MD BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRACS MRCOG

ROGER JAMES PEPPERELL, MB BS MGO MD Mon. FRACP MRCOG

16

Teaching Staff

Second Assistant

DAVID CAMPBELL DOWNING, MB BS THOMAS RONALD EGGERS, MB BS RAPHAEL KUHN, MB BS

Senior Lecturer

MARGERY ADA SMITH, BSc PhD Clinical Assistant

•JAMES HENRY EVANS, MD BS FRCOG MRCOG

Thalia Roche Demonstrator in Obstetrics

JOHN GRANTLEY SHELTON, MBE MB BS FRCOG FAGG

Research Staff

JANE ELIZABETH BASCOMB, BSc •ANGELA BRENTON, BSc DipEd MARGARET ISOBEL BRIGHT, BAgSc •SHIRLEY ELIZABETH CAMERON, BA DipSocStud •ANNE RICKARDS, BA MAPSS • MARGARET MARY RYAN, BA DipSocStud •JOCELYN SEARBY, BA MAPSS •RHYL WINIFRED WADE, MB BS LESLEY ANN WEAVER, BSc

Professorial Associate

KEVIN MCCAUL, MBE LRCPI LМ DA RCS FFARCS FFARACS Hon.FFARCSI

Senior Associates

FREDERICK DOUGLAS ADEY, MB BS FRCOG FAGG JOHN STANLEY BARNES, MB BS FRCS Edin. MRCOG JEAN UNITA BARRIE, BSc PhD FRANK REX BETHERAS, MB BS FRCOG FAGG GYTHA WADE BETHERAS, MB BS FRCOG LOUIS JOHN BUTTERFIELD, MB ChB N.Z. DObst MRCOG

FAGO GARRY DONALD BYRNE, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin. MAURICE CAUCHI, MSc MD PhD DPI FRCPA WILLIAM CHANEN, MB BS DGO FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRCOG RUTH DAVOREN, MB BS FRCPA MIAC DENYS WOODESON FORTUNE, MB ChB Brist. MRCPE MRC

Path MIAC FRCPE PETER FEREZ GLENNING, MB BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRAOS

FRCOG FAGG PETER HEATH, MB BS MRCOG FAGG IVAN HORACEK, MB BS FRCAP AAim PAUL ELLIS JEFFERY, MB BS DGO FRCOG WALTER IAN HAREWOOD JOHNSTON, MB BS MGO FRCOG MICHAEL KLOSS, MB BS FRCOG FAGG BARRY LEE GRIFFITHS KNEALE, MB BS DGO FRAOS FRCOG

FAGO GEOFFREY KURRLE, MD BS DTR FRALP FRCA ALWYN RIVETT LONG, MB BS DGO FRACS FRCOG FAGG

t Personal Chair in the Department of Obstetrics and Gynaecology

17

Faculty of Medicine

KENNETH RAYMOND MOUNTAIN, MB BS FRALP ANDREW GEORGE OSTER, MB BS FRCPA GRAEME JOHN RATTEN, MB BS MRCOG FAGG DONALD JOHN BAWLING, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin. IAN CHARLES ROSS, MB BS MGO FRCOG FAGG JOHN GRANTLEY SHELTON, MBE MB BS FRCOG FAGG JACOB SILBERBERG, MB BCH Rand. MMedRadD Rend. GAD TREVAKS, MB В S DipHospAdmin LIA FACIA

Associates

MAXWELL COLE, MB BS MRCOG BARRY JOHN DAWSON. MB BS MRCOG STANLEY BRUCE JOHNSON, MB BS MRCOG NEIL ROBERT JOHNSTONE, MB BS MRCOG AMAND PRIMA MAHARAJ, MB BS MRCOG RONALD ROME, MB BS MRCOG RUBEN WEIN, MB BS MRCOG

Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Mercy and Austin Hospitals

Chairman of Department and Professor NORMAN ALBERT В EISCHER, MD BS MGO FRCS Edin.

FRACS FRCOG PAGO

First Assistants

DAVID ALAN ABELL, MB BS MGO FLOG s.A. MRCOG FAGG JOHN HEDLEM DREW, MD BS FRALP 'PETER CAPELL DOBSON, MB BS FRCS Edin. MRCOG FAGG •JAMES CARNEGIE GRIMWADE, MB BS MRCOG FAGG 'GRAEME JOHN RATTEN, MB BS MRCOG PAGO 'CHRISTOPHER STEPHEN TARGETT, MB BS FRCS Edin.

MRCOG FAG"

Lecturers

?JAMES BOYER BROWN. MSc N.Z.&Melb. DSc PhD Edin. TRUTH DAVOREN, MB BS MCPA

Research Staff

GRAEME ALLEN FISCHER, BSc

Senior Associates

tCHRISTINE ACTON, MB BS MRCRA tCHARLES ANTONIO BARBARO, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRAOS

FRCOG FAGG tKEVIN ALBERT BARHAM, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG FAGG t JAMES ERNEST BREHENY, MB BS FRALP tDONALD PUI-GHEE CHAN. MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS Glas.

MMSA Lond. FRCOG FAGG ?MICHAEL SHINE FORREST, MB BS FRCOG PAGO t IAN ALEXANDER Mac1SAAC, MB BS FRCS FRAOS MRCOG

FAG O tGERALD ARTHUR MANLY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG

FAG O tPATRICK ALAN MAPLESTONE, MB BS DA FFARACS

is

Teaching Staff

?MICHAEL WILLIAM SOMERVILLE, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS MRCOG FAGG

tLEON ISRAEL TAFT, BSc MB BS FRCPA MCRPath

Associates tPETER WINTER ASHTON, MB BS MRCOG FAGG tDENYS W00DESON FORTUNE, MB ChB MRCP Edin. FRCPA

FIAC MRCPath tLAWRENCE IVAN HATHERLEY, LRCP MRCS FRACGP ?PETER ANTHONY LONG, MB BS MRCOG FAGG tEDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP tALAN STEWART BODEY, BSc MB BS FRCPA MRCPath ?ROBERT JOHN HORSFALL, MB BS FRAOS MRCOG FAGG tHOWARD MACDONALD WALKER, MB BS MRCOG FAGG

Ophthalmology Ringland Anderson Professor

GERARD WILLIAM CROCK, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRALP

First Assistant HECTOR MacLEAN, MB ChB DO Lind. FRCS Edin.

Second Assistants

•JAMES DAVID CAIRNS, MB BS Q'id DO FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS

•PETER NEIL HENDERSON, MB BS DO FRAOS

Senior Research Fellow •MAGDA HORVAT, MD Bud.

Lecturer •ALAN ISAACS, MB BS DO Lind. LOSc

Senior Associates

tCOURTENAY HUGH GREER, MB BS Lind. MRSS LRCP MRCPA FCPath

tJULIAN BERNARD HEINZE, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS tKENNETH GEORGE HOWSAM, MB BS DO FRACS FACMA tBERNARD McCARTHY OBRIEN, BSc MB BS FRCS FRACS

FACS tRONALD WILLIAM PARKER, MB BS DO ?IAN FLETT ROBERTSON, MB BS DO Lind. FRACS tGEOFFREY SUTHERLAND, MB BS DOMS Lind. FRCS Edin.

FRACS ?JOSEP WING SANG YEUNG, MB BS DipAmBOphth FRACO

FRACS

Research Associates

tJOHN LLEWELLYN COLVIN, MB BS Q'Id DO RCP&S Lind. FRCS(Ophth) Edin. FRACS(Ophth)

t HUGH RINGLAND TAYLOR, MB BS BMedSc DO FRACS

Otolaryngology

William Gibson Professor

GRAEME MILBOURNE CLARK, MB MS PhD Syd. FRCS Lind. & Edin. FRACS

19

Faculty of Medicine

First Assistant

QUENTIN BAILEY, MA MB FRAOS DLO

Fellow THOMAS SEN BHANU, BSc MB BS MS DLO

Senior Associates

•RICHARD PETER FREEMAN, MD DLO FRCS FRAOS HUGH MILLAR, MB BS DLO FRCS FRAOS

•CONSTANCE BEATRICE NAPIER, DLO R.C.P. & S. MRCS LRCP

•BERNARD McCARTHY O'BRIEN, BSc MB MS FRCS FRAOS FRCS

•CLIVE PYMAN, MB BS DLO FRAOS • Professor PETER READE, MDS PhD Adel. MDSc FDSRCS •COLIN RICHARDS, DLO FRAOS •JOHN ROBERT THOMSON, MB BS Q'id DLO FRFPS Glas.

FRCS Edin. FRACS •RIRY WILLIS, MB BS DLO FRCS FRAOS

Associates

•PIERRE GORMAN, В AgricSc BEd PhD Cantab. • PETER ADRIAN GREY, MB BS DLO FRACS FRCS • PARTIA SARATHY KATTULA, BA MB BS And. DLO And.

& Me/b.

Research Staff

RAYMOND BLACK, MSc JOIN GWYTHER, BSc IAN CAMERON FORSТ ER, MAppSc JAMES FINLAY PATRICK, MSc MIT CHOW TONG, BE • BERNARD O'LOUGHLIN, BA DAud

Lecturers in Audiology

FIELD WINSTON RICKARDS, BSc MEd la п c. NORAN CASEY, BCom DAud

• DAVID GWYNN EDWARDS, DAud Ma п c. EDMO ND HENRY KEIR, BA Q'Id

• PAT MURPHY, BA

Paediatrics

Stevenson Professor

DAVID MILES DANKS, MD BS FRALP

Royal Children's Hospital Research Foundation Professor

DONALD BROOK CHEEK, MD В S Adel. DSc Cincinnati

First Assistants

JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRALP IAN JAMES HOPKINS, MD BS FRALP DAVID ALEXANDER McCREDIE, BSc MD BS FRALP

First Assistants (Neonatal Paediatrics)

JOHN HEDLEM DREW, MD BS MRACP WILLIAM HENRY KITCHEN, MD BS FRALP

20

Teaching Staff

Senior Lecturers •DAVID BUXTON PITT, MD BS FRALP •ARNOLD LAWRENCE SMITH, MB BS FRALP •HOWARD ERNEST WILLIAMS, MD BS FRALP

Professor Emeritus

VERNON LESLIE COLLINS, CBE MD BS FRCP FRALP DCH Land.

Research Fellows

MARJORIE DUNLOP, BSc ESTHER ROTENBERG, BSc Taske it •JAMES CAMAKARIS, BSc PhD •RICHARD GRANT HAY COTTON, BAgrSc PhD • PETER SCHLESINGER, BAppSc

Pathology

Chairman of Department and Professor GEORGE SWANSON CHRISTIE, MD BS FRAOS FRALP FRCPA

FRCPath

Readers CHARLES RICHARD GREEN (Assistant Curator of Museum),

MB BS PhD FRCPA MRCPath JOHN VICTOR HURLEY, MD BS PhD FRALP FRCPA FRCPath PRITHVIPALL SINGH BHATHAL, MB BS Adel. PhD FRCPA

Reader in Neuropathology ROSS McDONALD ANDERSON, MB BS FRCPA MRCPath

Senior Lecturers JOHN DAMIEN TANGE, MB BS RD MRCP FRALP FRCPA •KATHRYN NAKASHIAN HAM, BA Calif. MD Chic. PhD

Lecturers THELMA JEAN BAXTER, MSc PhD CHRISTOPHER LAMPION FUNDER, MB BS PhD REX NEWBURY LE PAGE, MSc Adel. PhD

Stewart Lecturer VACANT

Lecturer in Pathology to Dental Students 'PETER ELLIS CAMPBELL, MB BS FRCPA

Lecturer-Demonstrators •MICHAEL PHILIP KENDAL SHOOBRIDGE, MB BS DCP Lend.

FRCPA •GEORGE SZEGO (Beaney Scholar), MD Budapest PhD

Professorial Associate tJOHN DOUGLAS HICKS, MB BS FRACP FRCPA FRCPath

Senior Associates in Pathology tNORMAN ALEXANDER DAVIS, MB BS FRCPA tDENYS WOODESEN FORTUNE, MB ChB Bristol MRCP Edit,.

FRCPA MRCPath tCOURTENAY HUGH GREER, MB BS Lind. FRCPA tALAN LLEWELYN WILLIAMS, MD BS FRCPA

21

Faculty of Medicine

Principal Research Fellow (N.H. & M.R.C.)

GRAEME BRUCE RYAN, MD BS PhD FRCPA

Principal Research Fellow (Anti-Cancer Cncl. Vic.) GORDON CHARLES HARD, BSc Auck. BVSc PhD Syd.

MRCPath

Research Fellows JILL MERRILYN BLUNCK, MB BS PhD • NORMAN PETER MADSEN, MSc PhD Q'Id

Associates in Renal Disease tDIANE MARIE WILSON, MB BS FRALP tJOSEPH MICHAEL XIPELL, MB BS FRCPA

Research Associate tANNE GILMOUR JABARA, MSc PhD

Research Schola Г s BELINDA EDITH CLARKE, MB BS JERZY EDWARD LABUC, MPharm LEE CHEW PRONG, BSc WILLIAM ARTHUR PHILLIPS, BSc VALERIE MARU SURTEES, MB ChB BSc la п c.

Forensic Medicine Senior Lecturer

-VERNON DOUGLAS PLUECKHAHN, ED MD BS Adel. FRALP FRCPA FRCPath

tARTHUR WILLIAM BURTON, CSU MB BS LLB FACIA • t.IOHN DOUGLAS HICKS, MB BS FRALP FRCPA FRCPath tPETER LOUIS WALLER, LLB BC'. Oxon.

Pathology: Austin Hospital

Professor HAROLD DALLAS ATTWOOD, MD ChB St. And. MD FRACP FRCPA FRCPath

Senior Lecturers

CHRISTOPHER JOHN LOUIS, MB BS PhD MRCPath SHEUNG TO CHOU, MB Taiwan PhD Hong Kong MRCPath

Senior Tutor

XENIA DENNETT, BSc PhD AAIMT

Professorial Associate in Pathology

-PETER ANTHONY CASTALDI, MD Syd. FRALP FRCPA

Senior Associate in Pathology tBEN MACMAHON WADHAM, MB BS DCP Lend. FRCPA

FRCPath MIAC

Research Staff

•EDWARD WOODALL GAULT, BSc MD MS FRCPA FRCPath

FRACS

Research Associate

-JOHN CONNELLAN, BSc aid PhD A.N.U.

22

Teaching Staff

Research Assistant

•GILLIAN BARTON ROSE, BSc Tas.

Pharmacology

Professor MICHAEL JOHN RAND, PhD Syd. MSc

Reeder In Applied Pharmacology, joint appointment with Department of Medicine, St Vincent's Hospital

MAURICE LAURENCE MASHFORD, MB BS Syd. MSc FRALP

Reader WILLIAM JOHN LANG, BSc PhD PhC

Senior Lecturers

MAX RAPHAEL FENNESSY, BSc PhD MARIAN McCULLOCH, BSc Lind. MSc PhD DAVID FREDERICK STORY, BSc PhD

Lecturer MICHAEL WILLIAM NOTT, BSc PhD Strath.

Lecturer in Pharmacy

LOUIS ROLLER, BSc BPharm FPS PhC

Principal Tutor

WAN SOON GAY, MSc Tutor

FRANCIS JOSEPH LASKA, BSc

Senior Associates

tJOCELYN NINA O'NEIL, MSc PhD syd. ?COLIN RAPER, BPharm PhD Lind. PhC MPS

Senior Research Fellow JANINA STASZEWKA-BARCZAK, MD PhD Warsaw

Research Officer BRONWEN JEAN SMITH, BPharm MSc Syd.

Graduate Research Assistant

WENDY HOPE, BSc

Physiology


IAN DARIAN-SMITH, BS MD Adel.

Professor ALLAN JOHN DAY, BS MD Adel. DPhil Oxon. DSc

Readers

SANDFORD LLOYD SKINNER, BS MD Adel. EVERTON ROWE TRETHEWIE, MD Adel. & Me/b. BS DSc

FRACP

Senior Lecturers CHRISTOPHER BELL, MSc PhD MARY HAZEL DEAN CHENNELLS, BSc PhD Lind. KENNETH OLAFUR JOHNSON, MSc Syrac. PhD Johns H.

23

Faculty of Medicine

PATRICIA PRICE KEOGH, MSc JOHN SIMON McKENZIE, MSc PhD TREVOR GORDON REDGRAVE, MB BS PhD W.Aust. KENNETH HILL SHANKLY, MSc ELSIE MARELYN WINTOUR-COGHLAN, MSc PhD

Lecturers JOHN MICHAEL DAVIS, MSc PhD ANTHONY WILFRED GOODWIN, MSc PhD Cal. Tech. ROBERT EDWARD Kum, MSc PhD YOSHIO SHIGENAGA, DDS PhD Osaka

Senior Tutors

PAUL KENINS, BSc PhD Monash FELIX ALEXANDER SHAMGAR, MScAgr DipEd Jerusalem PhD

Tutors ANDREA BENDRUPS, MSc •RAYMOND ROGERS, BAgrSc

Senior Associate

RODGER HENRY WATSON, BAgrSc DAgrSc Q'id

SeП iОГ Research Fellow

JOHN KERR FINDLAY, BAgrSc PhD Adel.

Research Fellows JAMES CLEMENT CERINI, MSc Monash PhD MILDRED ELSIE DUNCAN CERINI, MSc Monash PhD

Junior Research Fellows

ROGER DONALD HOOLEY, BAgrSc LaT. IAIN CLARKE

Senior Research Officers

SIMON OLDFIELD, BA Flinders PhD A.N.U. ARTHUR SHULК ES, BSc PhD

Research Officer JEFFREY ALAN McDONELL, BSc PhD LaT.

Graduate Research Assistants

RONALD SAMUEL CARSON, BSc Monash • ROSLYN KUSHINSKI, MSc Monash MARION JOYCE SHEERS, BSc Monash JOHN SWANEY, BSc Sussex LESLEY WALKER, BSc Monash

Psychiatry

Professor BRIAN MICHAEL DAVIES, MD BCh Wales DCH DPM Lend. FRCP FRACP FRANZCP MRCPsych

Reader at Austin Hospital RUSSELL AINSLIE MEARES, MD BS DPM FRANZCP

MRCPsych First Assistant at Royal Melbourne Hospital

GRAHAM DENE BURROWS, BSc N.Z. MB ChB Otago MD DPM FRANZCP MRCPsych

24

Teaching Staff

First Assistant at St. Vincent's Hospital IVIR HUGH JONES MD BS Lind. DPM MRCPEdin. FRANZCP

MRCPsych Second Assistants at Parkville Psychiatric Unit

•HERBERT MICHAEL BOWER, MD BS DPM FRANZCP • EDMOND CHID, MB BS DPM MRANZCP

Third Assistant at Austin Hospital BRUCE JOHN TINGE, MB BS Monash DPM MRCPsych

MRANZCP Senior Lecturers In Medical Psychology

DAVID JAMES de LANCY HORNE, BA PhD Adel. MPhil Lind. ABPsS MAPsS

MURRAY OSBORNE McLACHLAN, BA N.Z. MB ChB Otago MPhil DPM MRCPsych MRANZCP MAPsS

Clinical Supervisor • LORRAINE DENNERSTEIN, MB BS

Research Sociа l Worker at Royal Melbourne Hospital • BETTY TELTSCHER, DipSocStud

Research Fellow TREVOR RONALD NORMAN, BSc PhD Adel.

Parkville Psychiatric Unit and Institute of Mental Health Research and Postgraduate Training

Professorial Associate tJAMES RICHARD BALDWIN BALL, MB BS Dunelm MD N'cle

U.K. DPM FRANZCP

Senior Associates tFRANCIS TUDOR BOSTOCK, BSc N.Z. MB ChB Otago

MRANZCP tJERZY KRUPINSKI, Medical degree Gdansk MD Warsaw

DOCENT Warsaw tGRAHAM WILFRED MELLSOP, MB ChB Otago MD

MRANZCP MRCPsych Associates

tSTEPHEN DOUGLAS JOSHUA, MB BS Syd. DPM MRCPsych MRANZCP

tBARBARA URSULA CHARLOTTE KNOTNE, MB BS DPM Associates in Medical Psychology

tGWEN GRAVES, MA tTHOMAS VERBERNE, BA MAPsS

Senior Associates in Psychiatry ?ALLEN AUSTIN BARTHOLOMEW, MB BS Lind. MRCS LRCP

DPM RC &S MRCPsych FRANZCP MAPsS tDONALD BORNSTEIN, MB BS DPM ?JOHN CHARLES PROCTOR CONE, MB BS MD FRANZCP

MRCPsych ?JOHN PAUL COGHLAN, PhD DSc tHARRY ALFRED DERHAM, MB BS MRACP DPM MRANZCP tJACK LEWIS EVANS, MB BS syd. DPM MRANZCP ?LEON FAIL, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tJOHN MATHEW FIELDING, MB BS Adel. DPM FRANZCP ?NORMAN GOLD, MB BS MRCS LRCP MRCPsych DPM

FRANZCP tJOHN McLEOD GRIGOR, MB ChB Otago DPM FRANZCP

25

Faculty of Medicine

MRCPsych DipCrim tARTHUR DAVID GROUNDS, MB BS FRACP MRANZCP tMICHAEL JONAS, DipPsychiat McG. MB В S MRANZCP tPHILIP DAVID LEONARD, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tGEORGE LUCIEN LIPTON, MB BS FRANZCP FRACP

MRCPsych tJOHN HANSON LLOYD, MB ChB DROOG DPM FRANZCP tLEONARD MARK MARINOVICH, MB BS DPM MRCPEdin.

MRANZCP tCOLM MOORE, MB ChB Be/f. DPM ?WILLIAM RICHARD MelEOD, BA MB BS MRCP MRACP

DPM FRANZCP tWINSTON SELBY RICKARDS, BSc MD BS DPM FRACP

FRANZCP AВ PsS MAPsS tBRUCE ALAN SCOGGINS, MAgrSc Cantab. PhD tROWLAND ERIC SEAL, MA MB BS DPM FRACP FRANZCP tJOHN SERRY, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tENG-SEONG TAN, MB В S Malaya DPM FRCPsych MRANZCP tJAMES STEVENSON, MB ChB DipSocMed MRANZCP tUVIO ROGER TURECEK, MB BS DPM MRANZCP tWARREN MURRAY WHITE, MB BS DPM FRANZCP

Associates In Psychiatry BARBARA GWENYTH BURROWS, MB BS FFARACS tPETER JOHN EVANS, DPM MB BS MRANZCP tPAUL JEFFERIES GRAINGER-SMITH, MB BS MRANZCP DPM

Tutors in Medical Psychology WENDY BRUMLEY, BA MA PhD PETER DAKIS, BComm BEd DipPsychol TPTC MAPsS DIANA ELTON, BA DipPhysio DOROTHY FREI, BSc DAPHNE GLAUN, BA MA PhD BRENDON HOLWILL, MB В S JOE KIRALLY, BA MAPsS ERIKA LEONARD, BA DipEd MA MSc MAPsS A В PsS CONSTANCE PECK, BA PhD DESMOND ROMAN, MB BS DPM В MedSc MRANZCP

MRCPsych COLIN SHARP, BA JULIE SHAW, BA ROSEMARY WRIGHT, MB BS BSc

Radiology

Edgar Rouse Professor WILLIAM SAMUEL CALHOUN HARE, MD BS DDR FRCR

FRACR FRACP

First Assistant

BRIAN MAXWELL TRESS, MB BS MRACR FROR

Senior Associates (Royal Melbourne Hospital)

tALAN JOHN KERMOND, MB BS FRCP FRACR tLEON SLONIM, MB BS MRACR FROR tJAMES ROBERT SYME, MB BS Q'Id MD DDR FROR FRACR

FRACP

26

Teaching Staff

Senior Associate (St Vincent's Hospital)

tERIC JOHN GILFORD, MB BS FRACR FROR

Senior Associate (Austin Hospital)

tDAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS l'id DMRD Lind. FROR FRACR

Senior Associate (Peter MacCailum Clinic)

tJOHN JOSEPH MARTIN, MB BS FRCR FRACR

Senior Associate (Preston and Northcote Community Hospital)

tWINFIELD ROBERT CURTIS BENNETT, MB BS MRACR FRCR FRACR

Senior Associate (Mercy Hospital)

tCHRISTINE MARY ACTON, MB BS MRACR

Senior Associate (St Vincent's and Fairfield Hospitals)

tMEREDITH GORDON FRANCIS DONNAN, MB BS Syd. FRCR DDR FRACR

Associates (Royal Melbourne Hospital)

*ANTHONY TERENCE BATISTICH, MB ChB Otago MRACR `HERBERT WALLIS HARDY, MB BS MRACR •WILLIAM PETER HOLLOWAY, MB ChB N.Z. MRACR ' JOSEPHINE SYBIL KAVANAGH, BMedSc MB BS MRACR tMAURICE MALCOLM McKEOWN, MB BS DDR FRACR 'ROBERT SANDAVER, MB BS l2'Id MRACR

Associate (Peter MacCallum Clinic)

tJOHN BARRY DRAKE, MB BS DDR MRACR

Associate (Royal Children's Hospital)

tBERESFORD WALLACE HOUGHTON-ALLEN, MB ChB Otago MRACR

Surgery: Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital


KENNETH JOHN HARDY, MB BS FRACS FALS

Austin Hospital

First Assistants

MALCOLM CHARLES DOUGLAS, MB BS FRACS ANDREW ROBERT McLEISH, MB BS FRACS

First Assistant In Orthopaedic Surgery

'JOHN EDWARD CRITCHLEY, MB BS FRCS FRACS FALS

Senior Lecturer

ANDREW KINGSLEY RORERTS, FRCS FRACS

Senior Associates

JOHN SADLER BARNETT, MB BS Syd. FRACS tNEIL ARTHUR BROMBERGER, MB BS FRACS JOHN ALLAN BUNTINE, MB BS FRACS

27

Faculty of Medicine

ROBERT JOHN BARTLETT, MB BS FRAOS NEIL ARTHUR BROMBERGER, MB BS FRAOS DAVID COLLIS BURKE. MB BS DPRM BRIAN FOWELL BUXTON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS JAMES MURRAY CALVERT, MB BS FRCS FRAOS BARRY DESMOND COOTS, MB BS Syd. DO Lind. FRCS Edin.

FRCS FRAOS NEIL GRAEME CULLEN, MB BS FRAOS JAMES RUSSELL FERGUSON DOWNIE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS GEORGE LIONEL GRAY, MB BS (rid DLO FRCS FRAOS JOHN MACKINNON GRANT, MB BS FRAOS PETER FRANCIS HART, MB BS FRCS FRAOS RONALD ATKINSON HURLEY, BCE MB BS MRACP MORA FFR NEIL JOHNSON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS PETER SUTHERLAND LAWSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JOHN FALVEY O'BRIEN, MB BS FRAOS JOHN PATRICK RICHARDSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FACS JOHN PETERSON ROYLE, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRAOS

FALS MICHAEL JAMES SHANNON, MB BS FRAOS WILFRED LAURENCE SIMPSON, MB BS FCCP FRAOS ROBIN WILLIAM SMALLW00D, MB BS FFARACS HAROLD FREDERIC ROWE STORY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS LEONARD THOMAS SТ REТТ oN, MB BS FRAOS RODNEY ROBIN ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS t2'id DMRD Lind. FFR

Lind. FRACR JOHN MICHAEL WOODWARD, MB BS FRCS

Repatriation General Hospital

Professor

GABRIEL ANDREW KUNE, MB BS FRACS FRCS FALS

First Assistant

AVNI SALI, MB BS PhD Monash FRACS

Senior Lecturer

TREVOR JONES, MB BS FRAOS

Senior Associates

t Т HOMAS IAN EVANS, MB BS FFARACS tIAN CONRAD HEINZ, MB MS FRAOS FRCPA FACS tROBERT LEONARD HODGE, MB MS FRAOS tBRUCE MacCALLUM JONES, MB BS FRAOS tKENNETH JOHN MILLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB MS FRCS FRAOS tJAMES SURROCK PETERS, MB MS Adel. FRCS FRAOS tMICHAEL JAMES SHANNON, MB BS FRAOS

Surgery: Department of James Stewart Professor, The Royal Melbourne Hospital

Chairman of Department and James Stewart Professor

MAURICE ROSSIE EWING, MB ChB Edin. HonMD Monash MSc FRCS FRCS Edin. FRACS HonFACS

(Until 31/12/77)

28

Teaching Staff

First Assistant and Deputy Chairman

VACANT

First Assistant

HARRY ROSS, MB BS FRACS

Senior Lecturers

•BRIAN FOWELL BUXTON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS DAVID PILKINGTON CRANKSHAW, MB BS PhD FFARACS ANTHONY ROBERT MOORE, MB MS BA Cantab. FRAOS ROBERT JOHN SNEODEN THOMAS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS JOHN FREDERICK FORRES, BMedSc MB BS FRAOS FRCS

Lecturer

•JOHN FAXTON COLLINS, MB BS FRACS

Lecturers in Surgery to Dental Students •IAN SHEARER RUSSELL, MB MS FRCS FRAOS FALS 'NOEL DESMOND SHERSON, MB BS FRAOS FRCS 'PAUL REX BALFOUR KITCHEN, MB BS FRAOS

Lecturer in Anaesthetics

'NOEL MORRIS CASs, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS

Honorary Research Fellows

DAVID CROSBY COWLING, MD BS FRACP FCPath MCPA RICHARD EMBERLEY COST, BVSc WARREN FREDERICK JOHNSON, MB BS FRACS BRIAN DUNCAN TAIT, MSc PhD

Surgery: Department of Hugh Devine Professor, St. Vincent's Hospital

Professor RICHARD CLAYTON BENNETT, MB MS Adel. FRCS FRACS

First Assistant

DIMITRI TAKI CARIDIS, MD Instanbul MS PhD Aberd. FRCS Edin. FRACS

Senior Lecturers

'ROY LAURENCE WILLIS FINK, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JOHN THOMAS GOODCHILD RENNEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS BRUCE NATHANIEL GRAY, MB MS Tufts FRAOS

Lecturers

•THELMA JEAN BAXTER, MSc PhD •JOHN FRANCIS GURRY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Professorial Associates

tJOHN KEVIN CLAREBROUGH, OBE MB BS FRCS FRACS tHENRY VERNON CROCK, MD BS FRCS FRACS

29

Faculty of Medicine

Senior Associates

tJDHN DOUGLAS ABERDEEN, MB BS FRAOS tYHDNAs EMMANUEL ANTONIE, MB BS FRCS FRACS t HENRY MICHAEL BRAY, MB BS FFARACS ?KENNETH STEWART BREARLEY, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS

FRAOS tGERALD BROSNAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tRALPH REGINALD CLARK, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS tBRIAN THOMAS COLLOPY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN LEONARD CONNELL, MB MS FRCS FRAOS tBRENDAN JOHN DOOLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS ?JOHN COUNDLEY DOYLE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN BERNARD FETHERS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN KEITH HENDERSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tDESMOND GARVAN HURLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN TIMOTHY KENNEDY, MB BS FRAOS DABO ?KEVIN FRANCIS KING, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tDANIEL LENAGHAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS t JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB MS FRCS FRAOS tPETER JAMES MORTENSEN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tRICHARD KERNAN NEWING, VRI MD BS FRCS FRAOS tHENRY PETER PENN, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS JONATHAN RUSH, MB BS FRAOS tPETER JOHN RYAN, Me MS FRCS FRAOS ?JAMES MICHAEL SHAW, MB BS FRCS FRAOS 1VIltM STANISICH, MB BS DA Lind. FFARCS FFARACS tPAUL KEITH STEEDMAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tGORDON WALGRAVE TRINCA, MB BS FRAOS tIVO DOMINIC VELLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tARTHUR FREDERICK WOODS, MB BS Adel. FFARACS

Associates

?THOMAS GEORGE WILLIAM BAKER, MB BS FFARACS ?BRIAN PERCY DAVIE, MB BS FRAOS tROTHWELL ALLAN HILL, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJONATHAN CHARLES HOOFER, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS

FRAOS tFRANCESCO INCANI, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tAUBREY WILLIAM JANSZ, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOSEPH GERARD JOYCE, MB BS FRAOS tEUSTACE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tKEVIN FRANCIS KING, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tGERALD JAMES LITTLE, BCE LS MB BS DLO Lind. FRCS

Edin. tVICTOR SELYOUNG MAR, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRAOS tRONALD JOHN MERCER, Me BS Syd. FRCS Edin. FRAOS tPETER JULIAN METZNER, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRAOS tDARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRAOS tMICHAEL JOHN PAROULAKIS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS ?JONATHAN RUSH, MB BS FRAOS t STANLEY FREDERICK SCHOFIELD, MB BS FRCS FRAOS tJOHN WILLIAM McKENZIE UPJOHN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

30

STAFF FROM ASSOCIATED INSTITUTIONS

Recognized General and Special Hospitals

Clinical Instructors of the Austin Hospital and Repatriation Hospital Clinical Schools

Associate Dean (Clinical) of the Clinical School

BERNARD SWEET, MB BS FRACP MRCP

AUSTIN HOSPITAL

DEPARTMENT OF MEDICINE

Hospital staff:

Senior Physicians

ROBERT NEIL HOPE, MB BS FRALP ANDREW COLGATE NEWELL, MD BS FRALP BERNARD SWEET, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Physicians

DAVID HARDING, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP MARY ROSE STEWART, MB BS MRACP

Assistant Physicians

G. RAJAH RAM RAJENDRA, MB BS Singapore MRACP JEFFREY MAX SLONIM, MB BS MRACP ANTHONY PETER REX LUDBROOK, MB ChB Otago FRALP

Medical Director of Renal Unit

JOHN KINGSLEY DAWBORN, PhD cond. MB BS FRALP

Physician to Renal Unit

WALTER REALE, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Physician to Renal Unit

DIANE MARIE WILSON, MB BS FRALP

Director of Gastroenterology

RICHARD ALAN SMALLWOOD, MD BS FRALP Director of Cardiac Services

ALAN JAMES GOBLE, MD BS MRCP MRACP

Cardiologists

MAURICE ROSENBAUM, MB BS FRALP BERNARD TREISTER, MB ChB MRCPE

Senior Dermatologist

BRIAN ROGER ENTWHISTLE, MB BS DOM Syd. FALD

Dermatologist PETER ANTHONY SINCLAIR, MB BS FALD

Senior Rheumatologist ELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS Melb. DCH Lind.

MRCP

31

Faculty of Medicine

Rheumatologist KEVEN JAMES FRASER, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Senior Thoracic Physicians

PETER RAEY BULL, MD BS FRALP FCCP FACMA JONATHAN ARTHUR STREETON, MB BS FRALP

Senior Psychiatrists NORMAN GOLD, MB BS DPM MANZCP MRCPsych JOHN MATHEW FIELDING, MD BS DPM FANZCP MRCPsych

Senior Adolescent Psychiatrist

MICHAEL JONAS, MB BS MANZCP DPM McGill

Director of Child Psychiatry GEORGE LUCIEN LIPTON, MB BS FRALP FANZCP MRCPsych

Oncologist WALTER JOSEPH MOON, MB BS MRACP

Clinical Pharmacologist FRANK JOHN VAJDA, MD BS MRCP FRALP

Allergist RICHARD ASKIN CHENOWETH, MB BS FRALP

Senior Neurologist

PETER FRANCIS BLADIN, BSc MD BS FRALP

Neurologist

JOHN VERNEA, MD Bucharest

Director of Haematology

PETER ANTHONY CASTALDI, MD BS Syd. FRALP

Senior Paediatrician

GEOFFREY GILLAM, MB BS FRALP

Paediatrician

DAVID HILL, MB BS FRACP

Senior Endocrinologist

GEORGE JERUMS, MD BS FRALP

Endocrinologist

ROBIN MACKINTOSH LETHROP MURRAY, MB BS Clinical Superintendent

DAVID LEGGE, MD BS MRACP

Fellows in Medicine

RICHARD ARNOTT, MB BS EGO SEEMAN, MB BS RICHARD BLAMIRE SEWELL, MB BS NICHOLAS CHRISTOPHlDIS, MB BS ALEXANDER WILLIAM MARSHALL, MB BS

32

Staff from Associated Institutions

DEPARTMENT OF OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

Hospital staff:

Gynaecologists

CHRISTOPHER STEPHEN TARGETT, MB 6S FRCS Edin. MRCOG FAGG

Assistant Gynaecologist

• PETER WINTON ASHTON, MB BS MRCOG FAGO

DEPARTMENT OF PATHOLOGY

Hospital staff:


PETER ANTHONY CASTALDI, MD Syd. FRALP FRCPA

Director of Anatomical Pathology

JOSEPH MICHAEL XIPELL, MB BS FRCPA

Assistant Pathologist

HENRY JOHN COOK IRETON, MD Tor. FRCPA Director of Biochemistry

VACANT Director of Microbiology

FREDERICK ANGELO ToSOLINI, MB BS Adel. PhD A.N.U. FRCPA

Research Associate tJOHN CONNELLAN. BSc old PhD A.N.U.

DEPARTMENT OF PSYCHIATRY

Hospital staff:

Senior Psychiatrists

J. FIELDING, MD FANZCP, MRCPsych •NORMAN GOLD, MB BS DPM MANZCP MRCPsych GEORGE LIPTON, MB BS FRACP FANZCP MRCPsych

Staff Psychiatrists

MIKE JONAS, MB BS MANZCP DPM •А IУ A WILSON, MB BS MANZCP

Assistant Psychiatrists

•JOHN EDWARD SHEEDY, MB BS MRACGP •KEITH ADEN', MB BS DPM

Clinical Psychologists

•TANIA ROGERS, BA MA MAPsS •GEORGE ARTHUR STORY, BA DipEd DipPsych MAPsS MACE •KEVIN WILLIAM WALSH, BA MSc MB BS

в 33

Faculty of Medicine

DEPARTMENT OF SURGERY

Hospital staff:

Senior Surgeons

• NEIL JOHNSON, MB MS FRCS FRACS •LEONARD THOMAS STREТ TON, MB BS FRACS •JAMES RUSSELL FERGUSON DOWNIE, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Surgeon

-PETER FRANCIS HART, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Orthopaedic Surgeon

•JOHN MACKINNON GRANT, MB BS FRACS

Orthopaedic Surgeons

•ROBERT JOHN BARTLETT, MB BS FRACS ▪ NEIL ARTHUR BROMBERGER, MB BS FRACS •NEIL GRAEME CULLEN, MB BS FRACS •JOHN FALVEY o'BRIEN, MB BS FRACS •MICHAEL JAMES SHANNON, MB BS FRACS

Senior Vascular Surgeon

•JOHN PETERSON ROYLE, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS FRCS

Senior Cardiothoracic Surgeon

•JOHN PATRICK RICHARDSON, MB BS FRCS FRACS FAGS

Cardiothoracic Surgeon

•WILFRED LAURENCE SIMPSON, MB BS FCCP FRACS

Cardiovascular Surgeon

• BRIAN FOWELL BUXTON, MB MS FRCS FRACS FAGS

Senior Neurosurgeon

•JAMES MURRAY CALVERT, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Neurosurgeons

•STEFAN JACEK SOKOLOWSKI, MUDr Vienna MD Gdansk •JOHN MICHAEL WOODWARD, MB BS FRCS

Senior Ophthalmologist

•BARRY DESMOND COOTS, MB BS DO Lind. FRCS Edin. & Eng. FRACS

Ophthalmologist

• KEITH MARKWICK, MB BS Lind. FRCS FRAOS DO Lind. DA Lend.

Senior Plastic Surgeon

•JOHN SADLER BARNETT, MB BS FRACS

Plastic Surgeons

•JOHN ALLAN BUNTINE, MB BS FRACS •GEOFFREY IAN BIRD, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS

34


Assistant Plastic Surgeon

'WILLIAM GREGORY GILBERT, MB BS FRACS

Senior Otolaryngologist ' GEORGE LIONEL GRAY, MB BS Q'Id DLO FRCS FRACS

Otolaryngologists

' DAVID ALEXANDER LYNCH, MB BS Q'!d FRCS Edin. FRACS 'ALFRED ARTHUR ANDERSON, MB BS Ceylon DLO RCS

Assistant Otolaryngologist

BOMAN NOSHERWAN IRANI, MB BS Bom. FRCSCan FRACS

Senior Urologist

' HAROLD FREDERIC ROWE STORY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Urologists

•RODNEY ROBIN ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRAOS PETER SUTHERLAND LAWSON, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Senior Paediatric Surgeon •ALEXANDER WILLIAM AULDIST, MB BS FRACS

Paediatric Surgeon

•EUsTAcE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Oral Surgeons

•JOHN BURNETT RICHARDSON, MB BS MDSe LDS •JOHN PRITCHARD STEWART CAMPBELL, Inc MDSc LDS

FIAOS FRACDS

Director of Diagnostic Radiology

DAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS Q'id DMRD Lind. FRCR FRACR

Director of Anaesthesia

ROBIN WILLIAM SMALLWOOD, MB BS FFARACS

Assistant Director of Anaesthesia

GEOFFREY ALAN GUTTERIDGE, MB BS FFARACS

Anaesthetists

•VICTOR BRAND, MB BS DA FFARACS •MALCOLM JOHN BROWN, MB BS FFARACS •ROBERT WILLIAM COWIE, MB BS FFARACS MALCOLM EVANS, MB BS FFARACS •NANCY LILIAN FERGUSON, MB BS DA MFARACS Lord. BERNARD CHARLES FIRTH, MB BS DA FFARCS ' BRUCE SPALFORD OWEN FOX, MB BS FRACGP FFARACS •EDGAR ROBERT NISBITT GILLIES, MB BS FFARACS •JAMES ARTHUR LOWSON, MB BS FFARACS •ROBERT WILLIAM EDWARD MANSER, MB BS DA •COLIN MacDONALD MELVILLE, MB BS FFARCSI • IAN RONALD PHILPOT, MB BS FFARACS •SILVIA PLESMANN, MB BS FFARACS •PHILLIP RUBINSTEIN, MB BS FFARACS

35

Faculty of Medicine

•MICHAEL JOHN SEYFORT, MB BS FFARACS •COLDMBA STEEDMAN, LRCP and Si LM Rotunda DA Lind.

MARK JOHN SULLIVAN, MB BS DA Lond. FFARACS • FRANK McKENZIE WHAN, BSc MB BS FFARACS

Medical Director Spinal Injuries Unit

DAVID COLLIS BURKE, MB BS DPRM

Deputy Medical Director Spinal Injuries Unit

GERALD UNGAR, MB ChB Liv. DipPhysMed

Radiotherapist

RONALD ATKINSON HURLEY. BCE MB BS FRALP FRCRA FFR

Resuscitation Officer

VACANT

REPATRIATION HOSPITAL

DEPARTMENT OF MEDICINE

Hospital staff:

Senior Physician

FRANCIS CATARINICH, MB BS FRALP

Physicians (General)

ROY HERBERT DONALD BEAN, MB BS MRACP NEWMAN BENJAMIN PINKUS, MB BS FRALP •DOUGLAS ROBERT GAULD, MB BS FRALP •DONALD GRANT DUFFY, MD BS FRALP 'JOHN LEWTAS FREW, MD MB BS FRALP FRCP 'BERNARD SWEET, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Senior Thoracic Physician

ALISTAIR RERIDT CAMPBELL, BS MD FRALP

Thoracic Physicians

LEWIS WILLIAM FAULKS, MB BS MRACP COLIN EDWIN BARTER, MB BS MRACP IAN JONES, MB BS FRACP

Renal Physician WILLIAM ROBERT ADAM, MD BS PhD FRALP

Gastroenterologists

• PETER JAMES PARSONS, BSc MD MB BS FRCP FRALP 'HENRY SAMUEL HILLMAN, MB BS FRALP

Cardiologists

• KENNETH JAMES GRICE, MD MB BS FRCP FRALP 'HENRY BUCKHURST KAY, MD MB BS FRALP FRCP

Dermatologist

• DENTS MORLEM CLARKE, MB BS DDM MACD

36


Neurologists

•ARTHUR GULTON SCHWEIGER, MD MB BS MRCP FRALP 'ROBERT JOHN HJORTH, MD MRACP

Endocrinologist

GEORGE JERUMS, MD MB BS FRALP

Rheumatologist

•MURRAY LANE INGPEN, MB BS MRCP DPhysMed

Radiotherapist

DAVID ROSS WIGG, MB BS RDA DORA DTR

Specialist in Rehabilitation

ROBERT GORDON NEWNHAM, MB BS MRACP

Specialist-iп -Charge Nuclear Medicine Dept.

LIONEL BARRY ARKLES, MRCS LRCP MRACP

Senior Psychiatrist

PHILIP SYDNEY EYLES, BA MB BS DPM RCS&P MANZCP

Psychiatrists

BARBARA JEAN TAYLOR, MB BS DPM •RUSSELL AINSLIE MEARES, MD MB BS DPM •GEOFFREY CONRON, MB BS MRACP MANZCP DPM KEVIN MEAGHER MB BS DPM MANZCP

DEPARTMENT OF PATHOLOGY

Hospital staff:

Senior Specialist-in-Charge

BEN MACMAHON WADHAM, MB BS DCP Lind. FRCPA FRCPath

Specialist—Biochemistry

JOHN GREEN, BSc MB ChB MRCPE FRCPath

Specialist Haematology

JOHN DESMOND PARKIN, MD BS FRALP FRCPA

Specialist—Hlstopathology

ARTHUR RAYMOND PARKIN, MB BS FRCPA

Specialists—Pathology

•Professor HAROLD DALLAS ATTWOOD, MD ChB St.And. MD FRACP FRCPA FRCPath

•REGINALD MOTTERAI. BSc MB BS Adel. FRALP FRCPA •GEORGE MIDDLETON, MB BS Old FRCPA

DEPARTMENT OF SURGERY

Hospital staff:

Senior Specialist

IAN CONRAD HEINZ, MB BS MS FRAOS FRCPA FAGS

37

Faculty of Medicine

Specialists—General Surgery

KENNETH JOHN MILLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS -JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB BS MS FRAOS FRCS

Specialists—Orthopaedic Surgery

ROBERT LEONARD HODGE, MB MS FRAOS MICHAEL JAMES SHANNON, MB BS FRAOS

Neurosurgeon DARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRCS

Vascular Surgeons 'DONALD GORDON MACLEISH, MB BS MS FRCS FRACS •BRIAN FOWELL BUXTON, MB MS FRAOS FALS 'PETER LLEWELYN FIELD, MB BS FRAOS

Plastic Surgeons -ALLAN MALCOLM MACLEOD, MB BS FRAOS •WAYNE ALLAN MORRISON, MB BS FRAOS

Specialist Head and Neck Surgery SUSAN NEIL, MB BS FRACS

Thoracic Surgeons • IAN HAIG McCONCHIE, MB BS MS FRAOS •GEORGE WILLIAM WESTLAKE, MB BS FRCACS

Urological Surgeons 'JAMES STURROCH PETERS, MS MB BS FRAOS •RODNEY ROBIN ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRAOS •WARREN FREDERICK JOHNSON, MB BS FRAOS

Surgeons—ENT •LAWRENCE MICHAEL RYAN, MB BS FRACS 'KEVIN KANE, MB BS FRAOS 'ALLAN JAMES BASHAM, MB BS FRAOS

Ophthalmological Surgeons 'PROFESSOR GERARD WILLIAM CROCK, MB BS FRCS

FRACS FRACP -PETER NEIL HENDERSON, MB BS DO FRACS MACO -JAMES HERBERT STEPHENS MARTIN, MB BS DO FRCS

FRACS •PETER HARDY-SMITH, MB BS DO FRCS FRAOS

Ophthalmologist •ORMOND WILLIAM SALKELD, MB BS DOMS RCP&S

Specialist—Resuscitation BRUCE MacCULLUM JONES, MB BS FRAOS

Gynaecologist PROFESSOR NORMAN ALBERT BEISCHER, MD BS MGO

FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG FAGG

DEPARTMENT OF RADIOLOGY

Hospital Staff: Senior Specialist-in-Charge

BRYAN HARTLEV, MB BS MRACR FRAOS FFR Radiologists

DONALD McKENZIE McNAB, MB BS MRACR •EDWIN KEITH MUNTZ, MB BS MRACR • РАМЕ LA NONETTE HARRIS-WRIGHT, MB BS MRCS LRCP •KARL NEILSON UHD, MD BS MRACR 'PATRICK GYLLN O'COLLINS, MB BS MRACR

38


'DARRYL MITCHELL PHIDDIAN, MB BS MRACR 'DAVID POWELL THOMAS, MB BS MRACR FFR •ERIC JOHN GILFORD, MB BS FRACR FFR Lind. 'JOSEPH KREMER, MB BS MRACR Lind. DMRD MRACR

DEPARTMENT OF ANAESTHETICS Hospital Staff: Senior Specialist

THOMAS IAN EVANS, MB BS FFARACS

Anaesthetists

'DAWN GILTINAN, MB BS FFARACS 'HENRI RENE PAUL COUTANCEAU, MB BS FFARACS 'LEILA HARRIS, MB BS DA Lind. 'HEATHER PROBERT, MB BS DA Lind. 'PHILLIP RUBINSTEIN, MB BS FFARACS 'GORDON VICTOR STANTON, MB BS FFARACS •ISABEL ELIZA SUTTON, MB BS DA Lind. 'RICHARD LAKE CLAYDEN SUTCLIFFE, MB BS FFARACS

Clinical Instructors of the Fairfield Hospital Clinical School

Chairman of the Clinical School and Medical Superintendent of Hospltal

JOHN ALLAN FORBES, AM MB BS FRALP FACIA

Deputy Medical Superintendent of Hospital

NOEL McKENZIE BENNETT, MB BS MRCP Elin. FRALP FACMA

Clinical Instructors in Communicable Diseases (Specialist Physicians)

NOEL McKENZIE BENNETT, MB BS MRCP Edin. FRALP FACMA

JOHN ALLAN FORGES, AM MB BS FRALP FACIA ALVIS KULERS, MB BS FRALP CHARLES RONALD LUCAS, MB BS FRALP HUGH FRANCIS NEWTON-JOHN, MB BS MRCP FRALP ALISTAIR MURRAY SANDLAND, MB BS DTM & H Syd. PETER ANTHONY STANLEY, MB BS FRALP ALLEN PENG PUNG, MB BS FRALP

Pathologist and Bacteriologist

PETER CAVANAGH, MA MD FInstBiol DIPBact

Medical Virologist

IAN DAVID GUST, MD BS BSc(M е d) DipBact Lind. FRCPA

Clinical Instructors of the Mercy Maternity and Austin Hospitals Clinical School

Hospital staff:

Senior Obstetrician/GynaecoIogists

CHARLES ANTONIO BARBARO, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG

KEVIN ALBERT BARHAM, MB BS FRCOG FRCS FRACS FAGG

39

Faculty of Medicine

GERALD ARTHUR MANLY. MB BS FRCS FRACS FRGOG FAGO

Obstetrician/Gynaecologists

DONALD PUI-GHEE CHAN, MB BS FRCS Edin.&Glas. FRCÖG MMSA

IAN ALEXANDER MacISAAC, MB BS FRCS FRAOS MRCOG FAG

MICHAEL WILLIAM SOMERVILLE, MB BS FRCS FRCS Edin. MRCOG FAGG

Associate Obstetrician/Gynaecologists

PETER WINTER ASHTON, MB BS MRCOG FAGG ROBERT JOHN HORSFALL, MB BS MRCOG FRAOS FAGG PETER ANTHONY LONG, MB BS MRCOG FAGG CHRISTOPHER STEPHEN TARGETT, MB BS FRCS Edin.

MRCOG FAGG HOWARD MACDONALD WALKER, MB BS MRCOG FAGG

Paediatric Physician HOWARD JAMES GOLDBERG, MB BS MRCP FRALP

Medical Director

JAMES ERNEST BREHENY, MB BS FRALP


•PATRICK ALAN MAPLESTONE, MB BS FFARACS DA

Director of Community Medicine

LAWRENCE IVAN HATHERLEY, LRCP MRCS Lind. FRACGP

Obstetrician/Gynaecologist to Endocrinology Clinic

MICHAEL SHINE FORREST, MB BS FRCÖG FAGG

Director of Pathology

LEON ISRAEL TAFT, MB BS BSc FRCPA MRCPath

Deputy Director of Pathology

ALAN STEWART BODEY, BSc MB BS FRCPA MRCPath

Director of Radiology

•CHRISTINE MARY ACTON, MB BS MRCRA

Resuscitation and Renal Physician

EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB BS FRALP

Clinical Instructors of the Peter MacCallum Clinic

Hospital staff:

Chairman of Clinical School JAMES PATRICK MADIGAN, MD BS DTR FRALP FRCRA

Medical Director

PETER LESLIE THOMAS ILBERY, MB BS MD DMRT R.C.P. & Ѕ . FRCRA FRACP

40


Breast Unit

DANIEL PUI SEK CHAN, MB BS H.K. DIRT Lind. FFR—Head of Unit

tJAMES MATAR, MB В S MRACR FRCP Can.—Radiotherapist 'RICHARD CLAYTON BENNETT, MB BS FRACS FRCS Eng.—

Consultant Surgeon •IAN SHEARER RUSSELL, MB MS FRACS FRCS Eng.—Con-

sultant Surgeon

Gastro-Intestinal Unit

RONALD ATKINSON HURLEY, BCE, MB BS FRCA MRACP FFR—Head of Unit

tJAMES MATAR, MB BS MRACR FRCP Can.—Radiotherapist

Germinal Tumours Unit

JAMES JOSEPH CAMPBELL, MB Bch BAO MRACR FRCR

Gynaecological Unit

GEOFFREY ROSEVEAR KURRLE, BS MD DTR FRALP FRCRA —Head of Unit

JAMES JOSEPH CAMPBELL, MB BCh BAO MRACR FRCR-Radiotherapist

•Professor Sir LANCE TOWNSEND, Kt VRD MD В S FRCS

Edin. FRAOS FRCOG DTM&H Lind. FRCS C. Hon.FCOG

S.A. Hon.FACOG—Consultant Gynaecologist

Haematology Unit

IAN ALLAN COOPER, MB BS Syd. FRACP—Head of Unit JUE CHONG DING, MB BS MRACP

Head and Neck Unit

JAMES PATRICK MADIGAN, BS MD FRALP FRCRA—Head

of Unit ROBIN KERR, MB В S FFR FRACR—Radiotherapist in Charge

•WILLIAM BRIAN FLEMING, MB MS FRAOS FRCS FACS-Consulting Surgeon

tTHOMAS MICHAEL MACKENZIE LONG, MB BS FALS FRAOS —Consulting Surgeon

• HUGH SIMPSON MILLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DLO Lond.-Otorhinolaryngologist

tPETER ADRIAN GREY, MB BS FRAOS FRCS DLO—Chemo-therapist

Lung Unit

KUNDAN LAL, MB BS DIRT FARS sing. ANTHONY CHARLES WILSON, MB В S FRACS—Consulting

Thoracic Surgeon •DENIS GRAEME ROBERTSON, MB BS FRACP—Consulting

Thoracic Physician

Lymphoma Unit

JAMES PATRICK MADIGAN, BS MD DTR FRALP FRCRA-Head of Unit

THOMAS FRASER SANDEMAN, MD ChB DIRT FRCR FRACR —Consultant Radiotherapist

41

Faculty of Medicine

tFRANCIS GIBSON PARKIN, MB BS DTR—Senior Radio-therapist

IAN ALLAN COOPER, MB BS Syd. FRACP—Consultant Haematologist

JUE CHONG DING, MB BS MRACP—Assistant Haematologist

Neurosurgical Unit

DAVID WIGG, MB BS RDA DTR MRACR FFR—Head of Unit •JAMES MURRAY CALVERT, MB BS FRCS FRACS—Coп -

sultant Neurosurgeon

Paediatric Unit

CYRIL CHARLES JULIUS MINTY, MB BS DTR FFR FRACR-Head of Unit

'HENRY EKERT, MB BS FRACP—Visiting Paediatrician

Sarcoma Unit

ROBIN KERR, MB BS FFR FRACR—Head of Unit

Skin Unit

CYRIL CHARLES JULIUS MINTY, MB BS DTR FFR FRACR-Head of Unit

Sir BENJAMIN KEITH RANK, Kt CMG Hon.DSc Punjabi MB MS LRCP FRCS FRACS FRCS Hon.FRCS Can. Н on.FASCT Hon.FRCSE

Urology Unit

THOMAS FRASER SANDEMAN, MD ChB DMRT FRCR FRACR Consultant Radiotherapist

•HAROLD FREDERIC ROWE STORY, MB BS FRCS Eng. FRACS—Consultant Urologist

Pathology Department

REGINALD MOTTERAM, BSc MB BS Adel. FRALP FRCPA-Head of Unit

PHILIP NORMAN JENNINGS TRONSIDE, DPath Eng. MB BS FRCPA—Senior Pathologist

Diagnostic Radiation Department and Department of Nuclear Medicine

JOHN JOSEPH MARTIN, MB BS FRACR FFR—Head Diag-nostic Radiologist

JOHN BARRY DRAKE, MB BS MRACR—Senior Radiologist

Dental Unit

WILLIAM DWYER, MDSc LDS FRAC DS

Research Units:

Biological Research

GEORGE STEWART HODGSON, MD Chile tRAY BRADLEY, PhD tJOHN RADLEY, PhD

Haematology Research

IAN ALLAN COOPER, MB BS Syd. FRALP JUE CHONG DING, MB BS MRACP

42


Endocrine Research

tROBIN MACKINTOSH LATHROP MURRAY, MB BS

Medical Physics

tKENNETH CLARKE, MSc ARCS FlnstP FAIP tRAYMOND DE GROOT, BSc МА I Р

Clinical Instructora of the Royal Children's Hospital Clinical School

Hospital staff:

Physician—head of unit

ELIZABETH KATHLEEN TURNER, MD BS BERNARD WILLIAM NEAL, MD BS FRACP THOMAS GLOVER MADDISON, MB BS Adel. MD FRACP JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRACP LIONEL ERIC GEORGE SLOAN, MB BS FRALP FACIA

Physicians

DAVID ALEXANDER McCREDIE, BSc MD BS FRALP MARGERY CLARE McKINNON, MB BS FRALP DCH JAMES ASHTON KEIPERT, MB BS MRCP Edin. DCH SAMUEL MENAHEM, MD BS FRALP JOHN MARTIN McNAMARA, MB BS FRALP ARNOLD LAWRENCE SMITH, MB BS FRACP

Associate Physicians

NAN JOHNS, MB ChB Edin. DCH Glas. BA MD IAN PETER McINTYRE, MB BS MRCP Edin.

Chairman of Department of Surgery

NATHANIEL ALBERT ALFRED MYERS, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Surgeons—Head of Unit PETER GRIFFITH JONES, MB MS FRCS FRACS FRCS ROBERT FOWLER, MD BS FRAOS

Surgeons

EDWARD DURHAM SMITH, MD BS FRAOS FALS MAXWELL KENT, MB BS FRACS JOHN RIDLEY SOLOMON, MB BS FRCS FRACS JUSTIN HENRY KELLY, MB BS FRAOS ALEX AULDIST, MB BS FRAOS


THOMAS CHRISTOPHER KENNETH BROWN, MB ChB LICE FFARACS

Director of Intensive Care Unit

G. C. MULLINS, MB BS FFARACS

Director of Cardiology

ALEXANDER WYNNE VENABLES, MD BS FRALP

Assistant Cardiologist

BRIAN DAVID EDIS, MB BS FRALP

43

Faculty of Medicine

Director of Casualty Services

JOHN HURST, MB BS MRACGP

Director of Neonatal Unit

GEOFFREY LEON GILLAM, MB BS MRACP

Deputy Director of Neonatal Unit

ROBERT NEIL DAVIE ROY, MB BS MRACP

Physician to Cerebral Palsy Clinic

JOHN MACLEOD GOOCH, MB BS DCH R.C.P. & Ѕ . MRCP

Dermatologist

JOHN ROBERT KELLY, MD BS FRCP FRACP

Endocrinologist

HENRY NORMAN BURGESS WETTENHALL, MD BS FRCP FRACP

Physician to Diabetic Clinic

JOHN MAURICE COURT, MB BS FRACP

E.N.T. Surgeon

CLIVE FRANCIS HENRY PYMAN, MB BS DLO FRACS

Director of Haematology Clinic

HENRY EKERT, MB BS FRACP

Assistant Haematologist

KEITH WATERS, MB BS FRACP

Director of Haematology Laboratory GEOFFREY PHILIP TAURO, MB BS FRCPA

Director of Department of Gastroenterology

GRAEME LAWRENCE BARNES, MD ChB FRACP

Medical Geneticists

DAVID MILES DANKS, MD BS FRACP JOHN GRAHAM ROGERS, MB BS DCH FRACP

Director of Department of Thoracic Medicine

PETER DUHIG PHELAN, BSc MD BS FRACP

Deputy Director of Department of Thoracic Medicine

LOUIS LANDAU, MD FRACP

Neurologist

IAN JAMES HOPKINS, MD BS FRACP

Assistant Neurolologists

LLOYD KEITH SHIELDS, BSc( М ed.) MB BS MRACP KEVIN JOHN COLLINS, MB BS FRACP

Neuro-Surgeon

GEOFFREY LEWIS KLUG, MB BS FRACS

44


Nephrologist

DAVID ALEXANDER McCREDIE, BSc MD BS FRALP

Assistant Nephrologist

HARLEV POWELL, MB BS MRACP

Physician-in-Charge of Phenylketonuria Clinic

THOMAS GLOVER MADDISON, MB BS Adel. MD FRALP

Ophthalmologist

CYRIL GREGORY KEITH MB BS FRCS FRAOS MACI

Chief Orthopaedic Surgeon

PETER FREDERICK WILLIAMS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Deputy Chief Orthopaedic Surgeon

MALCOLM BENBOW MENELAUS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Senior Assistant Orthopaedic Surgeons

JOHN STANLEY JAMES MORLEY, MRCS LRCP FRCS FRAOS WILLIAM GRANT D01G, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Director of Handicapped Children's Centre

GORDON KEYS SMITH, MB BS FRAOS

Director of Pathology

ALAN LLEWELYN WILLIAMS, MD BS FRCPA

Plastic Surgeon

GEORGE STRETTON GUNTER, MB MS FRCS FRACS

Deputy Plastic Surgeon

JOHN SADLER BARNETT, MB BS FRAOS

Director of Psychiatry

WINSTON SELBY RICKARDS, MD BSc FRALP FANZCP FRC Psych ABPsS MAPsS DPM

Deputy Director of Psychiatry

ELISABETH MAUD WANN, MB ChB Dub. MANZCP

Psychiatrists

FRANK TVIR BISHOP, MB BS FRCS JUDITH LINNANE, MB BS MANZCP DPM OWEN HUGH DUNNON BLOMFIELD, MB BS BSc DPM

FANZCP MRCPsych М APsS hEE CEng HUGH GARNER, MB BS MANZCP


VALERIE MAYNE, MB BS MRACR

Radiologists

BERESFORD WALLACE HOUGHTON ALLEN, MC ChB MRACR FREDERICK OWEN JENSEN, MB ChB DDR MRACR FFR

45

Faculty of Medicine

Director of Department of Anatomical Pathology

PETER ELLIS CAMPBELL, MB BS MCPA

Director of Department of Clinical Biochemistry

JOHN FRANCIS CONNELLY, MD BS

Audiologists EDMOND HENRY KEIR, TTCTD

PETER DAVIDSON, BA VTTD TPTC JUDITH ANNE HENDRICKS, BA DipAud

Senior Speech Therapist

CYNTHIA ELIZABETH EDGELL, MACST

Psychologist

PATRICIA MARY LEAPER, BA PhD

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Melbourne Hospital Clinical School

Hospital staff:

Associate Dean (Clinical)

KENNETH JAMES GRICE, MD BS FRCP FRACP

Clinical Supervisor

JEANNINE WHITECROSS MILLS, BSc MB BS

Physicians

WILLIAM McINTOSH ROSE, MD BS MRCP FRALP THOMAS HENRY HURLEY, MD BS FRALP KENNETH FAIRBURN FAIRLEY, MD BS MRCP FRALP JOHN STEWART PENINGTON, MD BS MRCP FRALP PETER WILLIAM SUTHERLAND, MD BS FRALP HAROLD STANLEY SYMONS, MB BS FRALP MRCP PETER ALEXANDER VALENTINE, MB BS FRALP MRCP ALFRED JOHN WALL, MD BS MRACP RICHARD GRAHAME LARKINS, BS MD MRACP PETER BERT GREENBERG, BS MD PhD MRACP JOHN RICHARD SULLIVAN, MB BS MRCP U.K. JOHN OWEN KING, MD BS FRALP

Head of Clinical Research Unit

IAN REAP MACKAY, MD BS FRCP FRALP

Consulting Surgeons

THOMAS ACKLAND, MD MS FRCS FRAOS FALS DOUGLAS ROBERT LESLIE, MB MS FRCS FRAOS GORDON GRAHAM CALDER McKENZIE, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

Surgeons

ROWAN GEORGE WEBB, MB BS FRCS FRAOS WILLIAM BRIAN FLEMING, MB MS FRCS FRAOS ALAN MORTON CUTHBERTSON, MB MS FRCS FRAOS FALS IAN SHEARER RUSSELL, MB MS FRAOS FRCS GRAHAM ADLINGTON SYME, MB BS FRCS FRAOS PETER ROBERT SCOTT, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRAOS

as


THOMAS MICHAEL MACKENZIE LONG, MB BS FRACS PETER GUSTAV BRYAN NELSON, MB BS FRACS FRCS NOEL DESMOND SHERSON, MB BS FRACS FRCS

Allergist SAUL WIENER, MD BS Zúr. PhD FRACP MCPath MCPA

Anaesthetists

TREVOR TALBOT CURRIE, MB BS DA Eng. FFARCS FFARACS JAMES MATTHEW BELL, MB BS DA FFARACS HERBERT C NEWMAN, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS PATRICIA MACKAY, MB ChB N.Z. DA RACS Melb. FFARCS

FFARACS ALFRED OWIES, MB BS DA EDGAR ROBERT NISBIT GILLIES, MB BS FFARACS ARTHUR FREDERICK WOODS, MB BS FFARACS WILLIAM HENRY TAYLOR, MB BS FFARACS DAVID KOMESAROFF, MB BS DA FFARACS MAXWELL LINDSEY, LRCP MRCS MB BS Lind. DA FFARCS

FFARACS

Clinical Oncologist WALTER JOSEPH MOON, MB BS

Dermatologists IAN OLIVER STARLE, MD BS DDM Syd. MRCP FRALP DAVID SCOTT NURSE, MD FRALP MRCP Edin. MACD

Endocrinologist

FRANK IAN RUSSELL MARTIN, MD BS FRALP

Gastroenterologist DAVID JOHN FONE, MD BS FRALP

Senior Gynaecologist IAN ALEXANDER McDONALD, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRCOG

Gynaecologist

GRAEME RODERICK McLEISH MB BS FRCS MRCOG FRACS

Medical Officer for Physical Medicine

MALCOLM ELLISTON SCOTT, MB BS MRACP

Senior Neurologist

PETER EBELING, BSc MD BS MRCP FRALP

Neurologist

ROBERT JOHN HJORTH, MD MRACP

Neurosurgeon

DAVID SCOTT BARRINGTON BROWNBILL, MB BS FRCS FRACS


JAMES EWEN KIRKWOOD GALBRAITH, MB BS FRCS

Ophthalmologist

BRUCE ALEXANDER CRAWFORD, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS

47

Faculty of Medicine

Senior Orthopaedist WILLIAM ERIC SWANEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Orthopaedist KINGSLEY WALLIS MILLS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Otorhinolaryngologist HUGH SIMPSON MILLAR, MB BS DLO FRCS FRAOS

Plastic Surgeon

FRANK JAMES HAM, MB BS FRAOS FRCS

Psychiatrist JOHN CHARLES PROCTOR CONE, MD BS MANZCP

Radiologists LEON SLONIM, MB BS MRCRA FFR ALAN JOHN KERMOND, MRACR FFR

Radiotherapist JOHN MARTIN BRADLEY, MD BS DTR FRALP MRCRA

Respiratory Specialist MICHAEL COWPER FRANKLYN PAIN, MD Syd. BS MRACP

Rheumatologist KENNETH DAVID MUIRDEN, MD BS FRALP

Consultant Thoracic Surgeon IAN HAIG McCONCHIE, MB MS FRAOS

Thoracic Surgeon GEORGE WILLIAM WESTLAKE, MB BS FRAOS

Senior Urologist

DOUGLAS BURLAND DUFFY, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

Urologist IAN NORMAN NUNN, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Vascular Surgeon

DONALD GORDON MACLEISH, MB MS FRCS FRACS

Vascular Surgeon

BRIAN FOWELL BUXTON, MB BS FRAOS

Medical Administrator

JOHN SAMUEL YEATMAN, MB BS FRALP

Deputy Director of Diagnostic Radiology

JAMES ROBERT SYME, MD BS MRACP DDR FFR Lind. FORA

Director of Anaesthetics

RUSSELL GEOFFREY COLE, MB BS DA R.C.P&S. Melb. FFARCS FFARACS

Director of Anatomical Pathology

JOHN DOUGLAS HICKS, MB BS FCPath MRACP MCPA

Director of Biochemistry DAVID GORDON CAMPBELL, MB ChB FCPA FRALP

48


Director of Cardiology JOHN GRAEME SLOMAN, BSc MB BS FRALP FRCP Edin.

MRCP FACC Edin.

Assistant Director of Cardiology VERE DAVID URQUHART HUNT, MB BS FRALP

Director of Casualty Services JOHN PETER BUSH, MB BS MRCS LRCP MRACGP DObst

RCOG

Director of Department of Gastroenterology DONALD JAMES BOURNE ST. JOHN, MB BS FRALP MRCP

Director of Haematology DAVID CROSBY COWLING, MD BS FRALP FCPath

Director of Intensive Care JOHN FRANCIS CADE, MD BS MRACP PRO LRCP FRALP

Director of Medical Microbiology EUGENE ROBIN JOSEPH PAVILLARD, MB BS FRIPA

Director of Nuclear Medicine JOHN THOMAS ANDREWS, MB BS Lind. LRCP MRCS DObst

RCOG FRACP MIRA

Assistant Physicians JOHN BUCHANAN, MB 8S MRACP QUINTUS DE ZYLVA, MB BS MRACP IAN KAYS FORRES, MB BS MRACP ERIC CAMPBELL LAIRD, MB BS MRACP MICHAEL RANDELE LUXTON, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Physician to Clinical Research Unit MICHAEL JOHN SCHUMACHER, MB BS FRALP

Geriatrician STUART JOHN HUNT SHEPHERD, MB BS DipHospAdmin

LHA

Physician to Haematology Clinic JOHN RICHARD SULLIVAN, MB BS MRCP U.K.

Assistant Endocrinologists JEANNINE WHITECROSS MILLS, BSc MB 8S LESLIE JAMES NORTON, MB 8S MRACP Dip.Med.Lab.Tech.

Physician Specialist to Cardiology Department HARRY GEORGE MOND, MB BS MRACP

Assistant to Medical Officer for Physical Medicine SUZETTE BLIGHT, MB BS

Clinical Assistant to the Cardiology Department JOHN TIMOTHY DOWLING, MB BS MRACP

Clinical Assistant to the Medical Officer for Physical Medicine PETER LANGREE COLVILLE, MB BS

49

Faculty of Medicine

Lecturer in Vaccination

BRIAN JAMES FEERY, MB BS MRACGP

Lecturer in Tuberculosis

KEITH COWAN, MB BS

Lecturer in Infectious Diseases

JOHN ALLAN FORGES, MB BS FRALP

Assistant Surgeons

ROSS McMILLAN ADIE, MB BS FRACS FRCS JOHN FAXTON COLLINS, MB BS FRACS PAUL KITCHEN, MB BS FRACS JAMES CAMPBELL BOYD PENFOLD, MB BS FRACS FRCS

Assistant Urologists WARREN JOHNSON, MB BS FRACS PETER SUTHERLAND LAWSON, MB BS FRACS

Assistant Surgeon (Nephrology) VACANT

Assistant Orthopaedists OWEN WILLIAM DEACON, MB ChB Birm. FRACS FRCS PETER KUDELKA, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Thoracic Surgeon

MICHAEL HENRY WILLIAM MULLERWORTH, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistants to the Otolaryngoloist

PETER ADRIAN GREY, MB BS FRACS FRCS DLO JOHN KENNETH BARNES, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Gynaecologists

PETER SYDNEY ALLEN, MB BS MRCOG PETER CONDOS, MB BS MRCOG

Assistant Plastic Surgeons

WILLIAM FRANCIS WILSON, MB BS FRACS HUNTER JOHN HALL FRY, MS MB FRCS FRACS THOMAS HAMILTON ROBBINS, MB BS FRACS GEOFFREY IAN TAYLOR, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Assistant Neurosurgeon

DAVID WALLACE, MB BS FRACS FRCS

Associate Assistant to Orthopaedist

CLIVE JONES, MB BS FRACS

Anaesthetists

NANCYE EUNICE EDWARDS, MB BS FFARACS MAURICE CEDRIC HUDSON, MB BS FFARACS RODERICK JOSEPH BRAMSTON TIERNAN, MB BS FFARACS

50


Research Fellow to Cardiac Department

JITENDRA KANTELAL VOHRA, MD Bomb. MRCP MRACP

Assistant Pathologists

JOHN BOWES HOBES, MB BS BScMed FRALP WILLIAM McINTOSH ROSE, MD FRALP MRCP ROGER ALEXANDER SINCLAIR, MB BS

Associate Assistant (Medical)

ALVIS KULERS, MB BS FRALP

Research Fellow in Endocrinology

JOHN WARK, MB В S

WESTERN GENERAL HOSPITAL

Clinical Supervisor •VICTOR SELYUNG MAR, MB MS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRAOS

Senior Physicians SOL BRAND, MD В S ERWIN ARNOLD DODGE, BSc MB BS FRALP RENE HENRI DUPUCHE, MB BS MRCP MRACP JOHN YULE MATHEW, MB BS FRALP LESLIE JAMES NORTON, MB BS MRACP AAIMT

Physicians SHING TUNG FAN, MB BS MRACP POROOR VIRRANIN, MB BS MRACP ANTHONY NEIL HUNTER, MB BS

Senior Surgeons JOHN KENDAL FRANCIS, MB MS FRCS FRAOS VERNON CHARLES MARSHALL, MB BS FRCS FRAOS WILLIAM MELVILLE McDONALD, MB BS FRCS FRACS JACK LINDSAY SWAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS RAYMOND BARRY KING, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Surgeons SECK TIM LOH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS THOMAS BOURKE POLINESS, MB BS FRCS FRAOS HARRY ROSS, MB BS FRAOS JOHN BARRY SWAN, MB BS FRAOS

Senior Ophthalmologist JEFFREY LONG, BSc MB BS DO FRCS MACC

Senior Orthopaedic Surgeon KEVIN FRANCIS KING, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Plastic Surgeon ROBERT VANCE THOMPSON, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Senior Urologist DAVID ROBERT HOLDEN KENNEDY, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Dermatologist BASIL GEORGE ANDREWS, MB BS MAC')

Director of Intensive Care IAN RECHTMAN, MB BS FFARACS

Director of Casualty BRYAN WALPOLE, MB BS FRGS Edin.

Director of Pathology ALISON KINNEAR GARVEN, MB BS DCP FRACP FRCPA

MAACB

51

Faculty of Medicine

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Park Psychiatric Hospital Clinical School

Psychiatrist Superintendent WILLIAM RICHARD MILEOD, BA MB BS MRCP MRACP DPM

FRANZCP Deputy Superintendent and Consultant Psychiatrist

WALIMUNI CHANDRA PADMANATHA DE SILVA WIJESINGHE, MD BS Ceylon DPM FRCP Edin. FRCPsych MRCP

Psychiatrists ROBERT TREVOR ANDERSON, MB BS DPM HARI DASS CHOPRA, MB BS Punjab DPM Ranchi MD Bihar

MRANZCP MRCPsych FELICIA LEN, MB BS DPM ROSS MARTIN, MB ChB Otago DPM DILEEP SINGH RASTOGI MB BS Lucknow MD A.H.M.S.

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital Clinical School

Hospital Staff:

EYE SECTION

Honorary Surgeons

PETER RONALD BRETT, MB BS DO FRACS JOHN LLEWELLYN COLVIN, MB BS Q'id DO R.C.P. & S. Lind.

FRCS Edin. FRACS BARRY DESMOND COITE, MB BS DO cond. FRCS Lind. &

Edin. FRACS WILLIAM ELLIOTT GILLIES, MB BS DO FRCS Edin. FRACS JULIAN BERNARD HEINZE, MB BS DO FRCS FRAOS JAMES McBRIDE WHITE, MB BS DO FRAOS

Honorary Senior Assistant Surgeons

JAMES PAUL BORGER, MB BS Syd. DO Lind. LAURENCE ARTHUR CARROLL, MB BS DO Lind. FRCS

FRACS BARRY NICHOLLS, MB BS DO FRAOS IAN FLETT ROBERTSON, MB BS DO R.C.P. & S. Lind. FRAOS PAUL ANTHONY ROSEN, MB BS DO FRAOS MACI SAMUEL TROSKI, MB BS DO

Honorary Assistant Surgeons

WILLIAM NOEH CHIN, MB BS DO Lind. FRCS ERNEST FINKELSTEIN, MB BS DO HANS JOSEPH LORBEER, MB BS FRACS KEITH SAYERS MURRAY, MB BChir Cantab. DOMS Lind.

MRCS LRCP JUSTIN EDWARD MURPHY, MB BS DO JOSEPH WING SANG YEUNG, MB BS FRACO FRAOS

DipAmerBoardOphth

EAR, NOSE AND THROAT SECTION

Otolaryngologist-in-charge

CONSTANCE BEATRICE SARAH NAPIER, MRCS LRCP DLO R.C.P. & S.

52


JOHN ROBERT THOMSGN, MB BS Q'Id DLI FRCS Edin. FRFPS Glas. FRALS

IAN HENDERSON WARNER, BSc MB BS FRCS FRAOS ROTHWELL ALAN HILL, MB BS FRCS FRAOS GRAEME MILBOURNE 'CLARK, MB MS PhD Syd. FRCS Lind.

& Edin. FRAOS

Senior Otolaryngologists

CECIL NATHANIEL LOVE CANTOR, MD BS DLO R.C.P.&S. FRCS Edin. FRAOS

PARTIA SARATHY KATTULA, BA BS MB Andhra DLO Andhra & Melb.

LAURENCE MICHAEL RYAN, MB BS DLI Melb. FRCS FRAOS WILLIAM WALL WARNER-MOONEY. MB BS Meib. FRCS Edin.

FRAOS JOHN EDWARD DELAHUNTY MB BS Syd. FRCS DLO Melb.

FRAOS

Otolaryngologists

BOSMAN NOSHERWAN IRANI, MB MS Bombay FRCS Can. FRACS

JOSEPH BALACHANDRA KARALAPILLAI, MB BS Ceylon FRCS DLO FRACS

KEVIN JOHN KANE, MB BS FRCS Lind. & Edin. DON STEWART McMAHON, MB BS FRAOS DLO

Assistant Otolaryngologlsts HENRY GRANT HAMMOND, MB BS DLO JOHN WILLIAM HILL, MB BS

SPECIAL UNITS Pathologist

COURTENAY HUGH GREER, MB BS Lind. MRCS LRCP FRCPA FRCPath

Radiologist In Charge YUMNA HOLYOAKE, MB BS DDR FFR

Paediatrician JAMES ASHTON KEIPERT, MB BS DCH MRCPE

Physician in Charge JOIN JAMES BILLINGS, KCSG MD BS FRALP FRCP

Physicians JOHN FRANCIS N'ALL, MB BS MD Meib. MRCP MRACP

FRACP ISLA MARGARET WILLIAMS, MB BS Melb. MRCP DO

Allergist SOL BRAND, MD BS

Surgeon JOIN COUNDLEY DOYLE, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Radiotherapist ROBIN CLIVE KERR, MB BS MORA FFR

Director of Anaesthesia FRANCOIS GEORGES DOMAINGUE, MB BS Lind. DTM&H

DA FFARCS FFARACS Medical Director

KENNETH GEORGE HOWSAM, MB BS DO FRACS FACIA

53

Faculty of Medicine

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Women's Hospital Clinical School

Hospital staff:

Clinical Instructors of the Royal Women's Hospital Clinical School

Chairman of Clinical School

Professor Sir LANCE TOWNSEND, Kt VID MD BS DTM&H Land. FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG Hon.FRCS C. Hon. FACOG Hon.FCOG S.A. (Until 31/12/77)

Clinical Supervisor

JAMES HENRY EVANS, MD BS FRCOG

In-Patient Obstetrical Surgeons

FREDERICK DOUGLAS ADEY, MB BS FRCOG FAGG PAUL ELLIS JEFFERY, MB BS DGO FRCOG IAN CHARLES ROSS, MB BS MGO FRCOG FAG' JOHN GRANTLEY SHELTON, MBE MB BS FRCOG FAGG

In-Patient Gynaecological Surgeons

WILLIAM CHANEN, MB BS DGO FRCS Edin. FRACS FRCOG WALTER IAN HAREWO0D J'HNSTON, MB BS MGO FRCOG BARRY LEE GRIFFITHS KNEALE, MB BS DGO FRACS FRCOG

FAG O ALWYN RIVETT LONG. MB BS DGO FRACS FRCOG FAGO

Out-Patient Obstetrical Surgeons

LOUIS JOHN Н ARRISON BUTTERFIELD, MB ChB N.Z. DObst MRCOG FAGG

PETER HEATH, MB BS MRCOG FAGG MICHAEL KLOSS, MB BS MRCOG FAGG GRAEME JOHN RATTEN, MB BS MRCOG FAGG

Out-Patient Gynaecological Surgeons

JOHN STANLEY BARNES, MB BS FRCS Edin. MRCOG GARY DONALD BYRNE, MB BS FRCOG FRCS Edin. PETER PEREZ GLENNING, MB BS MGO FRCS Edin. FRAOS

MRCOG FAGG DONALD JOHN RAWLING, MB BS MRCOG FRCS Edin.

Paediatric Physician

FRANK REX BETHERAS, MB BS MRCOG FAGG

Paediatric Surgeon

NATHANIEL ALBERT MYERS, MD BS FRCS FRAOS

Radiotherapist

GEOFFREY ROSEVEAR KURRLE, MD BS DTR FRALP FRCA

Medical Superintendent

GAD TREVAKS, MB В S DipHospAdmin LIA FACIA


JACOB SILBERBERG, MB BC' Rand. MMedRadD Rand.

54


Director of Pathology DENYS WOODESON FORTUNE, MB ChB Brist. MRCPE

MRCPath MIAC FRCPE


KEVIN MCCAUL, MBE LRCPI LM DA RCS FFARCS FFARACS Hon .FFARCSI

Assistant Surgeons MAXWELL COLE, MB BS IRCOG STANLEY BRUCE JOHNSON, MB BS IRCOG

Clinical Instructors of the St. Vincent's Hospital Clinical School

Associate Dean (Clinical)

JOHN JAMES PATRICK BILLINGS, KCSG MD BS FRCP FRACP

Physicians to In-Patients

JOHN TERENCE CAHILL, 08E MD BS FRCP FRACP MAURICE VIVIAN CLARKE, CBE MD BS FRACP FRCP LUKE MURPHY, MD BS MRCP FRACP JOHN FRANCIS N'ALL, MD BS MRCP FRACP JAMES EDWARD FITZGERALD, MD BS FRACP

Physicians to Out-patients

KERRY JOHN BREEN, MD BS FRACP GEORGE STEWART HALE, MD BS FRACP WILLIAM CARRICK HEATH, MB BS FRACP RENE HENRI DUPUCHE, MB BS MRCP FRACP MICHAEL JOSEPH KEATING, MB BS FRACP

Surgeons to In-Patients

THOMAS EMANUEL ANTONIE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JOHN LEONARD CONNELL, MB MS FRCS FRAOS DESMOND GARVAN HURLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JAMES RICHARD McCOY, MB MS FRCS FRAOS PETER JOHN RYAN, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

Surgeons to Out-Patients

BRIAN THOMAS COLLOPY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JOHN COUNDLEY DOYLE, MB BS FRCS FRAOS JAMES MICHAEL SHAW, MB BS FRCS FRAOS PAUL KEITH STEEDMAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS IVo DOMINIC ANTHONY VELLAR, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Physician to Alcoholism Clinic

JOSEPH NATALINO SANTAMARIA, MB BS FRACP

Physician-in-Charge Asthma Allergy Clinic (Acting)

ALAN HASKILL SHARP, MB В S Mon. FRACP FRCP Canada

Cardin-Thoracic Surgeons

JOHN KEVIN CLAREBROUGH, OBE MB BS FRCS FRAOS ANTHONY CHARLES WILSON, MB BS FRAOS

55

Faculty of Medicine

Dermatologists

JOHN ANDREW BRENNAN, MB BS FRALP FALD DENIS MORLEM CLARKE, MB BS DDM Syd. FALD

Ear, Nose and Throat Surgeons

JOHN TIMOTHY KENNEDY, MB BS FRAOS MS(I А ) Dipitol U.S.A.

GERALD JAMES LITTLE, BCE LS MBBS DLO Lind. FRCS Edin.

Endocrinologists

FRANK PETER ALFORD, MD BS FRALP DONALD JOHN CHISHOLM, MB BS Syd. FRALP

Gynaecologists

THOMAS WILLIAM CAPELL, MB BS FRAOS FRCOG HILARY FRANCIS JOLLY, MB BS FRCS Glas. FRAOS FAGG

FRCOG

Neurological Surgeons

JAMES THOMAS CUMMINS, MB BS FRCS JOHN KEITH HENDERSON, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Neurologist

JOHN JAMES PATRICK BILLINGS. KCSG MD BS FRCP FRALP Neuro-Pathologist

ROSS McDONALD ANDERSON, MB BS FRCPA Oncologist

WILLIAM IVON BURNS, MB BS FRALP

Ophthalmic Surgeons

JAMES HERBERT STEPHENS MARTIN, MB BS DO FRCS FRACS

JOSEPH WING-SANG YEUNG, MB BS DipOphthal U.S.A. FRACS MAC0

Orthopaedic Surgeons

HENRY VERNON CRICK. MD BS FRCS FRACS BRENDON JOHN DOOLEY, MB BS FRCS FRACS KEVIN FRANCIS KING, MB BS FRCS FRACS JONATHAN HOWELL RUSH, MB BS FRACS

Paediatric Physician

DAVID BUXTON PITT, MD BS FRALP

Paediatric Surgeon

JOHN DOUGLAS ABERDEEN, MB BS FRAOS EUSTACE JULIAN KEOGH, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Pathologist (Cytogenetics)

OLGA MARGARET GARBON, MB BS FRCPA FRALP

Plastic Surgeons

RICHARD KERNAN NEWING, VRD MD BS FRCS FRAOS BERNARD McCARTHY O'BRIEN, BSc MB MS FRCS FRAOS

FALS

56


Psychiatrists ROWLAND ERIC SEAL, MA MB BS DPM FRALP FANZCP DONALD CHARLES GRANT, MB BS Adel. DPM MANZCP KWEE KEAT LIM, MB BCh BAO MA Dub. DPM N.U.I. MRCPsych

Psychiatrist-Psychotherapist IAN HOLLAND MARTIN, MD BS Adel. FANZCP FRCPsych

Rheumatologist JOHN BEVAN WEBB, MB BS FRALP

Therapeutic Radiologists JAMES PATRICK JOSEPH MADIGAN, MD BS FRALP DTR

FCRA ROBIN CLIVE KERR, MB BS MORA FFR FRCR FRACR

Surgeons to Urological Clinic PETER JAMES MORTENSEN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS DANIEL LENAGHAN, MB MS FRCS FRAOS

Assistant Physicians to Out-Patients WILLIAM IVON BURNS, MB BS FRALP PETER JOSEPH JAMES DAVIES, MB BS FRALP HELEN MARIE MORAN, MB BS FRALP JOHN EDWARD MORAN, MB BS FRALP EDWARD FRANCIS O'SULLIVAN, MB В S FRALP

Assistant Surgeons to Out-Patients

ROY LAURENCE WILLIS FINK, MB BS FRCS FRAOS RUPERT NEVILLE HOOD, MB BS FRCS FRAOS FRANCESCO INCANI, MB Bs FRCS FRAOS RONALD JOHN MERCER, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRAOS MICHAEL JOHN PAROULAKIS, MB BS FRAOS FRCS

Assistant Dermatologist HARVEY ROTSTEIN, MB BS MRACP FALD

Assistant Ear, Nose and Throat Surgeon

ROTHWELL ALLAN HILL, MB BS FRCS Assistant Gynaecologist

JAMES PATRICK °'NEILL, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRAOS FRCOG

Assistant Neurosurgeon DARYL HEATH NYE, MB BS FRAOS

Assistant Ophthalmic Surgeon

MARK GRAHAM LAZARUS, MB BS Dip°phthal U.S.A.

Assistant Orthopaedic Surgeons

BRIAN PERCY DAVIE, MB BS FRAOS JONATHAN CHARLES HOOFER, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS

FRACS LEO LENAGHAN, MB BS FRCS FRAOS STANLEY FREDERICK SCHOFIELD, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Assistant Paediatric Physicians ALLAN DOUGLAS BRYAN, MB BS Old MRACP

57

Faculty of Medicine

DIWAKARLA LALITH BHASК AR SHARMA, MB BS Osmania DHC MD Bom.

Assistant Paediatric Surgeon SUMITRA FELIX WICKRAMASINGHE, MB BS Ceylon FRCS

FRACS Assistant Plastic Surgeons

DAVID ANDREW JENNER, MB BS FRAOS ALAN MALCOLM MACLEOD, MB BS FRAOS WAYNE ALLAN JOHN MORRISON, MB BS FRACS

Assistant Psychiatrists EDMOND YU-KEUN CHID, MB BS Old DPM MANZCP HARRY NORMAN NEW, MB BS DPM MANZCP NEVILLE EDWARD PARKER, MD BS lid DPM FRCPsych MARGARET ANN EMMA PICKLES, MB BS BSc DPM MANZCP RICHARD JERZY PRYTULA, MB BS Monesh DPM MANZCP

Assistant Rheumatologists KEVIN JAMES FRASER, MB BS MRCP MRACP ELIZABETH ROMA LENAGHAN, MB BS DCH Lind. MRCP

Assistant Surgeons to Urologist JOSEPH GERARD JOYCE, MB BS FRACS PETER JULIAN METZNER, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS

Relieving Assistant Surgeons to Out-Patients

JOHN FRANCIS GURRY, MB BS FRACS FRCS JOHN RICHARD MACKAY, MB BS FRAOS FRCS VICTOR SELYOUNG MAR, MB BS Q'id FRCS FRCS Edin.

FRACS DOMINIC VELLAB, MB BS FRACS FRCS JOHN DENIS VIDOVICH, MB BS FRACS FRCS

Relieving Assistant Physicians to Out-Patients

GEOFFREY DONALD KERR, MB BS FRALP SUSAN MARY SCOTT, MB BS FRALP FRANCIS XAVIER MORRIS WILLIS, MB BS DTM&H Syd.

FRACP

Endocrinologist

FRANK PETER ALFORD, MD BS FRACP

Gastroenterologist

KERRY JOHN BREEN, MD BS FRACP


BRYAN McKAY RUSH, MB BS Syd. FRACP FR CPA

Director of Intensive Care Unit

BERNARD GEORGE CLARKE, MB BS MRCP FRACP

Assistant Specialist to Intensive Care Unit

DAVID CHARLES CADE, MB BS FRACP

Physician to Intensive Care Unit

JOHN EDMOND O'DONOVAN, MB BS FRACP

58


Director of Microbiology

BRYAN CRAIG AEKINS STRATFORD, ED MD BS FRALP FRCPA MRCPath Lind.

Assistant Neurologist and Clinical-Neuro-Physiologist EDWARD BRUCE TOMLINSON, MB BS FRALP

Director of Nuclear Medicine RUDOLPH LEOPOLD CHMIEL, MB BS DTR MRACR

Director of Anatomical Pathology NORMAN ALEXANDER DAVIS, MB BS FRCPA MRCPath

Deputy Director of Anatomical Pathology DAVID JOHN DAVIES, BSc MD ChB Liv. FRCPA

Assistant Pathologist—Anatomical Pathology HILARY FAY HILL, MB BS Syd. FRCPA

Director of Radiology ERIC JOHN GILFORD, MB BS MORA FFR

Deputy Director of Radiology PAUL DOUGLAS MOWAT, MB BS o/d DMRD FFR

Hon.MRACR Director of Medical Rehabilitation

JOHN ANTHONY BURGESS, MB BS FRALP Senior Visiting Anaesthetists

HUGH LAMERO BUTEL, MB ChB N.Z. FFARACS HENRY PETER PENN, MB BS DA FFARCS FFARACS MICHAEL JOHN WATERFIELD, MB ChB Sheff. FFARACS

Visiting Anaesthetists ROBERT WILLIAM COWIE, MB BS FFARACS WILLIAM HENRY TAYLOR, MB BS FFARACS GERALD BRIAN WESTMORE, MD BS MRCP FFARACS ARTHUR FREDERICK WOODS, MB BS Adel. FFARACS

Consulting Surgeon GERALD ROSNAN, MB BE FRCS FRAOS

Medical Officer—Psychiatry URSULA MARIE McKENNA, BSc MB MS

Lecturer in Vaccination BRIAN JAMES FEERY, MB BS MRACGP

PRESTON AND NORTHCOTE COMMUNITY HOSPITAL

Senior Physicians RONALD KEITH DOIG, MD BS FRALP JAMES EDWARD FITZGERALD, MD BS FRALP IAN HOME McKENZIE, MB BS FRALP

Senior Surgeons

KENNETH STEWART BREARLEY, MB BS FRCS Edin. FRCS FRACS

JOHN BERNARD FETHERS, MB BS FRCS FRACS GORDON WALGRAVE TRINCA, MB BS FRACS

Senior Obstetrician & Gynaecologist

COLIN FERGUSON MacDONALD, MB BS MRCOG

Senior Urologist

DANIEL LENAGHAN, MS MB FRCS FRACS

59

Faculty of Medicine

Senior Orthopaedic Surgeons

BRIAN PERCY DAVIE, MB BS FRAOS BRENDAN JOHN DOOLEY, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Senior Otorhinolaryngologist

JOHN KENNETH BARNES, MB BS FRCS FRAOS

Otorhinolaryngologist

JOSEPH BALACHANDRA KARALAPILLAI, MB BS Cey. FRCS DLO FRACS


GEOFFREY NORMAN VAUGHAN, MB BS FRACS DO

Senior Plastic Surgeon

GEOFFREY IAN TAYLOR, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Cardiologist JITENDRA KANTILAL VOHRA, MD BS Bomb. MRCP FRACP

Physician GEOFFREY LEIGH COGGINS, MB BS Monash MRACP

Surgeons

DAVID MAYO CONROY, MB BS FRCS FRACS AUBREY WILLIAM JANSZ, MB BS Cey. FRCS FRACS JOHN WILLIAM McKENZIE UPJOHN, MB BS FRCS FRACS

Obstetrician & Gynaecologist

RONALD ALWYN SPEECHLEY, MB BS FRCOG

Ophthalmologist

BARRIE WILLIAM GRISOLD NICHOLLS, MB BS FRACS DO

O-thopaedic Surgeon

JOHN FALVEY O'BRIEN, MB BS FRAOS

Plastic Surgeon

MURRAY JAMES STAPLETON, MB BS FRAOS

Urologist

JOSEPH GERARD JOYCE, MB BS FRAOS

Paediatricians

EDWARD SIMON BENHAM, MB BS FRALP JOHN GORDON HUNTER, MB BS FRALP


WINFIELD ROBERT CURTIS BENNETT, MB BS FROR FRACR

The Walter and Eliza Hall Institute of Medical Research

Director

Professor Sir GUSTAV JOSEPH VICTOR NOSSAL, KBE BSc( Ме d) MB BS Syd. PhD FRACP FRCPA FALMA FAA

e0


Senior Associated Staff

IAN REAP MACKAY, MD FRCP FRACP FRCPA DONALD METCALF, AO BSc(Med) Syd. FRCPA FRACP FAA JACQUES FRANCIS ALBERT PIERRE MILLER, BSc( Ме d) MB

BS Syd. PhD DSc Lind. FAA FRS KENNETH DOUGLAS SHORTMAN, BSc Syd. PhD

Associated Staff

JERRY McKEE ADAMS, BSc Emory PhD Har". (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

ROBIN ANDERS, BAgrSc PhD (Postoctoral Fellow) BERND ARNOLD, DipChem PhD Freiburg (Postdoctoral Fellow,

West Germany) JONATHAN BUCKLEY, BMedSc MB BS (Postgraduate Scholar) ANTONY BURGESS, BSc PhD (Senior Research Officer,

N.H. & M.R.C.) ROBERT CHARLES BURTON, BMedSc MB BS MRACP FRACS

Postgraduate Scholar, N.H. & M.R.C.) SUZANNE CORY, PhD Cantab. MSc (Senior Research Officer,

N.H. & M.R.C.) JANETTA CULVENOR, BSc A.N.U. KAREN DAY, BSc JAMES GODING, MB BS Monash BMedSc (Senior Research

Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.) NICHOLAS GOUGH, BSc Adel. (Postgraduate Scholar) DORA GRGACIC, BSc Monash EMANUELA HANDMAN, BSc PhD The Hebrew University

Postdoctoral Fellow, World Health Organization) ALAN WILLIAM HARRIS, PhD Tor. MSc (Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.) MARGARET COOPER HOLMES, MSc PhD (Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.) MAUREEN HOWARD, BSc (Postgraduate Scholar) RUSSELL HOWARD, BSc PhD (Postdoctoral Fellow) KEN'ICHI IMANISHI, BAgrSc MSc Tokyo (Postgraduate Scholar) GREGORY JOHNSON, BSc( Е d) BSc PhD (Senior Research

Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.) RODNEY PETER LAMBERT, DIP Old MB BS BMedSc (Post-

graduate Scholar, N.H. & M.R.C.) JUDITH ELEANOR LAYTON, BSc JUSTIN McCARTHY, BSc(Med) Syd. (Postgraduate Scholar,

N.H. & M.R.C.) THOMAS ELI MANDEL, MB BS (Research Fellow, N.H. &

M.R.C.) GRAHAM FRANK MITCHELL, BVSc Syd. RDA PhD (Senior

Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) NICOS NICOLA, BSc PhD (Queen Elizabeth it Fellow)

JOHN PYE, BSc (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) BELINDA RODGER, BSc LaT. MSc SUE RUSSELL, BSc JOHN SC Н RADER, MB BS Adel. BMedSc PhD (Research

Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) MICHAEL SCHU МА C НЕ R, MB BS FRACP (Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.) DAVID SCOTT, MS Chic. PhD Yale (Visiting Fellow, U.S.A.)

61

Faculty of Medicine

FRANCES SMITH, BSc (Postgraduate Scholar) JANET STANLEY, DipSocStud BCom ANN STEWART, BSc ALEKSANDER SZENBERG, MD Zurich Docent Warsaw (Re-

search Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) MASARU TANGIGUCHI, MD DMSc Tokyo (Visiting Fellow,

Japan) JUDY TEALE, BS Pennsyl. PhD Virginie (Postdoctoral Fellow,

U.S.A.) JOHN TEW, BS MS PhD Brigham Young (Visiting Fellow,

U.S.A.) SUZANNE WATT, BSc N.E. (Postgraduate Scholar) SENGA FLORENCE WITTINGHAM, MB ChB N.Z. DCP Lind.

PhD MRACP FRCPA (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

Howard Florey Institute of Experimental Physiology and Medicine

Director DEREK ASHWORTH DENTIN, MB BS

Deputy Director JOHN PAUL COGHLAN, PhD DSC (Principal Research Fellow,

N.H. & M.R.C.)

Assistant Directors BRYAN HUDSON, MD BS PhD FRACP FRCP (Principal

Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.) HUGH DAVID MALL, MD BS FRACP (Principal Research

Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

Scientific Staff

KINGSLEY JOHN FRASER ALLEN, MSc PhD MAIP (Senior Research Officer, N.H. M.R.C.)

HUGH WILLIAM GORDON BAKER, MB BS PhD Monxsh MRACP (Research Fellow, Ford Foundation)

JOHN REGINALD BLAIR-WEST, MSc PhD (Senior Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

BJORN WILHELM В ORJESSON, CandReal Bergen PhD (Junior Research Fellow, Anti-Cancer Cncl. of Vic.)

ALDONA BUTKUS, DipMedLabTechnol A.I.L.M.T. (Research Assistant, N.H. & M.R.C.)

•MEGAN COLLIER, BSc (Research Assistant, W.H.O.) MARIA CONGIU, BSc (Research Assistant, N.H. & M.R.C.) 'JAMES SHING KOIN FAN, BSc PhD (Senior Research

Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.) ROSS TERENCE FERNLEY, BSc Q'Id PhD Monxsh (Senior

Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C. ANGELA PASSMORE GIBBON, BSc (Research Assistant,

N.H. & M.R.C.) RUTH EMILY HIGGINSON, BSc Queens (Research Assistant,

W.H.O.) ROBERT JOHN JAMES, DipAppChem Preston (Research As-

sistant, N.H. & M.R.C.) MARIE JOHN, DipChemEng Stockholm (Research Assistant,

W.H.O.) MICHAEL JOSEPH McKINLEY, MSc PhD (Senior Research

Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.)

82


•AUSMA NIROVICS. MSc Monash (Research Assistant, N.H. & M.R.C.)

JOHN FREDERICK NELSON, MSc PhD (Senior Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.)

CATHERINE JANE ODDIE, MSc (Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.)

BRUCE ALAN SCOGGINS, MAgrSc Cant. PhD (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

SHIRLEY ATHALE PAMELA SIMPSON, MSc (Research Assistant, N.H. & M.R.C.)

•MARGARET HELEN SMITH, BSc (Research Assistant, N.H. & M.R.C.)

MERYLIN ANN THOMPSON, BSc Monash (Research Assistant, W.H.O.)

GEOFFREY WILLIAM TREGEAR, BSc PhD Monash (Research Fellow, N.H. & M.R.C.)

JOHN RAMSAY WALSH, BSc ARMIT (Research Assistant, N.H. & M.R.C.)

RICHARD STUART WEISINGER, BA okie. City MSc PhD Wash. (Senior Research Officer, N.H. & M.R.C.)

ROY DOUGLAS WRIGHT, DSc Melb. & A.N.U. MB MS FRACP (Fellow)

Associated Staff

RICHARD MONROE BERGLAND, M.D. Corn. (Visiting Research Fellow, Josiah lacy Jr. Foundation)

PROFESSOR RALPH ARDEN BRADSHAW, B.A. Colby, PhD Duke (Visiting Research Fellow, Josiah lacy Jr. Founda-tion)

tGRAHAM DENE BURROWS, MB ChB BSc Otago DPM MANZCP MRCPsych (First Assistant, Department of Psychiatry)

tKENNETH JOHN HARDY, MB BS FRACS FRCS (Department of Surgery, Austin Hospital)

tJOHN SIMON McKENZIE, MSc PhD (Senior Lecturer, De-partment of Physiology)

DAVID RICHARD MOUW, B.A. Hope, PhD Mich. (Visiting Research Fellow, Fogarty International Research Fellow-ship)

tPETER MAXWELL ROBINSON, BSc PhD (Senior Lecturer, Department of Anatomy)

tELVIE MARELYN WINTOUR, MSo PhD (Senior Lecturer, Department of Physiology)

63

Postgraduate Examinations? Entries Exam. Entries Exam.

close begins close begins

CHAPTER 1

IMPORTANT DATES APPLICATIONS FOR ADMISSION

Applications for admission to First Year should be made on the form 'Victorian Universities Application for Admission as an Undergraduate in 1978', which must be lodged at Victorian Universities Admissions Committee, 11 Queens Road, Melbourne, Vic. 3004. Applications for admission to any subsequent year of the course should be made in writing addressed to the Registrar.

Nov. 3 1977—Last day of lodging applications for admission to Second Year in 1978 for students not enrolled in First Year in 1977.

ENROLMENTS

See Students' Information Booklet.

TERMS AND EXAMINATIONS

All undergraduates should consult Time-table and Summary of Principal Dates for 1978 in Chap. 8.

1st Series 2nd Series

MD, MGO Part I Jan. 6 Feb. 6 July 14 Aug. 14 MGO Part I1 Jan. 6 Feb. 27 July 14 Aug. 14 Clinicals during week

commencing Mar. 14 Aug. 21 Diplomas Part I Jan. 6 Feb. 6 July 14 Aug. 14 Diplomas Part II Jan. 6 Feb. 27 Aug. 21 Sept. 18

GRADUATION

See Students' Information Booklet.

t Entries for these examinations should be lodged it the Faculty Office. Late entries cannot be accepted.

64

(1)

(2)

(3)

CHAPTER 2

DEGREES AND DIPLOMAS

BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY

Candidates for admission to this course, which extends over six years, must:

Pass the Higher School Certificate examination in four subjects at the one examination at not more than two attempts;

obtain Grade D or higher at the Higher School Certificate examina-tion in English, Chemistry and in either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology; and

gain selection In a quota.

For further information see—

Special Advice for those preparing to enter the Medical Course (p. 68). Policies governing Admission (p. 69). On successfully completing Third Year, students must enrol at one of the general teaching hospitals to which they have been admitted. Application forms for allocation to a clinical school, together with relevant informa-tion, are posted to the students concerned.

COMBINED COURSE IN MEDICINE AND MEDICAL SCIENCE

A course for the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science is а Ρ vaflа blе to encourage students to obtain a knowledge in depth of one of the subjects of the medical course and to enter the research fiе lд after completion of the medical undergraduate course. Students who have shown special apti-tudes in their studies and who are recommended by the head of the appropriate department, may undertake advanced studies In one of the тед iса l departments for 12 calendar months. Candidates for the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science will be required to submit for examination a detailed report on the advanced work carried out and may be required to pass In a subject prescribed by the faculty of Medicine. Applications for approval of a combined course should be submitted to the secretary, faculty of Medicine.

DOCTOR OF MEDICINE; MASTER OF SURGERY; MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS

The University acts as an examining body for these higher degrees. Candidates may proceed by eхат ination and/or by thesis. The appro-priate regulation and details of subjects should be consulted in each case. Attendance at courses of Instruction Is not compulsory. Candidates for the Master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics may wish to take advantage of a course for the Part I examination which is conducted in the depart-ment of Obstetrics and Gynaecology, Royal Women's Hospital. Enquiries should be made to the Professorial Unit at the hospital.

C 85

Faculty of Medicine

The secretary, faculty of Medicine, should be consulted with reference to:

(1) first enquiries regarding eligibility and current details; (2) approval of experience and of candidature for examinations; (3) examination entries and the submission of theses.

The Students' Records Office deals with examination time-tables, results, and applications for degrees to be conferred.

POSTGRADUATE DIPLOMAS

The University also acts as an examining body for the following post-graduate specialist diplomas:

Diploma in Ophthalmology Diploma in Laryngology and Otology Diploma in Diagnostic Radiology Diploma in Therapeutic Radiology Diploma in Psychological Medicine Diploma in Anaesthetics Diploma in Audiology Courses and examinations for the Diploma in Public Health have been suspended. At the present time courses of instruction are available for the following diplomas and enquiries should be made to the appropriate area as shown below.

Diploma in Laryngology and Otology Department of Otolaryngology Diploma in Audiology Royal Victorian Eye and Ear

Hospital.

Diploma in Psychological Medicine—Department of Psychiatry, Clinical Sciences Building Royal Melbourne Hospital.

DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY

This degree for full-time research workers is under the control of the Pro-fessorial Board. Intending candidates should consult the Secretary for Graduate Studies.

66

CHAPTER 3

ADVICE TO THOSE PREPARING TO ENTER THE MEDICAL COURSE

SPECIAL COURSE REQUIREMENTS

Special course requirements for admission to the medical course are compulsory. Students are required to have successfully completed the Higher School Ceп ificate Examination by obtaining grade D or higher in four subjects at the one examination at not more than two attempts, and to have obtained at the Higher School Certificate Examination grade D or higher in English, Chemistry and one of either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology.

PREPARATORY STUDIES FOR THE MEDICAL COURSE

For the fifth year, students are advised to include the following:

1. English 2. A subject from the Language/History Group 3. Chemistry

4. 1 Physics and a & branch of mathematics 5.) or Biology 6. Student's own choice, preferably a non-scientific subject.

Intending medical students are advised to include English, Chemistry and either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology. The purpose of taking a branch of Mathematics is to obtain the mathematical background neces-sary to deal with Physics at the Higher School Certificate examinations and first year stages. For students who are not mathematically inclined, General Mathematics may be considered to provide the minimum back-ground knowledge. There appears to be no necessity for students to take both Pure and Applied Mathematics. Instead of taking these two branches of mathematics it is desirable that another non-scientific subject be taken to avoid the disadvantages of over-specialization at this stage. For the Higher School Certificate examination, students should include the following:

1. English 2. Chemistry 3. Physics or a branch of Mathematics or Biology 4. and 5. Own choice, although a pass in one of these only is required

to satisfy university entrance requirements.

English and Chemistry are compulsory pre-requisite subjects, while the choice between Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology will depend on the student's past performance in these subjects and his ability to cope with Physics and Biology at first year University level. It is per-missible to take more than one of these three subjects. Students may wish to take General Mathematics as an aid to Physics. The Faculty of Medicine would prefer students to include at least one non-scientific subject of their choice.

67

CHAPTER 4

POLICIES GOVERNING ADMISSION, 1978 Enquiries should be made from the secretary, faculty of Medicine, before the Higher School Certificate year is commenced.

The following are the special principles of selection for the faculty of Medicine. They are a consolidation of policies in operation for а number of years, although at the time of printing they are subject to approval by Council. The University's general principles of selection appear in the Appendix of this book.

FIRST YEAR QUOTA AND SELECTION Since the beginning of 1956, the number of students admitted to the First Year has been restricted. The quota is 220. All who are ad-mitted and who pass the first year examination are permitted to proceed to the second year. The quota is fixed by the University Council, but selection is made by the Professorial Board. In accordance with principles prepared by the Professorial Board and approved by Council, an academic order-of-merit list is prepared by a Selection Committee, and submitted to the Profes-sorial Board for approval.

1. SELECTION COMMITTEE

The selection shall be carried out by a committee consisting of the Dean of the faculty of Medicine and such other members as may be approved by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Medicine.

2. BASIS OF SELECTION

The selection committee shall endeavour to select those applicants who appear to be best fitted to pursue medical studies and practise success-fully, and, to this end, selection shall be based primarily upon academic merit judged in the first instance by reference to the Higher School Certificate examination.

The selection committee shall, however, take into consideration-

2.1 The age of applicants and such factors as aptitude for University studies, physical handicaps, and in borderline cases any disad-vantage in educational background, as revealed, if required, by interviews and headmasters' reports.

2.2 The normal place of residence of applicants so that of the 220 candidates to be selected, a limited number may be overseas students, such students being those whose home of permanent domicile is outside Australia but who have otherwise satisfied the prerequisites.

68

Policies Governing Admission

Subject to the general principle of selection on the basis of academic merit, in the selection of an applicant whose home is overseas, account will be taken of the availability to the applicant of medical education In the applicant's own country and the existence of any agreed programmes of assistance to that country.

2.3 Preference may be given to an applicant seeking tertiary education for the first time in comparison with one who has commenced some form of tertiary education.

З . SELECTION FORMULA A quota score is determined for each applicant by the following formula:

1—The mark obtained in Chemistry 2—The mark obtained In English 3—The best mark of Physics, Biology or a branch of Mathematics 4—The best mark of any subject taken at the examination provided it

is not a mark for a second branch of Mathematics, where one such mark has already been Included, except where no other mark is available for scoring.

Bonus points may be awarded for additional subjects undertaken at one or two attempts at the Higher School Certificate examination, up to a maximum of four additional subjects. The bonus awarded is 10% of the mark obtained in the additional subject. A penalty of 10% of the total quota score will be imposed on candidates who present for the examination on a second occasion, and similarly a candidate who takes more than one year after completing the fifth school year, to prepare for the Higher School Certificate examination will also receive a penalty. In the final analysis, comparisons may be made on the basis of marks scored (totals, averages, and marks in individual subjects) and, if necessary headmasters' reports, personal interviews by the committee and any submissions made by the applicants relating to illness or other serious cause gravely hampering studies and examination performances.

SECOND YEAR The quota for Second Year shall be 240, comprising,

(i) All students passing First Year (ii) Students permitted to repeat Second Year

(iii) Second Year students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence.

If the total of the above categories does not reach 240: (iv) University graduates or undergraduates from Sciences—Dentistry,

Veterinary Science, Science, etc. (v) Students who have a genuine change of home to Victoria after

completing the first year of a medical course in another State. (vi) Students holding other approved degrees or diplomas from colleges

of advanced education shall be admitted after selection on the basis of academic merit if necessary. In addition, there shall be power for the selection committee to recom-mend the admission to Second Year of up to ten students who would be required to undertake the full subject of Anatomy including Histology

69

Faculty of Medicine

and Embryology, and to have sufficient previous studies in Biochemistry and Physiology to qualify for exemption from the laboratory work of these two subjects.

THIRD YEAR The quota for Third Year shall be 240, comprising,

(i) All students passing Second Year

(ii) Students permitted to repeat Third Year

(iii) Third Year students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence.

If the total of the above categories does not reach 240:

(iv) Students transferring from other medical schools who are deemed to have obtained a standard equivalent to that of our Second Year (to be subject to selection on the basis of academic merit if necessary).

In addition, there shall be power for the selection committee to recom-mend the admission of up to ten students to a combined Second and Third Year course which, if successfully completed, would permit entry to Fourth Year. It is envisaged that such students would hold a higher degree with major studies In Pathology, Microbiology or Pharmacology. To enable these students to reach the standard required for entry to Fourth Year, they would be required to undertake, after receiving credit for previous studies, a combined course of Second and Third Year subjects.

FOURTH YEAR The quota for Fourth Year shall be 240, comprising,

'(I) All students passing Third Year

(ii) Students permitted to repeat Fourth Year

(iii) Fourth Year students permitted to resume the course after leave of absence.

If the total of the above categories does not reach 240:

(iv) SuitaЫ y qualified students admitted ad eundem statum from inter-state or overseas medical schools (to be subject to selection on the basis of academic merit if necessary).

This would include students admitted to a combined Second and Third Year referred to under the policy of Third Year.

FIFTH AND SIXTH YEARS The quota for each year shall be 240, comprising,

(i) All students proceeding from Fourth and Fifth Years respectively

(ii) Students permitted to repeat the respective years

(iii) Students resuming the course after leave of absence. If the total in each year from the above categories does not reach 240: (iv) Suita ь l y qualified students transferring (ad eundem statute) from

other Australian medical schools (to be subject to selection on the basis of academic merit if necessary).

70

Policies Governing Admission

GENERAL POLICY GOVERNING ADMISSION AD EUNDEM STATUM

The Medical Practitioners Act 1970 makes it possible for a person to be entitled to apply to be registered as a legally qualified medical prac-titioner in the State of Victoria if that person holds the Degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery of any university in Aus-tralia as to at least the last three academic years of a regular course of medical and surgical study at that University. As a consequence, the faculty of Medicine has formulated the following policy governing the admission ad eundem statum of students who have completed the whole or part of a medical course elsewhere:

1. General principles applicable to all candidates.

( а ) No student is permitted to qualify for the degrees of M.B., B.S. un-less otherwise eligible for registration in Victoria.

(b) Evidence satisfactory to the faculty as to permanent domicile in Victoria is required.

(c) Students who do not speak English as their native tongue are re-quired to pass a test in English.

(d) Students who have completed part of a medical course in an over-seas university may be required to undergo tests and satisfy chairmen of departments as to their knowledge of prerequisite subjects for the purpose of assessing any credit they may receive in the course.

(e) The number of students admitted ad еипдет statum to any year of the course shall be subject to any quota and selection process that may be found necessary.

2. Graduates of European university medical schools. Applicants for admission in this category are required to produce docu-mentary evidence of graduation, and to pass an examination, held at the conclusion of First Term Third Year, in each of the subjects Anatomy (in-cluding Histology and Embryology). Physiology and Biochemistry, to qualify for admission to Medicine Third Year (Second Term). Admission to Third Year will be subject to any quota and selection that may be found necessary. For the purpose of receiving instruction, candidates who so desire may seek permission from the chairmen of departments of Anatomy, Physiology and Biochemistry to attend lectures in these subjects. Those who attend lectures must lodge an enrolment card at the Students' Records Office and pay the fees for which they are assessed. Any selection necessary will be based on the results of this examination. Details for the guidance of candidates will be supplied on request to the secretary, faculty of Medicine. Credit for subjects passed cannot be retained from one year to another. All subjects must be passed at the one examination. 3. Students who have completed portion of the course in European uni-versity medical schools. (a) Applicants who produce satisfactory evidence that they have passed

examinations in Physics, Chemistry and Biology at a standard equivalent to that required of students In our First Year may be ad-mitted to Mед iс iпе Second Year subject to selection in any quota found to be necessary and in accordance with the policy governing the selection of this quota.

Applicants who produce satisfactory evidence that they have passed examinations in Anatomy (Including Histology and Embryology),

(b)

71

Faculty of Medicine

Physiology and Biochemistry at a standard comparable with that of our Medicine Second Year and First Term Third Year may be granted credit for attendance at lectures and practical work but shall be required to pass our examinations in Anatomy. Physiology and Bio-chemistry In Second and Third Years. To be eligible to present for this examination, such applicants will be required to enrol and pay the prescribed fees but attendance at lectures and practical work will be subject to any quota and selection that may be found necessary.

4. Students who have completed portion of the course in medical schools other than those of European universities.

(a) Applicants who produce satisfactory evidence of having passed the examination for Second MB BS In a university medical school In the United Kingdom, New Zealand, or in another Australian State may be admitted to Mед iс iпе Third Year (Second Term) subject to the general principles governing ad eundem statum admissions.

(b) Applicants who produce satisfactory evidence that they have passed examinations in Anatomy (including Histology and Embryology), Physiology and Biochemistry, at a standard comparable with that of our Medicine Third Year (First Term) in approved university medical schools In countries other than the United Kingdom, and New Zea-land may be granted the status of candidates eligible to present for our examinations in Medicine Third Year (First Term) as set out in Section 3(b) above. For the purposes of this category, the medical schools in the uni-versities of Canada, South Africa, Malaya and the Grade A uni-versity medical schools of the United States of America will be regarded as approved.

(c) All other applicants must comply with the policy governing selection in any quota found to be necessary for admission to First Year or to Medicine Second Year as set out in separate statements.

72

CHAPTER 6

SCHOLARSHIPS, BURSARIES, PRIZES AND FINANCIAL ASSISTANCE

The awards summarized In the following list are available to medical students. The approximate value of each award is given, together with the office at which full information may be obtained. See also the Students' information Booklet and the Calendar for finan-cial assistance, scholarships and awards available to students generally.

Financial assistance may be given during a course from the F. Gordon Elford Fund. See Regulation R 7.86

UNDERGRADUATE AWARDS—M.B., B.S. COURSE

Unless specified otherwise, these are awarded at Annual Examinations. Full information may be obtained from the secretary, faculty of Medicine.

First Year:

Chemistry—Exhibition (930). Physics—G. A. Syme Exhibition (930). Physics—T. F. Ryan Roentgen Prize (Medal, plus $20) for essay. Biology—W. H. Swanton Exhibition (940). Biо l о gу —Baldwin Spencer Prize (books to value of $33).

Second Year:

No prizes available.

Third Year:

Anatomy—T. F. Ryan Prize (Medal, plus 820). Anatomy, including Histology—Dwight's Prize ($50). Anatomy, including Histology—Exhibition (820). Medical Studies Il—Geigy Prize (Psychological Approaches to Abnormal

Behaviour) ($50). Physiology—Burroughs Wellcome Prize (9100). Pharmacology—Boots Prize (950 or equivalent). Biochemistry—Exhibitions (850, 820). Pathology—Walter and Eliza Hall Exhibition (960). Microbiology and Epidemiology—Ramsay Prize (9100). Thomas and Elizabeth Ross Scholarship—(9300 ea.) for additional year

of study leading to the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science.

Fourth Year:

Cadetships (Army, Navy, Air Force) are offered each year to under-graduates qualified to enter the clinical section of the course. Full information should be obtained from the Commonwealth Department concerned.

Fifth Year:

Forensic Medicine—Exhibition (810). Crawford Morrison Prize in Forensic Medicine ($100).

73

Faculty of Medicine

Sixth Year:

Dermatology—Herman Lawrence Prizes ($75, $25, $15), clinical examina-tion.

Medicine— Keith Levi Memorial Scholarship ($206). Jamieson Prize in Clinical Medicine ($87). Grieve Memorial Prize in Paediatrics ($30). Robert Gartley Healey Prize in Medicine ($262). Mead Johnson Prize in Paediatrics ($55). Carnation Prize in Paediatrics ($105). John Adey Prize in Psychiatry ($64). Upjohn Prize in Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics ($50). Occupational Medicine—Edgar Rouse Prizes ($100, $50), special ex-

amination. Medical Officers of Hea lth Section of the A.M.A. Prize ($50). Surgery- Веапеу Scholarship ($411). Robert Gartley Prize in Surgery ($262). Clara Myers Prize in Surgical Paediatrics ($181). Ryan Prizes. Smith & Nephew Prize in Surgery ($250). Proxime Accessit Prize in Surgery ($250).

Obstetrics and Gynaecology—

Fulton Scholarship ($231). Hubert Sydney Jacobs Prize in Clinical Gynaecology (8100). Dr. Kate Campbell Prize in Neonatal Paediatrics ($78). Robert Gartley Healey Prize in Obstetrics ($262). Sir A. E. Rowden White Prize in Clinical Obstetrics ($200). Edgar and Mabel Coles Prize in Obstetrics ($200).

Otolaryngology- Hedley F. Summons Prize (approx. $100).

Ophthalmology— Australian College of Ophthalmologists Prize (approx. $50).

POSTGRADUATE AWARDS

Information may be obtained from the secretary, faculty of Medicine, concerning the following: Веапеу Scholarship in Pathology. Thomas and Elizabeth Ross Scholarship. Sir Thomas Peel Dunhill Research Scholarship. Sir Thomas Naghten Fitzgerald Scholarship. Arthur Nyulasy Scholarship in Gynaecology. Armytage Prize. Stewart Scholarships in Medicine and Surgery. Melbourne Medical Postgraduate Committee, Gordon-Taylor Scholarship. David В . Rosenthal Scholarship. Selwyn-Smith Medical Research Prize. Sheppard M. Lowe Scholarship. The Secretary for Graduate Studies should be consulted concerning all other postgraduate awards.

74

CHAPTER 6

NOTICES TO MEDICAL GRADUATES

HOSPITAL APPOINTMENTS

The Board of Management of The Royal Melbourne Hospital, Parkville, makes annual appointments of medical graduates. The current establish-ment provides for 36 interns (first year graduates), 28 second year Resident Medical Officers, 3 third year Resident Surgical Officers, 14 rotating General Medical Registrars. 10 Specialist Medical Registrars some of whom are rotating, 10 rotating Surgical Registrars and 9 Spe-cialist Surgical Registrars. These Medical and Surgical Registrar positions are suitable for advanced training in General and Specialist Medicine and Surgery as required by the respective Royal Colleges. In addi-tion there are 26 Specialist Registrar positions, one to Anatomical Pathology, four to Haematology, eight to Radiology, seven Anaesthetic Registrars, three Psychiatry, one Microbiology Registrar and one Der-matology Registrar. The Board of Management also appoints annually a Junior Resident Dental Officer and a Resident Dental Registrar for a period of 12 months. All of these positions may include rotations to Victorian suburban and country Hospitals and to New Guinea. For further information, Graduates should direct their enquiries to the Director of Medical Services, The Royal Melbourne Hospital, Post Office, 3050.

The Sister Superior of St Vincent's Hospital will appoint for 1978 some 35 Interns for one year. In addition, she will also appoint 30 Junior Resident Medical Officers (second year graduates), 11 Senior Resident Medical Officers (third year graduates), 13 General Medical Registrars, 8 General Surgical Registrars and Registrar positions in the various specialties as follows:—Cardiology (2), Community Medicine (1), Der-matology (1 ), Psychiatry (3), Renal Medicine (1 ), Anatomical Pathology (2), Haematology (2), Micros ology (1 ), Radiology (5), Cardiothoracic Surgery (1), Neurosurgery (1), Orthopaedic Surgery (2), Plastic Surgery (1), Neurology (1), Anaesthetics (8) and Rehabilitation Medicine (1), and appointments will be for 52 weeks.

The Board of Management of Austin Hospital, Heidelberg, makes annual appointments of medical graduates. The current establishment provides for 24 Interns (first-year graduates), 22 Residential Medical Officers (second-year graduates), 18 Senior Resident Medical Officers (third-year graduates), 2 Medical Registrars, 7 Surgical Registrars, and Regis-trars in special departments—Anaesthetics (8), Radiology (4), Psychiatry (4), Orthopadeics (2), Anatomical Pathology (2), Paediatrics (2), Bio-chemistry, Haematology, Cardiology, Clinical Pharmacology and Therra-peutics, Dermatology, Gastroenterology, Gynaecology, Haematology (Clinical), Neurology, Renal Medicine, Cardiothoracic Surgery, Micro-biology, Endocrinology, Spinal Unit.

The Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg, makes annual appoint-ments of medical graduates. The current estabiishment provides for 12 Interns (first-year graduates), 9 Junior Resident Medical Officers (second-year graduates), 9 Senior Resident Medical Officers (third-year graduates), 10 Medical Registrars, 10 Surgical Registrars, and the

75

Faculty of Medicine

following Registrars in special units or departments—Thoracic Medicine Research, Thoracic Medicine (2), Gastroenterology, Renal Medicine, Renal and Metabolic Research, Oncology, Nuclear Medicine, Psychiatry (4), E.N.T., Ophthalmic Surgery, Plastic Surgery, Urology, Anaesthesia, Radiology, Biochemistry, Haematology, Histopathology and Cytology.

In all these appointments the Hospital Boards will take into consideration:

Training in their own hospital. The position of graduates in the honour list. General character and disposition as shown during their course.

The Hospital Boards, however, may also take cognizance of other matters.

The Management of the following hospitals also appoint Junior Resident Medical Officers:

Metropolitan Hospitals: Alfred Hospital, Austin Hospital, Prince Henry's Hospital, Queen Victoria Memorial Hospital, Fairfield Hos-pital, Footscray and District Hospital, Box Hill and District Hospital, Preston and Northcote Community Hospital, Sandringham Hospital, Southern Memorial Hospital, and Williamstown and District General Hospital, Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg. Base Hospitals: Ballarat, Bendigo, Geelong, Mildura, Gippsland (Sale), Glenelg (Hamilton), Mooroopna, Wangaratta, Warrnambool, Wimmera (Horsham). District Hospitals: Latrobe Valley (Yallourn) and Central Gippsland (Traralgon), Swan Hill, West Gippsland (Warragu.l). Echuca and Dandenong.

For advice on appointments to Base and District Hospitals the Hospitals and Charities Commission should be consulted. Vacancies for similar positions in Western Australia and Tasmania occur. Non-metropolitan towns in South Australia, New South Wales and Queensland frequently advertise for Junior Residents.

COMMONWEALTH MEDICAL ADVISORY BUREAU

Medical graduates intending to visit the United Kingdom for postgraduate study or other purposes are advised that the Council of the British Medi-cai Association has established a Commonwealth Medical Advisory Bureau with a view to providing a personal advisory service to prac-titioners, particularly those from Commonwealth countries. Further particulars may be obtained direct from Dr R. A. Pallister, Medical Director. Commonwealth Medical Advisory Bureau, B.M.A. House, Tavi-stock Square, London, W.C.1, or from the Secretary, Australian Medical Association, Victorian Branch, 293 Royal Parade, Parkville, Vic. 3052.

REGISTRATION IN THE UNITED KINGDOM

Medical graduates who intend going to the United Kingdom are warned that, under the Medical Act, 1950, full registration In Great Britain re-quires satisfactory service in Medicine (6 months) and in Surgery (6 months) as a house surgeon in an approved hospital subsequent to gradua-tion. Graduates are strongly advised to consult the Secretary, Australian Medi-cal Association. Victorian Branch, 293 Royal Parade, Parkville, Vic. 3052, or the Director, Melbourne Medical Postgraduate Committee, 394 Albert Street, East Melbourne, Vic. 3002, before making plans to go abroad.

76

CHAPTER 7

REGULATIONS REGULATION 3.34—PRELIMINARY EXAMINATION FOR STUDENTS IN MEDICINE

Regulation 3.34, concerning a preliminary course in Medicine, was repealed in 1961 and its provisions incorporated in Regulation 3.35.

REGULATION 3.35—DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF MEDICINE AND BACHELOR OF SURGERY

1. A candidate for the degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery shall, after matriculating, pursue his studies for not less than six years, attend such lectures and classes and perform such practical work and pass such examinations as may be prescribed.

2. No candidate shall be admitted to the course for the degrees of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery unless, subject to dispensation by the Professorial Board in special cases, he has: (i) at one sitting at the higher school certificate examination obtained

Grade D or higher in four subjects at no more than two attempts; and

(ii) at the higher school certificate examination obtained Grade D or higher in English, Chemistry and one of Physics, Biology or a branch of Mathematics.

3. The subjects of the course for the degrees and the conditions on which such subjects may be taken shall be as prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published with the details of subjects.

4. (1) To pass a Year of the course, a candidate shall comply with one of the following conditions:

(a) he shall pass at the examinations in or obtain credit for each subject of that Year; or

(b) he shall be passed by the faculty in the Year of the course as a whole. In awarding such pass, the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects in accordance with principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the Year as a whole who has not passed at the examination in, or obtained credit for, any particular subject shall not be recorded as having passed in that subject.

(2) (a) Except where otherwise provided or where special permis-sion Is given by the faculty, a student shall pass one year of the course in accordance with the preceding sub-sections before being allowed to proceed to the succeeding year of the course.

(b) Provided that where in the details of subjects it is prescribed that any subject shall rank as a single subject which may be passed separately a candidate who fails in the examination in that subject only may be permitted by the faculty of Medicine in Its absolute discretion to proceed with the work of the next succeeding year in such manner and subject to such conditions as may be prescribed.

77

Faculty of Medicine

(3) A candidate who has not passed a Year of the course in accor-dance with sub-section (1) hereof must repeat the whole of that Year of the course unless special permission to do otherwise is granted by faculty. (4) In the third year of the course a student shall pass at the examina-tions in Anatomy, Physiology and Biochemistry before proceeding with the subjects of Pathology and Microbiology unless special permission to do otherwise is granted by faculty.

5. (i) The examinations in Medicine shall be conducted by a board of examiners of which the James Stewart Professor of Medicine shall be a member and act as chairman.

(ii) The examinations in Surgery shall be conducted by a board of examiners of which the James Stewart Professor of Surgery shall be a member and act as chairman.

(iii) The examinations in Obstetrics and Gynaecology shall be conduc-ted by a board of examiners of which the Dunbar Hooper Pro-fessor of Obstetrics and Gynaecology shall be a member and act as chairman.

(iv) The other members of each of the said boards of examiners shall be as many as the Council may from time to time determine.

(v) There shall be prepared class lists in each of the subjects Medi-cine (including Clinical Medicine), Surgery (including Clinical Surgery) and Obstetrics and Gynaecology. The faculty of Medi-cine shall determine the number of marks to be assigned to each subject and the standards for classes.

6. Provision may be made in the details of subjects with respect to the mode of examination to be adopted in any subject and where prac-tical examinations are prescribed the Council after report from the faculty of Medicine may appoint assessors to assist the examiners.

7. Unless otherwise provided, a candidate who fails to pass any subject or subjects may at the discretion of the faculty of Medicine on the unanimous recommendation of the board of examiners be required to give further evidence before re-examination of having attended such further instruction or having performed such further practical work as the faculty may direct.

8. Hospital work shall be as prescribed by details of subjects or announcements published by the faculty of Medicine and subject to any such provisions by announcements made at the recognized hospitals and shall not be subject to statutes and regulations governing University terms and vacations.

9. The faculty of Medicine may require attendance at any lectures or demonstrations or the performance of any practical work prescribed in the details of subjects during such part of any vacation as it may deem fit.

10. Candidates who have passed all the prescribed examinations and fulfilled all the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degrees of bachelor of. Medicine and bachelor of Surgery.

11. Where pursuant to regulations subsequently repealed or amended a candidate has obtained credit or may retain credit in the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery, the faculty may determine in what further subjects he must pass in order to obtain the degree; and, notwithstanding anything to the contrary, the faculty may ex-empt him from such subjects of the course as are in its opinion the

78

Regulations

substantial equivalent of subjects already passed pursuant to the repealed or amended regulations.

REGULATION 3.71—DEGREE OF BACHELOR OF MEDICAL SCIENCE

1. Candidates for the degree of bachelor of Medical Science shall, after completing the third year of the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery, pursue, for not less than one year, a course of advanced studies in either Anatomy, or Biochemistry, or Medical Psychology, or Microbiology, or Pathology, or Pharmacology, or Physiology, or in such other subject as the faculty of Medicine may approve. 2. Before commencing his course, a candidate shall obtain the approval of the faculty of Medicine and of the head of the department in which he proposes to carry out his course, and the head of that department shall with the approval of the faculty prescribe for him the advanced studies to be pursued by him. 3. No candidate shall be admitted to the course unless (a) in the opinion of the faculty of Medicine he has shown special aptitude for his studies in the course for the degrees of bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery and (b) he has been recommended by the head of the department in which his advanced studies are to be carried out as a person fit to carry out such studies. 4. The head of the department in which the candidate proposes to carry out his course of advanced studies may, with the approval of the faculty of Medicine, require the candidate to attend lectures, carry out practical work, and pass an examination in a subject or subjects, or any part or parts of a subject or subjects, related to his course.' 5. A candidate shall submit for examination a detailed report on the advanced studies carried out by him and may be required to pass a written examination or a viva voce examination, or both, concerning the subject of such report. 6. A candidate who has submitted a satisfactory report on his advanced studies and fulfilled all other conditions prescribed for him may be ad-mitted to the degree of bachelor of Medical Science.

REGULATION 3.36—DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MEDICINEt 1. A person may be a candidate for the degree of doctor of Medicine if— (a) he is a bachelor of Medicine and a bachelor of Surgery in the Uni-

versity; or (b) he holds an equivalent degree in some university recognized by the

University.

2. (1 ) A candidate may proceed to the degree of doctor of Medicine—

(a) by submitting a thesis1 or published work satisfactory to the ex-aminers on a subject approved by the faculty as relevant to the theory or practice of Medicine. Such thesis or puЫ ished work must In the opinion of the faculty be a substantial contribution to know-ledge and the outcome of original research by the candidate; or

*Where the prescribed ancillary work Is to be carried out In a department outside the faculty of Medicine the candidate will be subject to any legislation governing that course. tThls regulation is subject to review at the time of going to press and Interested persons should consult the faculty office.

t Three copies must be submitted (see regulation 4.6).

79

Faculty of Medicine

(b) by— (i) passing an examination in

(a) Pathology and Microbiology; and (b) Physiology and Biochemistry and Pharmacology, as pres-

cribed in the details of subjects; and

(ii) submitting a written dissertation satisfactory to the examiners upon a subject approved by the faculty, or passing a written examination In a subject pertaining to a field in medicine specified by the faculty.

(2) A candidate shall present himself for such oral or other examination on the subject of the thesis, published work, dissertation, or written ex-amination referred to in sub-section (i) of this section as the examiners may require. 3. (1) A candidate shall not be admitted to the examination referred to in section 2(1 ) (b) (i) unless he be a graduate in Medicine and Surgery of at least one year's standing. (2) A candidate shall not be permitted to submit a thesis or a disserta-tion unless he be a graduate in Medicine and Surgery of at least two years standing. 4. At least one of the examiners of a thesis, published work, disserta-tion, or written examination referred to in section 2(1) hereof shall be an external examiner. Before such examiners are appointed a recommen-dation shall be sought from the head of the department to which the examination pertains. 5. A candidate who has satisfied the examiners as prescribed herein and has otherwise fulfilled the requirements of this regulation may be ad-mined to the degree of doctor of Medicine.

REGULATION 3.37—DEGREE OF MASTER OF SURGERY 1. A candidate for the degree of Master of Surgery shall be a Bachelor of Medicine and a Bachelor of Surgery, or hold an equivalent degree recog-nized by the Professorial Board, pursuant to Regulation 3.3.4. 2. A candidate may proceed to the degree of Master of Surgery by sub-mitting a thesis, or published work, satisfactory to the examiners on a sub-ject in any branch of knowledge in Divisions II, III and IV of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Medicine and Bachelor of Surgery, which is approved by the Faculty as relevant to the theory and practice of surgery. Such thesis or published work must be a substantial contribution to knowledge and the outcome of original research by the candidate. 3. A candidate may not submit his thesis for examination unless: (a) he has a Bachelor of Medicine and a Bachelor of Surgery degree of

not less than six years' standing; (b) the subject of the thesis has been approved by Faculty; (c) he satisfies the Faculty that he has had adequate training in

general surgery or in any of its specialties as judged by a scrutiny of his study. experience and competence.

4. A candidate shall present himself for such oral or other examination on the subject of the thesis or published work as the examiners may require.

5. At least one of the examiners of the thesis or published work shall be an external examiner.

80

Regulations

8. A candidate who has fulfilled the requirements of the regulation and has been passed by the examiners may be admitted to the degree of Master of Surgery.

REGULATION 3.38—DEGREE OF MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS

1. Candidates for the degree of master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics must be bachelors of Medicine and bachelors of Surgery in the University or in some other university recognized by it. 2. Candidates shall not be admitted to part i of the examination unless they are bachelors of Medicine and bachelors of Surgery of at least two years standing and unless they have two years' experience as a resident medical officer in a general hospital. Provided that a candidate who has spent only one year as a resident medical officer in e general hospital may be approved as a candidate for part I if, in addition, he has also spent one year as a resident medical officer in a special paediatric hospital.

3. Candidates shall not be admitted to part it of the examination or be permitted to present a thesis unless they are bachelors of Medicine and bachelors of Surgery of at least five years' standing, at least two years of which have been spent in obstetrical and gynaecological training of a type approved by the faculty of Medicine, and as prescribed in details of sub-jects.

4. Candidates may proceed to the degree of master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics either by examination only, or by examination and thesis: Provided that the examiners of the thesis may allow any candidate to proceed by presentation of a thesis only. Candidates proceeding by thesis only must first satisfy the requirements as to general and special experi-ence specified in sections 2 and 3. A thesis must relate to the theory or practice or both of Gynaecology and Obstetrics or Gynaecology or Obstetrics and must be a substantial contribution to knowledge and the outcome of original research by the candidate.

5. The examination for the degree of master of Gynaecology and Ob-stetrics shall consist of two parts—

Part I—Anatomy Embryology and Histology Physiology and Biochemistry

Part II—Pathology and Microbiology in relation to Gynaecology and Ob-stetrics Obstetrics, including neo-natal Paediatrics and Gynaecology.

6. The two parts may be taken concurrently but no candidate shall re-ceive credit for part I1 at any examination unless at that or some previous examination he has passed in part I.

7. The examination iп part 1 shall be partly written and partly oral. The examination in part Il shall be written, clinical and oral, but In Pathology and Microbiology the examination shall be written and oral and there shall be a practical test.

8. A candidate proceeding by examination and thesis shall submit the thesis or published work for approval by the faculty of Medicine as relevant to the theory or practice or both of Gynaecology and Obstetrics

81

Faculty of Medicine

or Gynaecology or Obstetrics. If the thesis gives evidence of research and ability satisfactory to the examiners, the candidate shall be exempted from such part of the written examination as the examiners of the thesis shall determine.

9. In every appointment of examiners for part II at least one examiner shall be an external examiner.

10. Candidates who have satisfied the examiners as herein prescribed and have fulfilled all other prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of master of Gynaecology and Obstetrics.

REGULATION 3.39 DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC HEALTH

(The course and examination for this diploma are temporarily suspended. The text of the regulation was last printed in the Calendar for 1956.)

REGULATION 3.40 OTHER POSTGRADUATE MEDICAL DIPLOMAS

1. There shall be post-graduate medical diplomas in various specialties as follows— Diploma in Ophthalmology Diploma in Therapeutic Radiology Diploma in Anaesthetics

2. Every candidate for a diploma shall be a bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery in the University or in some other university recog-nized by it for the purpose of the diploma or, being resident in Victoria or coming to the University for a prescribed period of study, shall possess a qualification entitling him to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner In the State of Victoria.1 З . (1) The examination for each diploma shall be in two parts.

(2) The subjects of each part and the syllabus of each subject shall be as prescribed and published annually in the details of subjects.

4. Examinations in each part shall be held twice in each year if can-didates present themselves. Examinations in part I shall be held about the end of February and about the beginning of third term and examinations in part Il about the beginning of the first term and during October.

5. Before presenting for part I a candidate shall present evidence that he has been in practice for at least two years, one of which must have been spent in a resident appointment in a general hospital.

6. (1) Before presenting for part I1 a candidate shall pass in part I and shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that(a) he has been in practice for at least five years; and (b) subsequent to graduation he has had—

training in general medicine and surgery in a general hospital, and

(ii) special training in a hospital or hospitals (including the appropriate special clinics of a general hospital) con-cerned with the appropriate specialty as prescribed by the faculty.

Degrees of other universities may be recognized for purposes of candidature for these diplo-mas, but in accordance with the normal policy of the University such graduates will be allowed to proceed to e Melbourne diploma only if they reside in Victoria or come to the University for a period of study.

(i)

82

Regulations

(2) The general nature and duration of the training required for each diploma shall be determined from time to time by the faculty and published each year in the details of subjects.

7. Repealed.

8. The faculty may on application grant a candidate total or partial exemption from examination in any subject the content of which is substantially the same as that of a subject previously passed by the can-didate for a higher degree or another postgraduate diploma in this Uni-versity.

9. Candidates who have passed in both parts of the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the appropriate diploma.

10. Subject to section 2 but notwithstanding any other provision in this regulation a diploma may be awarded to a candidate who has not less than ten years standing as a medical graduate and who has been associated, in a manner approved by the faculty, with the practice of the appropriate specialty for not less than five years as a member of the staff of an approved hospital: Provided that— (a) an application for admission to candidature under this section shall

be made to the Registrar in writing accompanied by a statement defining precisely the applicant's experience in the appropriate specialty;

(b) an approved candidate shall submit to the Registrar three printed copies of a thesis or puЫ ished work dealing with some aspect of the appropriate specialty;

(c) the thesis or work shall be examined as provided in regulation 4.8 for the examination of theses for higher degrees;

(d) the examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed unless they are satisfied that the thesis submitted makes an original and substantial contribution to knowledge of the appropriate specialty;

(e) if the candidate does not pass this examination the faculty may on the recommendation of the examiners prescribe what further ex-amination the candidate shall be required to pass to obtain the diploma.

REGULATION 3.40А —DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE

1. A candidate for the diploma in Psychological Medicine shall be a bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery in the University or the holder of degrees or diplomas considered by the faculty to be their equivalent for the purpose of the diploma or, being resident in Victoria, or coming to the University for a prescribed period of study, shall possess a qualification entitling him to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner in the State of Victoria.

2. Each candidate shall pursue a course of study as may be prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Medicine and puЫ ished in the details of subjects.

3. The examination for the diploma shall be in two parts— Part I—Anatomy '

Physiology and Pharmacology Medical Psychology

83

Faculty of Medicine

Part II—General Medicine and Neurology Psychiatry

The syllabus of each subject of examination shall be prescribed annually in the details of subjects.

4. Examinations in each part shall be held twice in each year If candidates present themselves. Examinations in Part I shall be held in February and August and examinations in Part II in March and Sep-tember.

5. Before presenting for Part I a candidate shall present evidence that he has spent at least one year in a resident medical appointment In a general hospital during which he has had the equivalent of four months' experience in each of In-patient Medicine and Surgery.

6. Before presenting for Part 11 a candidate shall pass in Part I and shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that— (a) he has been in practice for at least four years; (b) he has had special training in appropriate hospitals or units.

The general nature and duration of the special training required shall be determined by the faculty of Mед iс iпе and published each year in the details of subjects.

7. Candidates who have passed In both parts of the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma.

8. Subject to section 1 but notwithstanding any other provision in this regulation a diploma may be awarded to a candidate who is a medical graduate of not less than ten years standing and who has been associated, in a manner approved by the faculty, with the practice of Psychiatry as a specialty for not less than five years as a member of the staff of an approved hospital: Provided that— (а ) an application for admission to candidature under this section

shall be made to the Registrar in writing accompanied by a statement defining precisely the applicant's experience In the specialty;

(b) an approved candidate shall submit to the Registrar three printed copies of a thesis or published work dealing with some aspect of the specialty;

(c) the thesis or work shall be examined as provided in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees;

(d) the examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed unless they are satisfied that the thesis submitted makes an original and substantial contribution to the knowledge of the specialty;

(e) if the candidate does not pass this examination the faculty may on the recommendation of the examiners prescribe what further examination the candidate shall be required to pass to obtain the diploma.

REGULATION 3.40В —DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY 1. A candidate for the diploma in Diagnostic Radiology shall be a

bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery in the University or in some other University recognized by it for the purpose of the diploma or, being resident in Victoria, or coming to the University for a prescribed period of study, shall possess a qualification entitling him to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner in the State of Victoria.

84

Regulations

2. Each candidate shall pursue for not less than three years a course of study and training as may be prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Medicine and published in the details of subjects.

3. The subjects of examination and the syllabus of each subject of examination shall be as prescribed and published annually in the details of subjects.

4. The examination for the diploma shall be conducted twice in each year, about March and October, if candidates present themselves.

5. Before enrolling for the course a candidate shall present evidence that—

(a) he has spent at least two years in a resident medical appointment in a general hospital, or its equivalent, during which time he has had four months' experience in each of general Medicine and Surgery, or the equivalent of such experience;

(b) he holds a full-time appointment in a department of Diagnostic Radiology in a hospital approved for the purpose by the faculty.

6. Before presenting for the examination a candidate shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that—

(a) he has completed satisfactorily the course of study and training as prescribed in the details of subjects;

(b) he has passed examinations in Anatomy and Physics, approved for the purpose by the faculty.

7. Candidates who have passed the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma.

REGULATION á.40C—DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY

1. A candidate for the diploma in Laryngology and Otology shall be a bachelor of Medicine and bachelor of Surgery in the University or In some other University recognized by it for the purpose of the diploma or, being resident in Victoria, or coming to the University for a pre-scribed period, of study, shall possess a qualification entitling him to registration as a legally qualified medical practitioner in the State of Victoria.

2. Each candidate shall pursue a course of study as may be pre-scribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommenda-tion of the faculty of Medicine and published with the details of sub-jects.

З . (1) The examination for the diploma shall be in two parts, Part I and Part II.

(2) The subjects of each part and the syllabus of each examin-ation shall be prescribed and published annually in the details of subjects.

4. Examinations in each part shall be held twice in each year if candidates present themselves. Examinations in Part I shall be held about the end of February and about the beginning of third term and examinations In Part il about the beginning of the first term and during October.

5. Before presenting for Part 1 a candidate shall present evidence that he has been In practice in a general hospital or its equivalent for at least two years.

85

Faculty of Medicine

6. Before presenting for Part II a candidate shall pass in Part 1 and shall satisfy the faculty of Medicine that—

( а ) he has been in practice for at least five years; (b) subsequent to graduation he has had training in general medicine

and surgery for two years in a general hospital or its equivalent; (c) in addition to any training received pursuant to paragraph (b),

he has had three years' special training, as prescribed in the details of subjects, in a hospital or hospitals concerned with the specialty (including the appropriate special clinics of a general hospital).

7. The faculty may on application grant a candidate total or partial exemption from examination in any subject the content of which is sub-stantially the same as that of a subject previously passed by the candidate as a candidate for a higher degree or another postgraduate diploma in the University.

8. Candidates who have passed in both parts of the examination and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma.

9. Subject to section 1 but notwithstanding any other provision in this regulation a diploma may be awarded to a candidate who is a medical graduate of not less than ten years standing and who has been associated, in manner approved by the faculty, with the practice of Otolaryngology as a specialty for not less than five years as a member of the staff of an approved hospital: Provided that—

(a) an application for admission to candidature under this section shall be made to the Registrar in writing accompanied by a statement defining precisely the applicant's experience in the specialty;

(b) the faculty shall be satisfied that the applicant has had adequate training in Otolaryngology as judged after an assessment of his formal training experience and competence;

(c) an approved candidate shall submit to the Registrar three printed copies of a thesis or published work dealing with some aspect of the specialty;

(d) the thesis or work shall be examined as provided in Regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees;

(e) the examiners shall not certify that a candidate has passed unless they are satisfied that the thesis submitted makes a substantial contribution to the knowledge of the specialty;

(f) if the candidate does not pass this examination the faculty may on the recommendation of the examiners prescribe what further examination the candidate shall be required to pass to obtain the diploma.

REGULATION 3.80—DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY

1. A candidate for the diploma in Audiology shall be a graduate who satisfies the faculty of Medicine (hereinafter called "the faculty") that he has adequate scientific training.

2. (1) Before commencing the course, each candidate must obtain the approval of the body of the faculty for his candidature.

86

Regulations

(2) For each applicant the faculty may prescribe appropriate pre-liminary courses of study and examinations which the applicant must complete before he can be accepted as a candidate for the diploma in Audiology.

З . After being accepted a candidate shall pursue for at least one year a course of advanced study, attend lectures and classes and under-take practical work as may be prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty and published in the details of subjects.

4. The faculty may exempt a candidate from such examinations as are in its opinion the substantial equivalent of examinations already passed by the candidate.

5. Candidates who have passed the examinations prescribed by the faculty and who have otherwise fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be granted the diploma in Audiology.

87

CHAPTER 8

DETAILS FOR 1978

DEGREES OF M.B., B.S.

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

MATRICULATION

Students qualified to do so must sign the Matriculation Roll in accordance with instructions given in the Students' Information Booklet. Those who have satisfied University entrance requirements but who are not qualified to matriculate through being under age may apply for the consent of the Faculty of Medicine to enrol for First Year.

PREREQUISITES

In addition to being qualified to matriculate, students must satisfy the following prerequisites: (a) pass the Higher School Certificate examination by passing in four

subjects at the one examination at not more than two attempts; (b) pass or obtain honours at the Higher School Certificate examination

in English. Chemistry and in either Physics, a branch of Mathematics or Biology.

As provided in the Regulation, dispensation from these prerequisites may be granted in special cases. Applications for any such dispensations, accompanied by details of special circumstances, must be lodged with the secretary, faculty of Medicine, before the closing date for applications.

ADMISSION TO THE FIRST YEAR

Since the beginning of 1956, the number of students admitted to the course in medicine has been restricted. The quota for 1978 is 220. The basis of selection is academic merit judged by reference to the Higher School Certificate examination. See further details concerning admission in Chapter 4.

ATTENDANCE AT LECTURES, DEMONSTRATIONS AND PRACTICAL WORK

Attendance at lectures is not compulsory except for students in the First Year. However, attendances at demonstrations, practical work and clinical instruction are compulsory for students in all years of the course and, in addition, competent performance in carrying out the duties and work pres-cribed in all subjects is required. Failure to comply with these require-ments may lead to disqualification from presenting at examinations. Stu-dents so disqualified will usually be notified in writing by the faculty of Medicine, but the faculty is not bound to give such notification. Students prevented by illness or other serious cause from satisfying attendance requirements should report their absences to the secretary, faculty of Medicine, so that dispensation may be granted by the faculty, if necessary.

88

Faculty of Medicine

The provisions in the details and time-table as to the number of lectures, tutorials, etc., and the hours of practical work are included for general guidance only, and may be modified by the faculty without notice If the necessity arises.

VACATION STUDY

Students are expected to use a considerable part of the vacations for read-ing and study purposes. In some cases specific references are made in the following details; In others a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice-boards; in all cases of doubt the lecturers con-cerned should be consulted.

HONOUR WORK

Except in subjects where special details are published, the syllabus for Honours will be the same as that for Pass, but the Examination for Honours will require the candidates to attain a higher standard and to show more detailed knowledge.

YEARS, SUBJECTS AND EXAMINATION

Years

Subjects for Examination

Times of Examination

First

610-006 CHEMISTRY 640-007 PHYSICS 800-004 BIOLOGY 600-101 MEDICAL STUDIES 1

Second 618-021 ANATOMY including Histology and Embryology

538-021 PHYSIOLOGY 521-021 BIOCHEMISTRY

Third 518-031 ANATOMY Including Histology and Embryology

638-031 PHYSIOLOGY Including Pharmacology

621-031 BIOCHEMISTRY

600-301 MEDICAL STUDIES I1 631-031 PATHOLOGY 634-031 PHARMACOLOGY 526-032 MICROBIOLOGY

Incl. IMMUNOLOGY

Fourth

500-491 MEDICINE 500.492 SURGERY

Fifth

598-051 FORENSIC MEDICINE Including Nature and Function of Law Insanity Medical Ethics

Annual examination at end of year. Terminal tests may be held.

Annual examination at end of year. Terminal tests may be held.

Annual examination to be held at the end of First Term of Third Year.

Annual examination to be held at the end of Third Year. Pharmacology will also be ex-amined at the end of First Term.

89

Faculty of Medicine

Sixth 500-691 MEDICINE incl. PAEDIATRICS and PSYCHIATRY

including General Medicine Therapeutics and Materia Medica Paediatrics Medical Psychology and

Clinical Psychiatry Ophthalmology Dermatology Vaccination Epidemic Diseases Radiology Venereal Diseases Social Medicine

500-692 SURGERY including General Surgery Surgical Anatomy Anaesthetics Radiology Diseases of Throat, Nose

and Ear Venereal Diseases Paediatrics

500-693 OBSTETRICS and GYNAECOLOGY

Clinical Examinations to be held during Sixth Year. Annual written Examination at the end of Sixth Year, and Supplementary Examinations early in the Seventh Year.

EXAMINATIONS Apart from the final M.B., B.S. examination, there are no supplementary examinations. At all examinations during the course certain students may be required to present for extra tests during the examination period. Students should consult departmental and clinical school notice-boards for information about examinations. Students will be admitted to the final M.B., B.S. supplementary examina-tion only on the recommendation of the Chairmen of the Boards of Examiners.

SPECIAL CONSIDERATION AND SPECIAL EXAMINATIONS If your studies during the year have been affected by illness or other serious causes, apply in writing for special consideration, together with a medical certificate, to the Registrar before the commencement of the examination period. If you cannot sit for an examination because of illness or other serious cause notify the Registrar in writing, with a medical certificate or other evidence, immediately. If you become ill during an examination, see the Supervisor and notify the Registrar in writing immediately.

REPETITION OF YEARS AND SUSPENSION FOR UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS In accordance with R 2.5, students who fail in the First Year examination may repeat the year only if permitted to do so and if re-selected in the

90

Degrees of M.B., B.S.

quota. Those who fail in the First Year examination twice, and those who, at their first attempt, perform in a manner considered to be unsatisfactory or who are absent from the examination without an acceptable excuse, may be suspended from the course. Similarly students who fail in the Second or Third Year examinations may repeat the year only If permitted to do so. Those who fail in these examinations twice, and those who, at their first attempt, perform in a manner considered to be unsatisfactory or who are absent from the exam-inations without an acceptable excuse, may be suspended from the course. Normally there are no restrictions upon repetition of Fourth. Fifth and Sixth Years, but disciplinary action may be taken in cases of unsatis-factory progress. Repetition of a year involves repetition of all attendances and other re-quirements in all subjects.

91

M Tu W Th BIOLOGY

CHEMISTRY

PHY5ICS

MEDICAL STUDIES I-Biostatistics Community Health Embryology Human Growth and

Development Human Behaviour Tutorials

910• 912 9-10•

11-12• 2-5• 11-12• 2-5•

12-1b 12-1b 2-5•

10-11e 9-12• 10-11e

6.30- 2-5• 9.30 •

9-10r

9-1 ) 9-101

11-12m

12-1g 2-3• 3-4 •

12-1e

10-11g

9-10k 9-101

10-110 11-12Р

2-3 • 3-4 2-3 •

F

9-1 Od 10-1 • 2-5 •

9-10h 9-10f

10-11• 11-12•

Faculty of Medicine

Timetable for 1978

FIRST YEAR Term I March 6 to May 13 Term II June 5 to August 12 Term Ill September 4 to October 21

WEEKS QUOTED ARE WEEKS OF THE YEAR: i.e. Week 1 is the week beginning January 3.

NOTES: (a) Biology lectures will be held at 9 to 10 or 11 to 12. Students should consult departmental

noticeboards for complete details. The first lecture will be held at 11 to 12 on Monday. March 7. (b) All Year (c) Weeks 23 to 32 ł 36 ł 35 to 41 (d) Weeks 10 to 18 ł 22 (e) All Year

(g) ł 25 ł 26

Weeks 13 to 19 (g) (h) Weeks 23, 24 + 25 (i) Weeks 36 to 40 (1) Weeks 24 to 29 ł 40 to 42 (k) Weeks 23 to 28 ł 40 to 42 (I) Weeks 10 to 14 (m) Weeks 18, 19 ł 23 + 36 to 37 (n) All Year (o) Weeks 10 to 12 (p) Weeks 17, 18 + 23 + 36 to 39

• Alternative Times. Notices will be placed on departmental noticeboards Informing students which period they should attend.

This time-table is subject to alteration and the locations of lectures have still to be tlnslized; consult notice-boards during Orientation Week.

92

Th F

10-11 11-51

9-10 11-51

9-10 10-51

10-51

8.45- 10.45 •

12-1

9.30- 11.303

M

Tu, W

ANATOMY—including Histology and Embryology

PHYSIOLOGY—Lectures Practical Class Hospital

Demonstrations

BIOCHEMISTRY—Lectures Practical Class

Tutorials and Discussion Groups

12-1 12-12 2-3 3-42

(Practical Work throughout the

year)


Timetable for 1978

SECOND YEAR Term 1 February 20 to May 13 Term il June 5 to August 5 Term III August 28 to October 21

1Pract1cal Cl в ssе s In Physiology and Biochemistry are held In alternate weeks. 'Students should consult departmental noticeboards for details. .. sTime shared with Physiology; see departmental notice board. •Five sessions during Terms I1 and Iii; see departmental notice board. Timetable subject to alteration and locations for lectures still to be finalized. See departmental notice boards during Orientation Week.

93

M F W Tu Th

12-1 2-3

10-12a 35а

9-10 12-1 10-12• 2 4a

PHYSIOLOGY—•• Lectures Hospital

Demonstrations

Practical Class Work Session

BIOCHEMISTRY—•• Lectures Practical Class Nutrition

COMBINED TEACHING SESSION—

Physiology/ Biochemistry

MEDICAL STUDIES II—

i i 5ь

9-10

2-3.30

PHARMACOLOGY-Lectures Practical Class Tutorials

12-1

8.45- 10.45

9-10•

11-12a

12-1 9-10

i 0-1 1 е 2-5d

1 0-1 1 е

ANATOMY—Lectures

Demonstrations Practical Class

10-11

9-10 10-11 11-5b

Faculty of Medicine

Timetable for 1978

THIRD YEAR Term 1 February 20 to April 28

(a) One-quarter of the students attend at each time. (b) Practical classes In Physiology and in Biochemistry are attended by ono-half of the students,

alternating weekly so that each student will attend one Physiology Practical and one Ella chemistry Practical each fortnight.

(c) Nine lectures only. (d) Half of the class attends each week. (e) Half of the class attends either time. •• Three special lectures at times to be arranged on Tuesdays. • Attended by students not attending hospital demonstrations at that time.

Timetable subject to alteration and locations of lectures still to be finalized. See departmental notice boards In Orientation Week.

94

2-З

З -4 4-5'

З -5

З -4'

MICROBIOLOGY—Lectures

Tutorials Practical Class

9-10 12-1

2-5"


Timetable for 1978

THIRD YEAR Term Il June 5 to August 4 Term 'Il August 28 to October 27

M

Tu W Th

MEDICAL STUDIES II— Social Medicine and

Clinical Epidemi-ology

Social Medicine Practical

2-4• Psychiatry—

Lectures Tutorial

2-3

10-12' 10-1 •

9-10 2-3

10-12• 10-1•

10-12' 10-12•

PATHOLOGY—Lectures Tutorials Practical Class Special Class

PHARMACOLOGY—Lectures Tutorials Practical Class

9-10 12-1 10-12' I 10-12' 10-12• I 10-12•

9-10 10-12 10-12'

З -5

12-1' j 12-1'

12-1

10-11

11-12

9-10

• Alternative times. Notices will be displayed on departmental notIceboarde Informing students which period they should attend.

• • Half of class attends each week.

95

еиl a

ipe

о A

3ј n

ae

j

1st 1 Mar. 6 May 13 2 June 5 Aug. 12 3 Sept. 4 Oct. 21

2nd 1 Feb. 20 May 12 2 June 5 Aug. 4 3 Aug. 28 Oct. 20

3rd 1 Feb. 20 April 28 2 June 5 Aug. 4 3 Aug. 28 Oct. 22

4th

Clinical instruction commences in February and continues to December with short vacations during the year. •

5th

Clinical instruction commences in the third week of the year and continues until the end of the 50th week. A two or three week vacation will occur in the middle of the year.•

6th

Clinical instruction commences in the 7th week of the year and continues until the end of the 44th week. A vacation will occur in the middle of the year.•

First Уеа r

Second Уеа r

Third Year

Fourth Уеа r Written

Clinical

Forensic Medicine

Final M.B., B.S. Supplementary Examination

co °' 3. SUMMARY OF PRINCIPAL DATES-1978

Year Terms Lectures

Subjects

Examinations Begin End

Oct. 30

Nov. 6

May 8 Nov. 13

Nov. 20 Nov. 27

• Terms for clinical work may be modified for certain groups of students to suit arrangements within Clinical Schools


4. YEARS, SUBJECTS AND BOOKS

Note—The books marked with an asterisk are essential texts which students should possess.

FIRST YEAR 610-005. CHEMISTRY (MEDICAL COURSE)

A course of 120 hours of lectures and practical work throughout the year; of these approximately 56 will be devoted to the lecture series A preliminary standard equivalent to the Higher School Certificate examination in Chemistry will be assumed. SYLLABUS The course will consist of basic physical chemistry and organic chemistry. The topics treated will form a basis for subsequent study in biochemistry, physiology and pharmacology; where possible illustrative material will be drawn from medical investigations and practice.

PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY

Introduction to Thermodynamics: heat, work, first law. Enthalpy changes in chemical reactions. Use of tabulated enthalpy values.

Chemical Equilibrium: ideal law and real behaviour for gaseous equilib-rium—intermolecular forces and thermodynamic activity. Solution equilibria studied via electrochemical cells. Thermodynamic reversibility, maximum work, Gibbs free energy. Ionic activity, measurement of activity coefficients, pH, sodium and potassium ion activity. Standard free energy of formation. Use of tabulated values. Use of different standard states for biochemical reactions.

Phase Equilibrium: liquid-vapour, osmotic equilibria. Molecular weight measurements for biological macromolecules.

Ionic Solutions: Conductance: analytical applications. Conductance and ionic size. Water and water-solute interactions.

Chemical Kinetics: reaction rates and reaction mechanism. Activation energy. Simple enzyme kinetics. Fast reaction techniques.

ORGANIC CHEMISTRY

Bonding, structure and elementary stereochemistry of carbon compounds. An outline of physical and chemical properties of the major groups of monofunctional compounds In terms of molecular structure and ele-mentary electronic theory. An introduction to the chemistry of carbohy-drates, lipids, proteins and other biologically important macromolecules.

LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week. The experiments will illustrate and extend the physical and organic chemistry lecture courses; some inorganic chemistry experiments of direct relevance to biological processes will also be included. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry Labora-tory of the Redmond Barry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus.

o 97

Faculty of Medicine

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Stranks D R et al Chemistry: A Structural View, MUP

(b) Prescribed textbooks:

Roberts J D Stewart R & Caserio M C Organic Chemistry Methane to Macromolecules, Benjamin 1971.

or Hart H and Schuetz R D Organic Chemistry 4th edition, Houghton Mifflin or Snyder, C H Introduction to Modern Organic Chemistry, Harper & Row

1973 Barrow G M Physical Chemistry for the Life Sciences, McGraw-Hill

1974 O1ver N H Departmental Publications

Experiments in Physical Chemistry 1978 Experiments in Organic Chemistry 1978 Experiments in Inorganic Chemistry 1978

EXAMINATION Terminal tests may be held during the year. The exam-ination will consist of a two-hour written paper in physical chemistry and a two-hour written paper in organic chemistry. Organic Chemistry exam-ination will be held Iate in second term. There is no practical examination but the work of each student is assessed continually throughout the year and the assessment forms a significant proportion of the final examina-tion result.

640-007. PHYSICS (MEDICAL COURSE) A course of three lectures per week throughout the year with laboratory work. A knowledge of Physics to the standard of the Higher School Cer-tificate examination will be assumed.

SYLLABUS Mechanics: A brief review of kinematics and dynamics. Newton's laws. The concept of an equation of motion. Differential equations. Exponential growth of populations. Impulse and momentum. Trauma in accidents. Potential and kinetic energy. Simple harmonic motion. Application to walking. Conditions for equilibrium of rigid bodies. Elastic behaviour of materials—microscopic and macroscopic viewpoints. Bending of beams, ultimate strength, fractures. Hydrostatics and hydro-dynamics. Equation of continuity. Bernoulli's equation. Laminar and turbulent flow. Viscosity. Blood pressure, arteriosclerosis, work done by the heart, diving. Thermal Physics: Basic concepts of thermal physics. Metabolism and energy balance in animals. The body as a heat engine. Scaling laws for metabolism. Energy flow and local entropy decrease. Implications for life processes. Maxwell-Boltzmann distribution law. Electricity and Magnetism: Electric and Magnetic forces. Basic laws of Gauss, Ampere, Faraday and Maxwell. Constitutive laws for conductors (Ohms law) and dielectrics. Potentials. EMF, resistance, D.C. Circuit theory. Biological EMF's, currents, and potentials. Circuit elements—capacitors, resistors, inductors and transformers. A.C. Circuit theory—impedance. Electric power supply—household wiring—electrical safety —electric shock. Electromagnetic waves, properties of their spectrum. Diathermy. Electronics: The transistor and diode. Transistor amplifier. Systems analysis—feedback, stable control, noise and oscillation. Application to biological, thermal, mechanical and electrical systems.

98


Transducers and measurement technology. Operational amplifiers. Elec-tronic medical instruments. Optics: The wave and ray optics of spherical surfaces. The eye, refractive disorders, resolution, acuity, and colour vision. The microscope, illumination, resolving power, dyes, filters, polarizing filters, UV fluorescence. Phase contrast microscopy, electron microscopy. Wave Motion and Acoustics: Wave propagation, reflection, acoustic impedance, Doppler effect; medical applications of ultrasonics; super-position, interference, stationary waves, vibrating systems, forced vibra-tion and resonance; physiological acoustics: the voice, the ear and hearing. Computers: Types, main components, methods of use; applica-tions in medicine. Atomic and Nuclear Physics: Basic facts on structure of matter (brief mention of quantum ideas); atomic processes: thermal radiation and thermography; lasers and their applications in medicine, X-rays and X-ray diagnosis; nuclear processes: energetics, reactions, radioactivity; interaction of radiation with matter; radiation detectors and nuclear diagnostics; biological effects of radiation.

LABORATORY WORK Periods of 3 hours throughout the year in ac-cordance with notices displayed on departmental notice board. Attendance at practical classes is compulsory. The practical work of each student is examined continually during each term. Records of his success In experiment and impressions of his work are kept. This information is taken into account in assessing the results (including the Class List) at the Annual Examination.

BOOKS Recommended for reference:

Holwill M E and Silvester N R Introduction to Biological Physics, Wiley Richards J A Sears F W Wehr M R & Zemansky M W Modern University

Physics, Addison Wesley

Benedek G B and Villars F H M Physics with Illustrative Examples from Medicine and Biology Vols I -III, Addison Wesley

MacDonald S G G & Burns D M Physics for the Life and Health Sciences Addison Wesley

Sears F W Zemansky M W et al University Physics, Addison Wesley Feynman R P Leighton R B & Sands M The Feynman Lectures on

Physics Vol 1, Addison-Wesley Ackerman E Biophysical Science, Prentice-Hall Cromer A H Physics for the Life Sciences, McGraw-Hill

EXAMINATION Three 1%-hours' written papers for pass and honours combined. The work done in each term is examined at the beginning of the following term.

600-004 BIOLOGY (MEDICAL COURSE)

A course of three lectures per week with demonstrations and practical work throughout the year.

SYLLABUS

Cell physiology and cytology: An introductory treatment of the funda-mental properties of cells: Irritability, selective permeability, respiration,

99

Faculty of Medicine

ingestion, synthesis and degradation of metabolically useful substances, excretion, motility. A broad study of cell structure as determined by various techniques as applied to living and dead cells and tissues. A brief functional account of cytological structures involved in synthesis of pro-teins and high energy compounds, storage and transfer of genetic infor-mation, the removal of metabolic wastes, cell ageing and death. This will be followed by a more detailed study of general cytology and the histology and cytology of the epithelia, connective tissues, nervous tis-sue, muscle and the development of bone.

Anatomy: A brief introductory account of human anatomical systems and their physiology will be given. This will be followed by a study of the tissues of the human body and later introductory lectures on the anatomy of the nervous system.

Evolution Genetics and Ecology: A general account of evolution in-cluding the principal mechanisms responsible for speciation, selection, adaptation, races and species, convergence, modern views on fossil hominids and the emergence of man. Elementary account of the evolu-tion or the biosphere and energy sources. Photosynthesis—the energetic basis of life—origin of oxygen. Carbon path. Ecosystems. Ecological pyramids. Pollen grains and allergy. Aerial pollution from allergens in Australia.

LABORATORY WORK Practical laboratory and demonstration periods will be taken in conjunction with various sections of the course. Students will be notified at the beginning of the year when these periods will be held. Students must supply themselves with a half set of human bones. Students should consult the noticeboards throughout the year for further information.

BOOKS Preliminary reading: To be read before the commencement of the course

James R Understanding Medicine, Penguin 1970

For those without HSC Biology—Sections 1, 2, 6, 7, 9, 10, 11 In Bio-logical Science The Web of Life 2nd ed Aust Acad Sci

Prescribed textbooks

•de Beer G Homology An Unsolved Problem Oxford Biology Readers No 11, OUP 1971

•Le Gros Clark W E The Tissues of the Human Body 6th ed Clarendon •Gillie 0 The Living Cell World of Science Library Thames & Hudson Thompson J S and Thompson M W Genetics in Medicine 2nd ed,

Saunders 1973

Prescribed laboratory manual •A геу L B Human Histology 1st or subseq. ed, Saunders 1957

Recommended for reference

Gray's Anatomy Descriptive and Applied 32nd or subsequent ed, Long-man

Jacob S W & Francone C A Structure and Function in Man Saunders 2nd ed 1970

Bloom W and Fawcett D W A Textbook of Histology 10th ed, Saunders 1975

100


Ham A W Histology 7th ed, Lippincott 1974 Hammersen F sobotta/Hammersen Histology, Lea & Fei ger 1976 Bergman R A and Afifi A K Atlas of Microscopic Anatomy, Saunders

1974 Cunningham's Manual of Practical Anatomy 3 vols. 11th or subsequent ed,

OUP Porter K R & Bonneville M A An Introduction to the Fine Structure of

Cells and Tissues, Lea & FebIger 1964

EXAMINATIONS Two written examinations will be held at the con-clusion of the course. Sections of the course may be examined during the year. One Practical examination may be held at the conclusion of the course. Practical examinations may be held at the completion of sections of the work.

500-101. MEDICAL STUDIES 1

COMMUNITY HEALTH

(a) Each student will spend two sessions 'sitting in' with an experienced selected general practitioner. These sessions will be preceded and followed by introductory and explanatory seminars and will occur as early in first year as can be arranged. (b) Ten lectures will be given on aspects of Australian society with special reference to concepts of social class, social groups and the influence of custom and culture upon the pattern of disease seen in communities.


Suser M W and Watson W Sociology in Medicine, OUP 1972 Bloom S W The Doctor and His Patient, Free 1965 Brown D D The Wind and the Book, MUP 1976

EXAMINATION Community Health will form part of a three-hour written paper at the end of the year. Assessments by general practitioners of their attached students will contribute to the final marks for the subject.

HUMAN GROWTH and DEVELOPMENT

SYLLABUS (a) Post-natal growth and development. A course of lectures during which the following will be discussed. Nature of growth. Physical growth. Measurement. Height. Weight. Body proportions. Percentile charts. Velocity curves. Growth of different tissues. Cell multiplication and cell hypertrophy. Changes in body composition. Catch up growth. Factors affecting growth—genetic, nutritional, endocrine. Changes at puberty. Nutritional needs. Calories. Protein. Fat. Carbohydrate. Minerals. Vitamins. Constituents of various foods. The effect of nutritional deficiency and malnutrition. Undernutrition. Starvation. Obesity. Maturation and develop-ment: emotional growth and intellectual growth—the role of the family: the effect of deprivation: development of behaviour in childhood.

(b) Embryology. Development of the human embryo to the stage of organ formation. Developmental processes, gene action, role of the nucleus and nucleo-cytoplasmic relationships, molecular mechanisms, determination and induction, movement and contact of embryonic cells. Placentation. Development of the heart and blood vessels.

101

Faculty of Medicine

BOOKS Prescribed textbooks:

Sinclair D Human Growth after Birth OUP 1969 McLaren D S Nutrition and its Disorders Churchill Livingstone 1972 Hamilton W J Boyd J D & Mossman H W Human Embryology 4th ed,

Hefter 1972

(b) Recommended for Reference:

Balinsky B I An Introduction to Embryology 2nd or subsequent ed, Saunders

HUMAN BEHAVIOUR

A course of 44 lectures. Demonstrations and tutorials of one hour per week.

SYLLABUS Introduction, including a brief history of Psychology. Intro-duction to methodological and statistical procedures. Psychological de-velopment of the human being from infancy to old age. Motivation and Personality: Review of findings on the nature of motivation, both from a comparative (ethological) and human point of view, extending to a consideration of the nature of human personality. Cognitive processes: Perception, remembering and forgetting, learning, intelligence, language and thinking. Social Psychology: This will cover a consideration of the individual and his social interactions and also discussion of the broad patterns of social and cultural influences in society.

BOOKS Prescribed Textbooks:

•Hilgard E R Atkinson R C and Atkinson R L Introduction to Psychology, 6th ed Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1975

•Lindgren H C An Introduction to Social Psychology, 2nd ed Wiley 1973

Mowbray R M and Rodger T F Psychology in Relation to Medicine, 4th ed, Livingstone 1973

EXAMINATION Two written papers of three hours duration each. One paper will cover the segments on Biostatistics, Community Health, and Human Growth and Development. The second paper will be devoted exclusively to the segment on Human Behaviour (assessment of practical work, essays or projects completed during the year may also be taken into account in determining grades in this segment).

SECOND YEAR 516-021 ANATOMY INCLUDING HISTOLOGY AND EMBRYOLOGY

ANATOMY

A course of lectures, demonstrations and practical work during which the structure and organization of systems of the human body are studied.

PRACTICAL WORK: The human body (with the exception of the central nervous system) is dissected and students are required to study prepared dissections in the Museum. Demonstrations are given on previously pre-pared material and on radiographs. All students should report to the Anatomy Department during the week of February 6-10, 1978. They will

102


then be allotted to groups for dissection and for demonstrations. Stu-dents who do not report will be allotted to groups regardless of personal choice. Students absent from Melbourne during this week should write to the laboratory manager in the Anatomy department informing him of their intended partners before February 10.

HISTOLOGY and EMBRYOLOGY

The course will extend the histological and embryological work of first year. It will consist of lectures, demonstrations and practical work an the structure and development of the cells, tissues, organs and systems of the human body.

ATTENDANCE While attendance at lectures is not compulsory, students are required to attend practical classes and demonstrations.

REQUIREMENTS Students must provide themselves with a set of dissect-ing instruments and a half set of bones. Students are supplied with slides and a microscope by the department, or may provide their own micro-scope. Microscopes supplied by the department are for use within the department only. Students are required to wear white coats in the Dissecting Room.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks:

Cunningham's Manual of Practical Anatomy 3 vols 13th or subsequent ed, OUP

Cunningham Textbook of Anatomy 10th or subsequent ed, OUP Hamilton W J Boyd J D & Mossman H W Human Embryology, Mac-

lilIan 1975 Агеу L B Human Histology 1st or subsequent ed, Saunders

(b) Recommended for Reference:

Grey's Anatomy Descriptive and Applied 32nd or subsequent ed, Longmans Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human Body,

Faber 1965 Hamilton W J Simon G & Hamilton S G Surface and Radiological

Anatomy MacMillan 1975 Patten B M Human Embryology 3rd or subsequent ed, McGraw-Hill Агеу L B Developmental Anatomy 6th or subsequent ed, Saunders Porter & Bonneville Fine Structure of cells and Tissues 3rd or subse-

quent ed, Lea & Fabiger Ham A W Histology 7th ed, Lippincott 1974 Bloom W & Fawcett H D Textbook of Histology 10th ed, Saunders 1975 Junqueira L C Cа rп iе ro J & Contopoulos A Basic Histology, Lange, 1975 Bergman & Afifi Atlas of Microscopic Anatomy, Saunders, 1974

EXAMINATION At the end of the Second Year:

Anatomy (pass only) One 3-hour written paper, oral examination. Histology and Embryology (pass only). One 3-hour written paper, oral examination. Candidates are advised that Honours will be awarded at the examin-ations for 516-031 and will be based on the candidate's performance at the examinations at the end of the second year and at the end of the first term of the third year.

536-021. PHYSIOLOGY SYLLABUS (a) Cellular physiology, the study of the characteristics of

103

Faculty of Medicine

the cells of animal tissues, including properties unique to special cell types such as neurons and muscle fibres, and (b) Systemic mammalian physiology, the study of the activities of tissues and organs subserving the various co-ordinated body functions, such as those constituting the cardiovascular, respiratory, renal and gastro-intestinal systems. Detailed study of the regulatory systems—the nervous and endocrine systems-is delayed until the third year of the new curriculum.

LECTURES Two lectures per week throughout second year. Details of lectures are posted in the Department.

SEMINARS, WORK SESSIONS, DEMONSTRATIONS Held throughout second year. Details of these, of combined teaching sessions by the Departments of Biochemistry and Physiology, and of tutorials in clinical physiology held in the Teaching Hospitals, will be posted in the depart-ment.

LABORATORY CLASSES The student class is divided into two groups. One group attends Physiology when the other attends Biochemistry. The groups alternate on a weekly basis, according to the schedule posted in the Department. Students will require surgical instruments for laboratory work (details on Departmental noticeboard), a white coat, a bound laboratory notebook (A4 size) and a roll of recording paper obtainable from the Department of Physiology. A laboratory manual will be issued by the Department. Enrolment for Laboratory Classes: Students work In pairs and may arrange a partner for laboratory work. All students should report to the Russell Grimwade School of Biochemis-try during the week of February 6-10, 1978. They will then be allotted a group for both Physiology and Biochemistry laboratory work; those who do not report to the Biochemistry Department will be alloted partners. Students who do not report personally during this week may inform the Biochemistry Department in writing of their intended partners before the end of that week. No further enrolment is required in the Physiology Department.

ATTENDANCE See Regulation 3.35 in Chapter 7, of this Handbook.

STUDENT ASSESSMENT To be based on a mid-year examination (1% hours) and an end of year examination (3 hours), and assign-ments related to the content of the course.

BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading:

Vander A J Sherman J H & Luciano D S Human Physiology—Mech- anisms of Body Function, McGraw-Hill 2nd ed, 1975

(b) General references and monographs:

Best C H and Brobeck J R Best and Taylor's Physiological Basis of Medical Practice, 9th ed Williams & Wilkins 1973

Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics 20th ed, Saunders 1974

Mountcastle V B ed Medical Physiology 13th ed, Mosby St Louis 1973 Wright S K е ele C A and Neil E Applied Physiology, 12th ed, OUP, 1971 Guyton A C Textbook of Medical Physiology, 5th ed, Saunders, 1976 Campbell E J M Dickinson C J & Slater J D H Clinical Physiology

4th ed, Blackwell, 1976

104


Rushmer R F Cardiovascular Dynamics, 4th ed, 1976 Berne R M and Levy M N Cardiovascular Physiology, 3rd ed, Mosby,

1977 Davenport H W Physiology of the Digestive Tract An Introductory Text,

4th ed, Year Bk Med Pub , 1977 Katz B Nerve Muscle and Synapse, McGraw-Hill, 1966 Ganong W F Review of Medical Physiology 7th ed, Lange Los Altos,

1975 West J B Respiratory Physiology the Essentials, Williams & Wilkins,

1974 Vander A J Renal Physiology, McGraw-Hill, 1975

521-021. BIOCHEMISTRY

SYLLABUS Living tissues are considered from the point of view of structure-function relationships of their chemical constituents—proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, nucleic acids, and substances of smaller molecular weight. Other topics to be considered are: enzyme catalysis and kinetics, the generation and dissipation of ATP, the principal metabolic pathways, their integration and cellular control, the genetic code, nucleic acid and protein synthesis, feedback regulation of metabolism including induction and repression of protein synthesis and the biochemistry of specialized tissues.

LECTURES Two lectures per week throughout Second year. Details of the lectures will be posted in the Department.

TUTORIALS, SEMINARS, DEMONSTRATIONS These will be held through-out the year during the time allocated for Practical Work. Details of these and of combined teaching sessions with the Departments of Physiology and Anatomy will be posted in the Department.

LABORATORY CLASSES The class is divided into two groups. One group attends Biochemistry for both Thursday and Friday while the other group attends Physiology. The groups alternate on a weekly basis according to a schedule posted in both Departments.

ENROLMENT FOR PRACTICAL WORK All students should report to the Russell Grimwade School of Biochemistry during the week 6th-10th February 1978 when they will be allotted a group for both Physiology and Biochemistry. In the practical work, students work in pairs; on enrolment they may nominate a partner, but if they do not report during enrolment week a partner will be allotted to them. Students who do not report personally during this week may write to the Laboratory Manager, Department of Biochemistry, informing him of their intended partners before 10th February. No further enrolment is required with the Physi-ology Department.

APPARATUS FOR PRACTICAL WORK Apparatus and storage lockers are supplied by the Biochemistry Department. In addition, each student requires a name disc, a laboratory coat and a practical note book (No. З -З A from the University Bookroom is suitable). ATTENDANCE See Regulation 3.35, Chapter 7, of this Handbook.


Lehninger A L Biochemistry 2nd ed, Worth 1975 McGilvery R W Biochemistry A Functional Approach, Saunders 1970

105

Faculty of Medicine

Morris J G A Biologist's Physical Chemistry, Arnold 1968 Stryer L Biochemistry Freeman 1975 Watson J D Molecular Biology of the Gene 3rd ed, Benjamin 1975 White A Handler P & Smith E L Principles of Biochemistry 5th ed,

McGraw-Hill 1973

EXAMINATIONS One mid-year examination of 11/2 hours and an end of year examination of up to 3 hours; viva voce tests as notified by the Department. Students must perform satisfactorily in the practical course to be permitted to sit for the examination in November.

THIRD YEAR

516-031. ANATOMY INCLUDING HISTOLOGY AND EMBRYOLOGY

A course of lectures, demonstrations and practical work on the gross and microscopic structure and development of the nervous system and the organs of special sense; in addition, the surface and radiographic anatomy of the body together with relevant dissected parts are studied.

PRACTICAL WORK The brain and spinal cord are dissected and stu-dents are required to study prepared dissections and histological slides. Demonstrations will be given on dissected material, radiographs and surface anatomy.

ATTENDANCE Attendance at lectures is not compulsory, but students are required to attend practical classes and demonstrations.

REQUIREMENTS Students must provide themselves with a set of dissecting instruments and half set of bones. Students are supplied with slides and a miscroscope by the department, or may provide their own microscope. Microscopes provided by the department are for use within the department only. Students are required to wear white coats in the dissecting room.


As for second year, and Hamilton W J Simon G & Hamilton S G Surface end Radiological

Anatomy, Macmillan 1975

(b) Recommended for reference

As for second year, and Meschan I An Atlas of Anatomy Basic to Radiology, Saunders 1975

EXAMINATION At the end of first term of the third year. This examination will cover the work done during the first term of the third year. One 2-hour written paper. Oral examination if required. Honours will be awarded and will be based on the candidate's perform-ance at the examinations at the end of the second year and at the end of the first term of the third year.

536-031. PHYSIOLOGY

SYLLABUS The physiology of the nervous and endocrine systems. The The lecture series on endocrine function is given jointly with the Depart-ment of Biochemistry. Work sessions relating to the lecture course are

106


given throughout this term. The analysis of clinical problems in terms of physiological principles, which was begun in the course in physiology in second year, continues during this term. Seminars, run jointly with the Departments of Biochemistry and Pharmacology, and clinical demonstrations in the Teaching Hospitals are used for this teaching.

LABORATORY CLASSES AND DEMONSTRATIONS The schedule for these classes will be issued in the first week of term together with the laboratory manual.

ATTENDANCE See regulation 3.35 in Chapter 7 of this Handbook.

BOOKS As for 536-021 Physiology.

EXAMINATION An examination lasting three hours will be held in the 12th week of term. The results of this examination, together with an essay to be completed early in the term and other assignments will be used in assessing the student's progress. Students must satisfy the examiners of their knowledge of Physiology before proceeding to the second term of the third year course. Honours will be awarded on the overall performance in Physiology throughout the four terms of the course. Further details of the assessing procedures will be announced in the first week of the term.

621-031. BIOCHEMISTRY

SYLLABUS A course of twenty-one lectures dealing with: aspects of the control of intermediary metabolism including both cellular and endo-crine control; blood and iron metabolism; inborn errors of metabolism; the biochemistry of cancer. The unit on endocrinology is a joint Bio-chemistry/Physiology unit.

PRACTICAL WORK Students will not be required to carry out formal experimental work. Time scheduled for practical work will be devoted to the discussion and interpretation of biochemical data and to tutorials and seminars. Details of the programme and of combined teaching sessions with the Department of Physiology will be posted in the De-partment.


Davidson S Passmore R Brock J F & Truswell A S Human Nutrition and Dietetics 6th ed, Churchill Livingstone 1975

Harris J W & keIlermeyer R W The Red Cell Production Metabolism Destruction Normal and Abnormal revised ed. Harvard 1970

Stanbury J B Wyngaarden J B& Fredrickson D S The Metabolic Basis of Inherited Disease 3rd ed, McGraw-Hill 1972

Whitby L G Percy-Robb I W & Smith A F Lecture Notes on Clinical Chemistry, Blackwell 1975

There is no recommended textbook for Endocrinology but references to the original literature will be given.

NUTRITION SYLLABUS The biochemical rationale of nutrition and nutritional disease. A course of nine lectures on the requirements of the human for major and minor nutrients in relation to various physiological states. The

107

Faculty of Medicine

nutritive value of various foods with some comment on changes during storage, manufacture and preparation. Problems of nutrition in selected states such as those demanding parenteral nutrition, obesity and associa-ted diseases, protein-energy deficiency, common vitamin and mineral deficiency states.


Davidson S Passmore R Brock J F and Truswell A S lumen Nutrition and Dietetics 6th ed, Churchill Livingstone 1975

EXAMINATION An examination lasting three hours will be held in the 12th week of term. Students must satisfy the examiners of their know-ledge of Biochemistry before proceeding to the second term of the third year course. Honours will be awarded on the overall performance in Biochemistry (including Nutrition) throughout the four terms of the course. Further details of the assessment procedures will be announced in the first week of the term.

500 - 301 MEDICAL STUDIES II PSYCHOSOCIAL APPROACHES TO ABNORMAL BEHAVIOUR

A course of 20 lectures and 20 tutorials or demonstrations. The subject comprises the principles of psychopathology and an introduction to the study of the psychosocial dimensions of abnormal behaviour. It is assumed that the student has a basic understanding of normal psychology as taught in Medical Studies I.

SYLLABUS

Introduction: An historical review of psychiatry. A comparative survey of perspectives on abnormal behaviour—including biophysical, intra-psychic, behavioural, phenomenological and sociocultural approaches. The uses and limitation of models of abnormal behaviour and experience. Concepts of abnormality and deviance in psychiatry.

Psychopathology: Introduction to descriptive and psychodynamic ap-proaches to psychopathology. Problems of description and classification. Social learning interpretations of psychological dysfunction. Social factors influencing psychopathology. Family structures and their pathology. Developmental aspects of psychopathology. Disorders: An overview of the neuroses, affective disorders, psychotic states and other categories It mental illness. A comparison of psychoanalytic and learning approaches to the neuroses. Psycho-social therapies. Neuropsychology: The applica-tion of neuropsychological concepts to the understanding of behavioural dysfunctions. The psychosomatic approach. Sociology and social psychology in relation to abnormal behaviour: A review of selected social psychological and sociological theories and approaches relevant to psychiatry. Aspects of the sociology of psychiatry and of sociology in psychiatry. Epidemiological and macrosociological studies in psychiatry and microsociological analyses of abnormal be-haviour. Social factors in the etiology, presentation, therapy and main-tenance of mental illness. The sick role and illness behaviour.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks

Millon T Theories of Psychopathology and Personality 2nd ed, Saun-ders 1973

108


Price R H Abnormal Behaviour: Perspectives in Conflict, Holt Rinehard & Winston 1972

Davies B An Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry, MUP 1977 (b) Recommended for reference Zax M and Stricker G The Study of Abnormal Behaviour: Selected

Readings 2nd ed, Macmillan 1969 Brown J A C Freud end the Post-Freudians, Pelican 1967 Knutson A L The Individual Society and Health Behaviour, Russel Sage

Foundn. 1965 Bowden C L and Burstein A G Psychosocial Basis of Medical Practice,

Williams & Wilkins 1974

EXAMINATION Examination in this section of Medical Studies li will constitute part of a 3-hours' written examination at the end of the third term. The other part of this examination will consist of a short answer section in Social Medicine and Clinical Epidemiology. Assessment of essays or projects completed during the course in Psychosocial Ap-proaches to Abnormal Behaviour may be taken into account in deter-mining grades in this section.

COMMUNITY HEALTH Community Health is concerned with all aspects of health at a community level, and with the health of individuals in their community setting. The third year course is primarily concerned with health as it affects communities and social groups whereas in fourth year, the emphasis swings much more to the clinical content. Epidemiology is an integral part of Community Health being the discipline which enables problems of health in society to be approached in a scientific manner. There are 37 lectures in all and throughout second term these are concerned principally with methods of collecting, analysing and inter-preting data from populations. In third term, socio-medical problems in our society, changing methods of health care delivery and the political and economic aspects of health care are considered. In parallel with the lecture course, students in small groups are allocated to various health care agencies and are expected, under guidance, to view in a critical manner the purpose and functioning of these organisations.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: Alderson M An Introduction to Epidemiology, Macmillan 1976 (b) Recommended for reference: Gordon D Health Sickness and Society, OUP McKeown T & Lowe C R An Introduction to Social Medicine, Blackwell Hetzel B Health & Australian Society, Pelican Susser M W and Watson W Sociology in Medicine, OUP, 1972

EXAMINATION Each group of students will complete an assignment relating to their fieldwork and this will constitute a major part of the assessment. The remaining marks will come from a short answer paper at the end of the year.

531 - 031 PATHOLOGY A course In the principles of Pathology comprising general and introduc-tory Special Pathology; approximately 180 hours consisting of lectures, practical classes In histopathology, tutorials and special demonstrations.

109

Faculty of Medicine

SYLLABUS The major topics will include: congenital and acquired abnormalities, cell and tissue damage and degeneration, necrosis, auto-lysis, acute and chronic inflammation, Infection, oedema, shock and other general consequences of injury, wound healing, repair, haemorr-hage, haemostasis, thrombosis, embolism, vascular disease and its consequences, infarction, disorders of metabolism, abnormalities of pigmentation and calcification, calculus formation, abnormalities of growth, differentiation and regeneration, neoplasia. Knowledge of the commoner examples of these processes in the various organs and systems will be required.

LECTURES A course of 72 lectures and 36 hours of lecture-demonstra-tions in general pathology, the basic pathology of the main organ systems, and introductory applied pathology.

PRACTICAL WORK

(i) Laboratory work in pathological histology (2 hours per week through-out both terms).

(ii) Tutorial classes in anatomical pathology and applied pathology (2 hours per week throughout both terms).

(iii) Students are advised to use the museum for private study.


Robbins S L Pathological Basis of Disease, Saunders 1974 or Muir R and Anderson J R Muií s Textbook of Pathology, 10th ed

Arnold 1976

(b) Recommended for reference:

Anderson W A D Pathology, 6th ed Mosby 1971 or Payling Wright G & Symmers W St C Systemic Pathology, 2 vols 1st

ed Longmans 1967 Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone, 1972 Florey H General Pathology, 4th ed Lloyd-Luke Medical Books Ltd 1970 or Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 4th ed, Churchill 1974 Willis R A Pathology of Tumours, 4th ed Butterworth 1968 Willis R A Spread of Tumours In the Human Body 3rd ed, Butterworth

1973 Curran R C Colour Atlas of Histopathology 1st ed revised, Harvey Miller

& Medcalf 1972 or Sandritter W & Wartman W B Colour Atlas and Textbook of Tissue

and Cellular Pathology, 3rd ed Year Book Medical Publishers Inc 1969

Pinniger J L & Tighe J R Pathology 3rd ed, Bailllke Tindall & Cassell 1972

Gray C H Clinical Chemical Pathology 6th ed, Arnold 1971 Thompson R H S& Wootton I D P Biochemical Disorders in Human

Disease, 3rd ed Churchill 1970 In addition, reference should be made to the pathology sections In the textbooks prescribed for Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics and Gynaeco- logy.

110


EXAMINATION One 3-hours' written examination, one 3-hours' prac-tical examination, progress assessments. A viva voce examination may be required. Terminal tests may also be given.

CONTINUATION OF COURSE The course in Pathology will continue throughout the 4th-6th Years and will be clinically orientated, and integrated with the clinical programme. It will occupy 180 hours and will consist of the following major components: (i) Lecture course in Special Pathology. (ii) Autopsy demonstrations. (a) Students are required to attend a minimum of 65 demonstrations (4th-6th Years). (b) Each student must personally assist at one autopsy and study the case with the aid of the clinical notes and autopsy material in order to present his descriptions and conclusions for assessment. (iii) Clinicopathological instruction integrated with the teaching in Medicine and Surgery (4th-6th Years). (iv) Lecture-demonstrations and tutorials in Surgical Pathology, haema-tology and Chemical Pathology. Special aspects of gynaecological and paediatric pathology are included in the clinical courses in Obstetrics and Gynaecology and Paediatrics.

EXAMINATION In the Fourth Year questions on Pathology will be included in the Medicine/Surgery written paper. In Final Year questions on Pathology will be included in the final examinations for Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics and Gynaecology.

534 - 031 PHARMACOLOGY

LECTURES Three lectures per week throughout the year.

TUTORIALS One 1-hour tutorial per week throughout the year. PRACTICAL CLASSES DEMONSTRATION SEMINARS Each student will attend a 3-hours' session each fortnight throughout the year. Details will be posted on notice boards. SYLLABUS The course will be concerned with the general principles of pharmacology and with the mechanisms of action of drugs in common use in medicine under the following headings: The nature of receptors. The physiological basis of drug action and the kinetics of drug action. Absorption, distribution, excretion and meta-bolism of drugs. The pharmaceutical aspects of drug administration. Pharmacogenetics. The mechanism of drug Interaction. Principles of selective toxicity. Drugs affecting water and electrolyte balance. The biochemistry, physiology and pharmacology of junctional transmission In the peripheral autonomic and somatic neuroeffector systems and In the central nervous system. The effects of drugs on neurohumoural trans-mission. Local hormones and other pharmacologically active substances occurring naturally in tissues; their role in physiological and pathological processes and the modification of their actions by drugs. Drugs affect-ing the central nervous system; psychotropic drugs; centrally acting drugs to treat disorders of motor function; sedatives and hypnotics; analgesics; and general anaesthetics. Drugs acting on the cardiovascular, respiratory and gastrointestinal systems. Drugs affecting fertility and reproduction. Ocular pharmacology. The pharmacology of the endocrine system Including hormone preparations, their synthetic analogues and

111

Faculty of Medicine

antagonists and drugs which interact with hormone and endocrine glands. Drugs affecting haematopoiesis and coagulation. Anti-inflammatory drugs. Mechanisms of drug dependence and abuse.


'Bowman W C and Rand M J Text-book of Pharmacology, Blackwell Scientific Pub 1978

'Rand M J Raper C and McCulloch M W An Introduction to the Physi-ology and Pharmacology of the Autonomic Nervous System rev 1st ed, Aust Pharmaceutical 1975

Goodman L S and Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, Macmillan 1975

Di Palma J R Drill's Pharmacology in Medicine 4th ed, McGraw-fill 1971

Goldstein A Aronow L and Kalman S M Principles of Drug Action 2nd ed, Wiley 1974

Meyers F I and Jawetz E and Goldfin A Medical Pharmacology, Lange 1974

Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology 4th ed, Churchill 1973 Passmore R and Robson J S A companion to Medical Studies Vol 2,

Pharmacology Microbiology General Pathology and Related Sub-jects, Blackwell Scientif Pub 1970

Martindale's Extra Pharmacopeia 26th ed, Pharmaceutical 1972

EXAMINATION A 2-hours written examination consisting of multiple choice type questions will be held after the 1st term. Marks allotted to this examination will be used in making the end of the year assess-ment. The final examination will consist of one 3-hour written paper. Oral examinations may be required for some students, who will be notified after assessment of the written paper. A terminal test may also be given after second term.

526-032 MICROBIOLOGY INCLUDING IMMUNOLOGY A course of 71 lectures, 18 three-hour practical sessions with associated tutorials, 18 programmed museum sessions, and a small number of hospital clinical sessions.

SYLLABUS The characteristics of pathogenic bacteria, viruses, fungi, protozoa and helminths; the properties that enable them to cause disease; the principles of epidemiology, chemotherapy, sterilization and immuniza-tion; the techniques used in laboratory diagnosis of microbial diseases; organization and development of the immune system; immune responses and their role in disease.

PRACTICAL WORK Lays stress on case studies that relate laboratory diagnosis to clinical data. Supplemented by museum demonstrations.

BOOKS

( а ) Preliminary reading: Burnet F M & White D 0 Natural History of Infectious Disease, CUP

1972 (b) Prescribed textbook: Davis B D et al Microbiology 2nd ed, Heber 1973 or Cruickshank R Medical Microbiology Vol 1 12th ed, Churchill Living-

112


stone 1973 or Jawetz E et al Review of Medical Microbiology 12th ed, Lange 1976 Rein I M Essential Immunology 2nd ed, Blackwell 1974 (c) Recommended for reference: Benenson A S Control of Communicable Diseases in Man, 12th ed,

Amer Pub 11th Assoc 1975 Fenner F & White D 0 Medical Virology 2nd ed, Academic 1976

EXAMINATION 3-hour written paper, a practical examination, and, in certain cases, an oral or equivalent examination. A terminal test may be given.

FOURTH YEAR

500-491 MEDICINE

CLINICAL INTRODUCTORY COURSE A systematic course in clinical methods to be conducted with small groups of students. Class demonstrations on history taking will be given.

MEDICAL CLERKING Medical clerking involves the appointment of a small group of students to a teaching unit with Inpatient and/or Outpatient facilities. In respect of Inpatients: Patients will be allocated on admission to individual students who will clerk them. Clerking involves history taking, physical examination, following the investigation, course and treatment of the patient and recording all of this in a systematic way. In respect of Outpatients: Clerking involves initially the observation by a small group of students of an experienced doctor handling an Outpatient consultation, then gradually increasing the involvement of individual students in the process until they assume, under supervision, much of the role of the doctor. Medical Inpatient clerking will generally be based on an allocation of not less than three patients suitable for clerking per student at any one time. During tenure of a medical clerking appointment, students will receive daily organized instruction in small groups in wards and/or Outpatients.

MEDICAL LECTURES Lectures will be designed as commentaries on the course. The details of the programmes will be the responsibility of individual clinical schools.

EXAMINATION Continuing assessment throughout the year. A clinical examination In general Medicine. A written examination covering Medi-cine and Surgery and including special Pathology, Microbiology and Community Health.

500-492 SURGERY

This year will be spent entirely within the clinical schools, with in-struction In medicine and surgery and continuing teaching In the pre and para-clinical subjects. Following an introductory period students will be allocated in groups to clinical units in Medicine and Surgery, where they will receive bedside instruction in clinical methods and patient care. Throughout the year the clinical teaching will be combined with continuing instruction in Special Pathology, Anatomy, Physiology,

113

Faculty of Medicine

Pharmacology and Microbiology. Emphasis will be placed on the rele-vance of these subjects to clinical practice.

BOO К S These are listed under "General Surgery".

EXAMINATION The Fourth Year examination will comprise three sec-tions as follows:

1. Continuing assessment on progress during the year; 2. A clinical examination; 3. One 3-hour written paper comprising one-third Medicine, one-third

Surgery and one-third multi-discipline including Special Pathology and Microbiology.

COMMUNITY HEALTH

Community Health in fourth year provides an appreciation of clinical medicine in the community as opposed to hospital medicine. Students are introduced to the problems of primary diagnosis, the multifactorial nature of illness and the concepts of total patient care. This is a two week course, half of which is spent in attachment to health centres or teaching general practices while the remainder is occupied with seminars in the Department. Students are seconded from the respective clinical schools in groups of approximately 30, while attendance at health centres and general practices is arranged in pairs.

BOO К S Recommended for reference:

Morell D An Introduction to Primary Medical Care, Churchill Living-stone 1976

Harvard D General Practice for Students of Medicine, Academic 1975

EXAMINATION There will be assessment during the course and Com-munity Health will be included in the written examination at the end of the year.

CLINICAL PSYCHIATRY

Fourth Year teaching In psychiatry will commence with a short introduc-tory course. This will be followed by sessions which will be conducted by psychiatrists associated with medical teams.

BOOk

Davies B An Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry, MUP

FIFTH AND SIXTH YEARS 500-691. MEDICINE

GENERAL MEDICINE Clinical practice, demonstrations and lectures in the recognized teaching hospitals (see 'Clinical Instruction at Recognized Teaching Hospitals').

SYLLABUS The syllabus embraces the whole subject. BOO К S (a) Prescribed textbooks:

Lovell R R H & Doyle A E An Introduction to Clinical Medicine, 2nd ed MUP 1971

114


Davidson S ed The Principles and Practice of Medicine, 11th е d Livingstone 1974

Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology 4th ed, Churchill 1973


Beeson P B and McDermott W Textbook of Medicine, 14th ed Saunders 1978

Harrison T R Principles of Internal Medicine 8th ed, McGraw-Hill 1977 de Gruchy G C Clinical H а em а tology in Medical Practice, 3rd ed Black-

well 1970 Suser M W & Watson W Sociology in Medicine, OUP 1971 Brain W R Brain's diseases of the Nervous System, 7th ed OUP 1969 Jones A Gummer J W P & Lennard-Jones J F Clinical Gastroenterology,

2nd ed Blackwell 1968 Sherlock S Diseases of the Liver and Biliary System, 5th ed Blackwell

1975 Black D A K Renal Disease 3rd ed, Blackwell 1972 Williams R Textbook of Endocrinology, 5th ed Saunders 1974 Wood, P Diseases of the Heart and Circulation, 3rd ed Eyre and Spottis-

wood 1968

EXAMINATION Written questions in Medicine including General Medi-cine, Paediatrics, Psychiatry, Therapeutics, Social Medicine, Clinical Pathology and Diagnostic Methods. Clinical examination in General Medicine. Oral Examinations in Paediatrics and Psychiatry. Candidates who present a certificate of competency in taking histories, examining patients and presentation of findings may be excused part of the clinical examination.

CLINICAL PHARMACOLOGY AND THERAPEUTICS

The syllabus embraces the principles of treatment of diseases generally and the details of treatment of common and acute conditions, the com-position of official preparations of drugs. and the regulations on prescrib-ing and on dangerous drugs. Lectures supplement instruction in the wards and outpatients' departments.

EXAMINATION Questions are included in the final examination in Medi-cine.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology 4th ed, Churchill 1973


Bowman W C Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology, 2nd ed, Blackwell 1977

Goodman L S and Gilman A Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics a Textbook of Pharmacology Toxicology and Therapeutics for Physi-cians and Students, 4th ed Macmillan 1970

Martindale The Extra Pharmacopoeia, 26th ed Pharmaceutical 1972 Turner P and Richens A Clinical Pharmacology, 2nd ed 1975 Avery G S ed Drug Treatment Principles and Practice of Clinical

Pharmacology and Therapeutics, Adis 1976 Goldstein A Aronow L and Kalman S M Principles of Drug Action The

Basis of Pharmacology, 2nd ed Wiley 1974

115

Faculty of Medicine

PAEDIATRICS

SYLLABUS Students attend the Royal Children's Hospital, Melbourne, full-time daily for a period of ten weeks during their Fifth Year and for two weeks during their Sixth Year. An integrated programme of teaching organized by the Professor of Paediatrics is given at the Royal Children's Hospital. This commences with an orientation week during which students are introduced by means of lectures, films, demonstrations and clinical sessions to various aspects of growth and development in normal children and to clinical problems of infancy and childhood. This is followed by clinical instruction in the wards and out-patient de-partment and a course of lectures in paediatric medicine and surgery given by members of the senior medical staff of the hospital end of the Depart-ment of Paediatrics. Clinical tutors assist in the teaching programme In the wards. Students attend sessions in the Psychiatric department and are given demonstrations in the departments of Pathology and Radiology, and clinical sessions in other specialist departments. Students pay a series of visits to institutions caring for children In the community. These institutions include the Lady Gowrie Child Centre, an Infant Welfare Centre and Kew Children's Cottages. The Maternal and Child Welfare Branch of the Health Department arranges a tour of infant welfare contres, creches and pre-school centres. Other institutions are visited by groups of students in the course of investigatory problems allotted to them. All students are given an assignment in clinical or social paediatrics and report the results of their investigation to the group as a whole. While at the Royal Women's Hospital each student is allotted an infant, whom he has delivered, for the purpose of study and follow-up at home over the next nine or twelve months. At the end of the period of study, the student writes a report on the progress and development of this child. Students are resident in the Royal Children's Hospital for two weeks in the Fifth Year. Instruction in Neonatal Paediatrics is organized by the First Assistants in Neonatal Paediatrics in conjunction with Paediatric staff and neonatal paediatricians in the Professorial Units at the Royal Women's Hospital and Mercy Maternity Hospital during the students' period there.


Kempe C H Silvе r H K and O'Brien D Current Pediatric Diagnosis and Treatment, Lange 1976

• Illingworth R S The Normal Child, 6th ed Churchill 1975 Jones P G ed Clinical Paediatric Surgery, 2nd ed Ure Smith 1976


Nelson W E Text-book of Paediatrics 10th ed, Saunders 1975 •Barnett H L & Einhorn A H Paediatrics 15th ed, Appleton-Century-

Crofts 1972

EXAMINATION (1) Clinical examination at the end of the paediatric term in Fifth Year. (2) Assessment of the child development study in Fifth and Sixth Years. (3) Oral examination in Sixth Year. (4) Written questions in the final examination in Medicine. In addition there is a paediatric component in the examinations In Surgery and Obstetrics and Gynaecology (Neonatal Medicine).

116


PSYCHIATRY Psychiatry is an important clinical discipline and teaching in the subject is carried out in the 4th, 5th and 6th years. In the 5th Year, all students spend 8 weeks full-time clerking on psychi-atric patients (in-patients, out-patients and day patients). For the Royal Melbourne Hospital and St. Vincent's Hospital students, four weeks of this time is spent at the student's teaching hospital and four weeks at the Parkvill е Psychiatric Unit. The eight weeks is organized by the Professor of Psychiatry and tutors include University teachers, honoraries at the teaching hospitals and selected consultants in the Mental Health Authority. For Austin Hospital students, psychiatric clerking takes place for eight weeks at that hospital, Larundel Hospital and the Malvern Clinic. Ten University lectures are given in the 5th Year. Sixth Year teaching takes the form of case discussions in the medical wards of the general hospitals on patients with psychiatric and medical problems.

BOOKS Davies B An Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry, MUP 1977

EXAMINATION The assessment format in 5th Year takes the form of an examination conducted at the end of the 8-week term in psychiatry. This comprises a multiple choice examination, a clinical assessment of a patient based upon a video-tape recording, an assessment of the student by tutors and any other format which the department employs In that teaching hospital. In final year, a multiple choice examination in psychiatry Is included as part of the medicine paper. The finals mark for psychiatry is based on the total of 4th, 5th and 6th Year marks.

OPHTHALMOLOGY

Clinical demonstrations and lectures in Ophthalmology are given at:

(i) The Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, Mondays to Fridays at 9 a.m. and 2 p.m. A course of 8 lectures is given on Saturdays at 9 a.m. twice per year commencing on the first Saturday in February and September respectively.

(ii) Royal Melbourne Hospital, on Tuesday and Friday mornings. (11i) St. Vincent's Hospital, on Mondays at 9 a.m. and Thursdays at 2

p.m. (iv) Austin Hospital, at times to be arranged. (v) Repatriation General Hospital, Heidelberg, at times to be arranged.

Students are expected to have an ophthalmoscope at all clinics.

BOOKS Recommended for reference

Jackson C R S The Eye in General Practice 6th ed, Livingstone 1972 Bedford M A A Colour Atlas of Ophthalmological Diagnosis, Wolfe

1971

EXAMINATION There is no formal examination, but, at the end of his period of clinical Instruction, the student may be required to satisfy his clinician that he has reached the required standard of proficiency. Ques-tions on Ophthalmology may be included in the final M.B., B.S. examina-tion.

117

Faculty of Medicine

COMMUNICABLE DISEASES

Instruction consists of a two week residential course integrating clinical and laboratory aspects of infectious diseases.


Krugman S & Ward R Infectious Diseases of Children and Adults 5th ed, Mosby 1973

Christie A B Infectious Diseases Epidemiology and Clinical Practice 2nd ed, Churchill Livingstone 1974

Horsfall F L & Tamm I Viral and Rickettsia/ Diseases of Man, 4th ed J B Lippincott Co Philadelphia 1965

Kucers A & Bennett N Ick The Use of Antibiotics 2nd ed, Heinemann 1975

EXAMINATION Questions are included in the final examination in Medi-cine.

500-692. SURGERY

GENERAL SURGERY

Clinical practice, demonstrations and lectures in the recognized teaching hospitals.

SYLLABUS The syllabus embraces the whole subject.

BOOKS (a) Standard textbooks:

Adams J C Outline of Fractures, 6th ed Churchill Livingstone 1972 Adams J C Outline of Orthopaedics, 7th ed Livingstone 1971 Bailey H & Love McN A Short Practice of Surgery, 15th ed Lewis

1971 Scott P R An Aid to Clinical Surgery, Churchill Livingstone 1974 Dunphy J E and Way L W Current Surgical Diagnosis and Treatment

2nd ed, Lange 1975 Bailey H Demonstration of Physical Signs In Clinical Surgery 15th ed,

Bristol Wright 1973


Illingworth C F W & Dick B M A Textbook of Surgical Pathology, 11th

ed Churchill 1975 Jamieson R A & Kay A W A Textbook of Surgical Physiology, 3rd ed

Churchill Livingstone 1972 Schwartz S I Principles of Surgery Vol 1 2nd ed, McGraw-Hill 1974

EXAMINATION Written, oral and clinical. Questions may be included in any of the surgical specialties, Paediatrics (including the examination of patients), Surgical Anatomy, Surgical Pathology, and Anaesthetics.

SURGICAL ANATOMY

Surgical Anatomy will be incorporated in Surgery lectures and Clinical teaching in each Clinical School.

118


SYLLABUS The anatomy involved in medical and surgical diagnosis and practice


McGregor A Lee Synopsis of Surgical Anatomy, 10th ed Wright 1969 Bruce J Walmsley R & Ross J A Manual of Surgical Anatomy, Living-

stone 1964

EXAMINATION There is no separate examination, but questions may be included in the final examination in Surgery.

ANAESTHETICS Instruction consists of (1) lectures either at the University or the Clinical Schools to cover (i) cardiac resuscitation, (ii) care of the unconscious patient, (iii) applied pharmacology, (iv) the scope of anaesthetic tech-niques, (v) pre-operative assessment and post-operative care, (vi) the management of respiratory failure, (vii) intravenous therapy in relation to anaesthesia and surgery, and (2) attendance at a department of Anaes-thetics of a recognized teaching hospital for an introduction to anaes-thetic procedures. The student is required to perform at least twelve anaesthetic procedures to the satisfaction of the director of Anaesthesia. The names of instructors in Anaesthetics recognized by the Faculty of Medicine appear in the List of Staff published elsewhere in this Hand-book.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: Norris W & Campbell D Anaesthetics, Resuscitation and Intensive

Care. A Textbook for Students and Residents, 3rd ed Livingstone 1971

(b) Recommended for reference: Dripps R D Eckenhoff J E & Vendam L D Introduction to Anaesthesia,

4th ed Saunders 1972

EXAMINATION There is no formal examination, but the student may be required by his Instructors to show that his knowledge of the principles of anaesthesia is satisfactory at the end of his apprenticeship. Questions may be included in the final examination in Surgery.

RADIOLOGY Opportunities are provided to learn (1) the value and limitations of radiological diagnosis in various clinical circumstances, (2) what is in-volved for the patient when undergoing certain radiological examinations, (3) the appearance of the more commonly encountered radiological ab-formalities. Students are encouraged to visit the Departments of Radiology in the Clinical Schools, where arrangements are made to observe the perform-ance of the following examinations; Barium Meal, Barium Enema, Cholecystogram, Intravenous Pyelogram, Bronchogram, Myelogram, Cerebral Angiogram, Aortogram. Film libraries in these Departments are available for studying the radiological appearances of various common pathological conditions.

BOOKS

Recommended for reference: Simon G X-Ray Diagnosis for Clinical Students 3rd ed, Butterworths

1975

119

Faculty of Medicine

EXAMINATION Questions involving this subject may be included in the fourth year and the sixth year examination in Medicine, Surgery, and Obstetrics and Gynaecology. An oral examination will be conducted at the time of the clinical examination in Surgery.

DISEASES OF THE THROAT, NOSE AND EAR

Not less than two lectures will be given In the fifth year of the course in the University.

Clinical instruction in Diseases of the Throat, Nose and Ear consists of not less than five didactic lectures and not less than six out-patient ses-sions of clinical demonstrations to ensure familiarity with common con-ditions, their recognition and treatment, conducted at:

(1) The Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, Mondays to Fridays at 2 p.m., and at 9.30 a.m. on Saturdays the department of Oto-laryngology conducts a course of lectures. (A course of 12 lectures given twice per year commencing on the first Saturday in February and September respectively.)

(ii) Royal Melbourne Hospital, Mondays and Thursdays, 9-11 a.m. (iii) St. Vincent's Hospital, Thursdays at 9 a.m. (iv) Royal Children's Hospital, selected Thursdays at 12 noon. (v) Austin Hospital, to be arranged.

Clinical lectures and demonstrations will be given. Stress will be laid on methods of examination and a knowledge should be acquired of the commonly found conditions in the following areas:

The Ear

(i) Surgical Anatomy and basic Physiology of the part. (ii) Deafness and tests of hearing including elementary Audiometry. (iii) Differential diagnosis and management of Aural pain and Aural dis-

charge. (iv) Vertigo and differential diagnosis. (v) Intracranial complications of ear and nose disease. (vi) Minor procedures such as: removal of wax; paracentesis of ear

drum; removal of foreign body from ear canal.

The nose

(i) Surgical Anatomy and basic Physiology of the part. (ii) Nasal obstruction: deviated nasal septum, allergic rhinitis, acute and

chronic sinusitis, foreign body and neoplasma. (iii) Epistaxis. (iv) Headache. The relation of nose and sinuses to this. (v) Minor procedures such as: nasal cautery; nasal and post-nasal pack-

ing; antrum washout.

The throat

(i) Surgical Anatomy and basic Physiology of the part. (ii) Tonsils and Adenoids.

(iii) Differential diagnosis of sore throat, hoarseness and lump in the throat.

(iv) Strider; includes foreign bodies of the larynx and bronchus. (v) Dysphagia including oesophageal foreign bodies.

(vi) Surgical procedures: tonsils, adenoids; tracheotomy. (vii) Cough.

120


BOO К S (a) Prescribed textbook

Hall I S and Colman B H Diseases of the Nose Throat and Ear 10th ed, Churchill & Livingstone 1973


Pараге lla M M and Shumrick D A Otolaryngology, Saunders 1973

EXAMINATION There is a clinical and written examination in Otolaryng-ology in the final year for the Hedley Summons Prize. At the end of hia period of clinical Instruction, the student may be required to satisfy his clinician that he has reached the required standard of proficiency. Questions may be included in the final examination in Surgery.

VENEREAL DISEASES

This subject will be covered by instruction in the medical, surgical and gynaecological clinics in each of the teaching hospitals, special attention being given by lecture and by demonstration to the principles of diagnosis and of treatment.

BOOk Prescribed textbook: McLachlan A E W Handbook of Diagnosis and Treatment of Venereal

Diseases, 5th ed Livingstone 1969

EXAMINATION There is no formal examination, but questions may be Included in the examinations in Medicine and Surgery.

500-693 OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

Up to 40 lectures in the Fifth Year in Obstetrics and Gynaecology supplemented by lectures and demonstrations during the periods of clinical instruction at the recognized teaching hospitals.

SYLLABUS The lectures and demonstrations embrace the whole subject.

(i) OBSTETRICS A course of clinical instruction extending over twelve weeks under the direction of the Professors of Obstetrics and Gynaecology. This includes the personal conduct of not less than twenty cases of childbirth under the direction of a registered medical practitioner. Students of the Royal Melbourne and St Vincent's Hospitals Clinical Schools will undertake clinical instruction in this subject at the Royal Women's Hospital and students of the Austin Hospital Clinical School will undertake Instruction at the Mercy Maternity Hospital. The clinical Instruction will be conducted by members of the Royal Women's and Mercy Maternity Hospital Clinical Schools. Each student Is required to attend at the appropriate hospital for twelve weeks at times arranged. Of this time, ten weeks in Fifth Year are resi-dential and are devoted to a major course of Instruction. The remaining two are residential in Sixth Year. Students must keep detailed records of all patients allotted to them In the wards.

(ii) GYNAECOLOGY

A course of clinical Instruction, extending over twelve weeks, under the direction of the Professors of Obstetrics and Gynaecology. Part of this instruction will be given at the Gynaecological departments of

121

Faculty of Medicine

The Royal Women's and Mercy Maternity Hospitals, this instruction being concurrent with attendance in the major course in Obstetrics. The re-mainder will be given at the Gynaecological Department of one of the recognized general hospitals.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: 'Beischer and Mackay Obstetrics and the Newborn. Saunders 1976 'Townsend L Obstetrics for Students, 3rd ed Macmillan 1978 •Townsend L Gynaecology for Students, 3rd ed Macmillan 1975


Jeffcoate T N A Principles of Gynaecology, 4th ed Butterworth 1975

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour commentary paper (involving cases in Obstetrics and Gynaecology); clinical examinations (in Obstetrics and in Gynaecology); oral examinations (in Obstetrics and In Gynaecology). Each student returned as not passed or absent is required to attend the appropriate hospital for at least fourteen days' residence before being eligible for re-examination.

598-051. FORENSIC MEDICINE

SYLLABUS A course of twenty-six lectures including the following topics:

(a) Forensic Pathology and Medicine: dealing with such subjects as un-expected deaths, wounds, trauma, infanticide and sexual offences. (b) Law: relevant fundamental concepts of law including legal pro-cedures, statutes, subordinate legislation, common law, testamentary capacity, drug regulations and prescribing, medical witnesses, dying dec-larations, negligence and liability, professional confidence and secrecy, consent, workers' compensation, examination of minors. (c) Toxicology: accidental and criminal poisoning; alcohol. (d) Forensic Psychiatry: legal aspects of insanity and senility, certifica-tion procedures, antisocial conduct. (e) Medical Ethics: the physician's obligations to his patients, his colleagues and to the State.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed for study:

Burton A W Medical Ethics and the Law, Australasian Medical Pub-lishing Company Ltd 1970

Medical Practitioners Act 1970 'Lecture notes by Dr V. D. Plueckhahn.


Knight В Legal Aspects of Medical Practice, Churchill Livingstone 1972 Simpson K ed Taylor's Principles and Practice of Medical Jurisprudence,

2 vols Churchill 1965

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

COMMUNITY HEALTH

Community Health in Sixth Year is a Faculty option and places are offered as follows: 34 in general practice, 2 in epidemiology, 2 in medical sociology, 2 in health services research. .

122


The option may be taken for 8 or 16 weeks. For the general practice option students will have a full attachment to a health centre or general practice, either metropolitan or rural, on a 1 :1 basis with seminar teaching at the beginning and end of the period. Within legal limitations the student will act to all intents as a primary care physician and will also be allotted a project at which he or she is expected to work. It is suggested that students give particular consideration to attachment to a rural practice. The remaining options will be based in the Department.


Cormack J Marinker M and Morrei D Practice A Handbook of Primary Medical Care, Kluwer-Harrap 1976

Hodgkin K Towards Earlier Diagnosis, Churchill Livingstone 1973 Barber J H and Biddy E A General Practice Medicine, Churchill

Livingstone 1975 Browne K and Freeling P The Doctor-Patient Relationship, 2nd ed

Churchill Livingstone 1976 EXAMINATION Assessment based on reports from students and supervisors.

5. CLINICAL INSTRUCTION AT RECOGNIZED TEACHING HOSPITALS

CLINICAL MEDICINE, CLINICAL SURGERY, CLINICAL OBSTETRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY, AND CLINICAL PSYCHIATRY

Students must keep records of the patients allotted to them and must sub-mit these records for inspection as often as required by the Associate Dean, Clinical, of the Clinical School. The clinical work performed by each student in Fourth, Fifth and Sixth Years may be taken into account by the examiners in assessing the results of the final examination.


Lovell R R H & Doyle A E An Introduction to Clinical Medicine, 2nd ed MUP 1971

Davies B An Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry, 2nd ed MUP 1971 Clain A Hamilton Bailey's Physical Signs in Clinical Surgery 14th ed,

Wright 1967

ROYAL MELBOURNE HOSPITAL

FOURTH YEAR

Commencing at the end of January, there will be a two-weeks Introductory Course of clinical demonstrations to small groups of students and lecture/demonstrations to the whole year to familiarize them with the methods of history-taking and physical examination. Following this, students will commence clinical clerking in the medical and surgical wards of the hospital. There will be six periods, each of six weeks, equally divided between Medicine and Surgery. All students are attached to the Professorial Units In Medicine and Surgery for one

123

Faculty of Medicine

period. Instruction in Orthopaedics will also be arranged. During the periods of medical clerking, students attend autopsies or organ demon-strations in the Department of Anatomical Pathology in the latter part of the mornings on four days in the week. During surgical clerking, students attend radiological pathology demonstrations at similar times. Clinical sessions in Psychiatry are held regularly. A course of lectures covering Medicine, Surgery, Pathology and Micro-biology will be offered throughout the year. In the latter half of the year students will spend two weeks in the Department of Community Health. Periods of residence are arranged during the year.

FIFTH YEAR

Beginning in mid-January, students will attend the Royal Women's Hos-pital in groups in residence for ten weeks and for a similar period (non-resident) the Royal Children's Hospital. Those not so engaged will spend four weeks in residence in Casualty duty, rotating with two periods of four weeks in the Department of Psychiatry—one spent in the Hospital Psychiatric Unit, the other at Parkville Psychiatric Hospital. Ten weeks will be devoted to Medicine (Therapeutics) in which students will be rostered to a number of special units such as Nephrology, Cardiology, Neurology, Thoracic Surgery, Diabetes, Clinical Oncology, Dermatology, Ophthalmology, Neurosurgery and Otolaryngology. Visits to Royal Talbot Rehabilitation Hospital are arranged in addition. As well, there will be instruction in various aspects of Therapeutics and Pharmacology of Anaesthetics, and one week is devoted to the study of anaesthetic theory and practical techniques. Two days will be spent by each group in the Radiology department under the direction of the Professor of Radiology to observe common radiological procedures. Instruction in Clinical Chemistry will be arranged during this time and the study of Pathology will continue. Two weeks will be spent at Fairfield Infectious Diseases Hospital and a series of 15 lectures in General Therapeutics and five in Psychiatry will be undertaken. There will be a vacation period of four weeks during June and July.

FINAL YEAR

Commencing in mid-February, the first two periods, each of eight weeks, are devoted to Options. In this time, students may elect to undertake study in the pre- or para-clinical disciplines, in primary medical care or in the Department of Community Health, in sub-specialties of Medicine or Surgery, in peripheral or country base hospitals or in medical schools interstate or overseas. No lectures will be arranged during this time. Two weeks will be spent at both the Royal Women's and Royal Chil-dren's Hospitals during June and July in a refresher course. There will be a four weeks vacation during these months also. The clinical examination in Surgery will be held at the end of students' final period of clinical clerking in Surgery and the clinical examination in Medicine will be held at the end of students' final period of clinical clerking in Medicine. Finally, a multiple choice examination paper will follow a short vacation.

124


The study of Pathology will continue during the final year.

Professorial Units: (i) The Medical Professorial Unit. Clinical Demonstrations are given

to all students by the Professor of Medicine or his deputy in the latter half of the year.

(ii) Surgical Professorial Unit. Late afternoon demonstrations for all students are arranged by the Professor or his deputy at various times through the year.

Students are able to visit the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital at weekends to obtain extra casualty experience, either during the year or in vacation. During the final year, students are rostered in residence for periods of one week to observe the management of acute medical and surgical emergencies.

GENERAL

Students should acquaint themselves with the Library, the Hospital Pathology Museum, the Radiology Museum, the collections of electro-cardiographic tracings in the office of the Dean. The following scholarships and prizes are open for competition to students of The Royal Melbourne Hospital:

(i) The T F Ryan Scholarship in Medicine ($200) is awarded on the result of an examination conducted by the Royal Australasian Col-lege of Physicians shortly after the final examination.

(ii) The J P Ryan Scholarship in Surgery ($200) is awarded on the re-sult of an examination conducted by the Royal Australasian Col-lege of Surgeons at the end of the first year after graduation.

(iii) The Stirling Prize in Clinical Surgery is awarded to a student on the result of a test conducted by the Surgical staff of the Hospital.

(iv) The Alison Howorth Prize ($70) is awarded triennially to the stu-dent from the Royal Melbourne Hospital who submits the best essay on the Rheumatic Disorders or a related subject.

(v) The Leonard Mitchell Prize in Ophthalmology is awarded annually to a student on the result of an examination arranged by the Ophthalmologist.

ST. VINCENT'S HOSPITAL

FOURTH YEAR

1. Introductory Course. This will consist of a four-week period during which clinical methods in Medicine and Surgery will be demon-strated.

2. Medicine. There will be two blocks of eight weeks for instruction. Students are rostered to a general medical unit, and also attend some specialist medical units; some of this teaching is conducted at Preston & Northcote Community Hospital.

3. Surgery. There will be two blocks of eight weeks for instruction. Students are rostered to a general surgical unit, and also attend some specialist surgical units; some of this teaching is conducted at Preston & Northcote Community Hospital.

4. Community Medicine. A course of Lectures, Seminars and Field Visits is undertaken.

125

Faculty of Medicine

5. Psychiatry. Preliminary instruction will be given during the intro-ductory course, and when students are rostered to a medical unit there will be one tutorial per week.

6. Post-mortem Demonstrations are given on Mondays and Tuesdays at midday. A series of lectures in clinical pathology will also be given.

7. Lectures in Medicine and Surgery are given throughout the year.

8. Microbiology. A series of lectures in clinical microbiology are given throughout the year.

9. Casualty Duty. During the year students are required to spend two weeks in residence in Casualty.

10. Visits to other Hospitals. Students are encouraged throughout the year to attend the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, Preston & Northcote Community Hospital, and Box Hill & District Hospital at weekends to gain further clinical experience.

FIFTH YEAR

1. Obstetrics and Gynaecology. Instruction is conducted during ten weeks' residency at the Royal Women's Hospital.

2. Paediatrics. There is a course of ten weeks' instruction (non-residence) at the Royal Children's Hospital.

3. Anaesthetics. An intensive course in Anaesthetics and Resuscitation techniques occupies one week.

4. Psychiatry. A course of eight weeks' instruction is conducted in conjunction with the University Department of Psychiatry. Students spend half of this period at Parkville Psychiatric Unit and the other half at St. Vincent's Hospital.

5. Infectious Diseases. The students attend the Fairfield Infectious Diseases Hospital for two weeks' training.

6. Therapeutics. There is a nine weeks' course at St. Vincent's Hos-pital, during which time the students attend two ward rounds and two seminars each week. Each student is required to undertake projects in Therapeutics during this period.

7. Casualty Duty. Two weeks are spent in residence for training in various casualty procedures.

FINAL YEAR

1. During the first sixteen weeks of the year the students will under-take approved options in pre-clinical, clinical and para-clinical disciplines, including General Practice.

2. Medical and Surgical Clinics. During the year students are rostered to general medical and general surgical units. Part of this time is spent in residence so that experience in management of acute medical and surgical conditions may be gained.

3. Specialist Clinics. Medical specialties including Neurology, Derma-tology, Ophthalmology, Diabetes and Endocrinology are taught during the student's attachment to general medical units, and similarly surgical specialties including Orthopaedics, Urology,

126

Degrees of М .В ., B.S.

Thoracic Surgery, Neurosurgery, Plastic Surgery, Otolaryngology and Gynaecology are taught during the student's attachment to general surgical units. Some of this teaching is conducted at Preston & Northcote Community Hospital.

4. Radiology tutorials are given during attachment to one medical and one surgical unit.

5. Lectures in Medicine and Surgery are held throughout the year.

6. Students visit the Peter MacCallum Clinic for teaching in cancer specialisms.

7. Royal Women's Hospital and Royal Children's Hospital. Students visit each of these hospitals for a two-week refresher course.

8. General Practice. In the first two weeks of term, students are rostered to attend a General Practice for tuition.

GENERAL

The following Scholarships and Prizes are open for competition to stu-dents at St. Vincent's Hospital. 1. The Andrew Brenan Prize is awarded to the student with the highest

marks in Pathology General and Special. 2. The Dean's Prize ($50) is awarded annually to the Final Year student

considered to be the outstanding student (judged on personal qualities as well as academic achievement).

3. The Michael and Margaret Ryan Scholarships in Medicine and surgery, valued at $200 each, are awarded as a result of special examinations at the end of the sixth Year in Medicine, and at the end of the first Year of residency in Surgery.

AUSTIN HOSPITAL AND REPATRIATION GENERAL HOSPITAL

FOURTH YEAR

1. The first week of the course of instruction will be devoted to an orientation in which students will become familiar with the hospitals and their services and will be taught the fundamentals of clinical examination of patients.

2. An integrated programme of formal instruction consisting of lec-tures, group discussions, seminars and attendance at prepared demonstrations will be held at least twice daily for one hour. Teach-ing in each subject will cover the necessary aspects of Clinical Medicine and Surgery, Psychiatry, Special Pathology, Microbiology, Anatomy, Physiology, Pharmacology and Biochemistry. The subjects will be taught in a systematic way according to topics: Cardiology and Vascular Disease; Renal Disease; Pulmonary Disease; Gastro-enterology; Endocrinology; Haematology; Neurology and Neuro-surgery; Rheumatology and Clinical Immunology; Trauma; Common Surgical Conditions; Dermatology; Oncology; Bone Disease and Infectious Diseases.

3. Displays (macroscopic and microscopic pathology, microbiology, medicine and surgery etc.) will be mounted demonstrating the sub-

127

Faculty of Medicine

ject matter under discussion. A member of the teaching staff will be available for discussion with students on the displayed material at stated times each week.

4. Clinico-pathological demonstrations will take place regularly each week.

5. All other times during each week will be spent in the wards end in the Outpatients Department, both at the Austin Hospital and at the Repatriation General Hospital, small groups being allocated to clinical units for teaching. Students will be required to clerk patients and to present their findings at regular teaching sessions. They will be expected to hand in the histories of at least five patients for assessment during each term. Students will be expected to undertake ward procedures, attend their patients at the Radiology department, operating theatres etc., and be available for clerking emergency admissions.

6. Each student will spend one week in the Casualty department at the Austin Hospital.

7. Psychiatry: Students will be introduced to psychological aspects of medicine by a series of lectures, seminars and case presentations.

8. Community Health: Each student will spend two weeks in the second half of the year in the department of Community Health.

FIFTH YEAR

1. Department of Medicine: Students will be given a ten weeks' period of instruction in Medicine (Therapeutics) during which time they will be taught the drug treatment of disease. This teaching will be undertaken by the Professorial Unit of Clinical Pharmacology and Therapeutics at the Austin Hospital and will consist of lectures, clinical demonstrations and tutorials, with an emphasis on medical specialties.

2. Surgical Specialties: A two week term of instruction will be given in the following surgical specialties—cardiothoracic surgery, neuro-surgery, oncology, orthopaedics, otolarynology, plastic surgery and urology. This instruction will be given at both the Austin Hospital and at the Repatriation General Hospital.

З . Obstetrics and Gynaecology: Students will spend ten weeks in residence at the Mercy Hospital. At the end of this time an examin-ation will be conducted. The marks obtained will make up a proportion of the Obstetric and Gynaecology marks in the final examination.

4. Paediatrics: Students will spend ten weeks (non-residence) at the Royal Children's Hospital. At the end of this time an examin-ation will be conducted. The marks obtained will make up a proportion of the Paediatric marks in the final examination.

5. Psychiatry: There will be a period of eight weeks' instruction in Psychiatry. Four weeks of this period will be spent at the Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital, and four weeks at the Larundel Hospital. At the end of this time an examination will be conducted. The marks obtained will make up a large proportion of the Psychiatry mark in the final examinations in Medicine.

6. Infectious Diseases: A two week period of instruction in infectious diseases will be given at the Fairfield Hospital.

128


7. Students will spend one week in the Casualty department at the Austin Hospital and the Box Híii and District Hospital.

8. Anaesthetics: Each student will be rostered for one week to the Anaesthetic departments at the Austin Hospital and Repatriation General Hospital.

9. Physiotherapy and Social Work: Students will receive instruction in these departments.

SIXTH YEAR

Students will undertake options during the first sixteen weeks, during which time there will be no formal teaching in Medicine and Surgery except for students undergoing "remedial" options. During the last twelve weeks of clinical instruction in sixth year all students will spend six weeks In the Department of Medicine and six weeks in the Depart-ment of Surgery. At the end of each two periods of clinical instruction examinations in Medicine and Surgery will be held. 1. Medicine and Surgery: Students will be rostered for inpatient and

outpatient instruction. This instruction will take place at the Austin Hospital, the Repatriation General Hospital and the Box Hill and District Hospital. A period of residence at the Austin Hospital is included so that experience may be obtained in acute medical and surgical conditions. A course of lectures and tutorials will be given.

2. Teaching in medical and surgical specialties will be available during the period of clinical instruction.

З . Obstetrics and Gynaecology: A refresher course of two weeks in obstetrics and gynaecology will be given in the middle of the year. At the end of this period an examination will be held.

4. Paediatrics: A refresher course of two weeks in Paediatrics will be given in the middle of the year. At the end of this period an examination will be held.

5. Clinico-Pathology Conferences: Conferences with the Departments of Pathology and Radiology will be conducted by the Departments of Medicine and Surgery.

8. Regular meetings are held during the year in the Departments of Medicine and Surgery such as grand rounds, gastroenterology con-ferences, renal disease and haematology meetings, cardiothoracic medical and surgical conferences, clinical meetings, research meetings, surgical review meetings etc., at which students are welcome.

7. Community Health: Arrangements for this will be made through the Professor of Community Health.

PRIZES

The Senior Medical Staff of the Austin Hospital will award a medal to the student who receives the highest marks in the final examinations. The Smith and Nephew Prize in Surgery, valued at Ø250.00 is awarded to the student from the Clinical School who obtains the highest marks in the oral and clinical surgery examinations.

в 129

Faculty of Medicine

THE ROYAL WOMEN'S HOSPITAL

FIFTH YEAR

During the year each student at the Royal Melbourne and St. Vincent's Hospital clinical schools is required to attend The Royal Women's Hos-pital for ten weeks residence at times arranged. Of this time a preliminary two weeks' period is occupied In tutorial and lecture demonstration groups of seven or eight, conducted in wards, Out-patients' Department and Labour Ward, by the Professorial Unit. A preliminary course of formal lectures is also given. Students view twelve normal deliveries and then conduct their own deliveries under the direction of a registered medi-cal practitioner. In the remaining eight weeks, clinical instruction is conducted by mem-bers of the Clinical School. Each student is allotted to an Obstetrical and Gynaecological Unit for the whole period. Ante-Natal and Out-patient Clinics are attended at least once a week. Every patient in the Obstetrical and Gynaecology Wards is allotted to a student, and detailed records are kept by the student. Obstetrical patients are delivered, wherever possible, by the students to whom they are allotted. Students assist with operative procedures on their own gynaeco-logical patients. Each day the Receiving Obstetrical and Gynaecological Senior Associ-ates conduct a round of their own patients with the students concerned. A further course of tutorials and lecture demonstrations is conducted by the Professorial Unit.

SIXTH YEAR

Each student at the Royal Melbourne Hospital and St. Vincent's Hospital Clinical Schools is required to attend a two-week residential period at times arranged. Normal deliveries are conducted by students until they have delivered twenty cases. Lectures, tutorials, and lecture demonstra-tions are conducted by members of the Clinical School. Out-patient and Ante-Natal Clinics, Ward Rounds and Labour Ward demonstrations are attended. In addition, students attend the Special Clinics conducted in the Hospital; in particular, Sterility, Radio-Surgical, Psychiatric and Physiotherapy.

THE MERCY MATERNITY HOSPITAL

FIFTH YEAR

During the year each student at the Austin Hospital Clinical School is required to attend The Mercy Maternity Hospital for ten weeks residence at times arranged. Of this time a preliminary two-weeks' period is occu-pied in tutorial and lecture demonstration groups of six to eight, con-ducted in Wards, Out-patients' Department and Labour Ward. A prelimin-ary course of formal lectures is also given. Students view twelve normal deliveries and then conduct their own deliveries under supervision. In the remaining eight weeks, clinical instruction is conducted by the members of the Clinical School. Each student is allotted to an Obstetrical and Gynaecological Unit for the whole period of ten weeks. Antenatal and Out-patient Clinics are at-tended at least once a week.

130


Every patient in the Obstetrical and Gynaecological Wards is allotted to a student and detailed records are kept by the student. Obstetrical patients are delivered, wherever possible, by the students to whom they are allotted. Students assist with operative procedures on their own gynaeco-logical patients. Each day the Receiving Obstetrical and Gynaecological consultants con-duct a round of their patients with the students concerned. Each student performs a curettage and a forceps delivery under the direction of a member of the medical staff. Each student will be rostered to attend each of the Special Clinics in the Hospital on at least one occasion during the ten weeks residence.

SIXTH YEAR

Each student at the Austin Hospital Clinical School is required to attend a two week residential period at times arranged. Normal deliveries are con-ducted by students until they have delivered 20 patients. Lectures, tu-torials and lecture demonstrations are conducted by members of the Clinical School Out-patients and Antenatal Clinics, Ward Rounds and Labour Ward demonstrations are attended. In addition students may attend the Special Clinics conducted in the Hospital.

DEPARTMENT OF MEDICAL BIOLOGY

(THE WALTER AND ELIZA HALL INSTITUTE OF MEDICAL RESEARCH)

This is a postgraduate teaching department in which candidates may pro-ceed to the degrees of Master of Science and Doctor of Philosophy. Ex-perimental work leading to the submission of a thesis for the degree of Doctor of Medicine may also be undertaken. A number of candidates are accepted for the degree of Bachelor of Medical Science and some pro-ceeding to B.Sc. (Ions.). The Department Is organized into five main units, namely Cellular Im-munology, Cancer Research, Clinical Research, Experimental Pathology, and Biochemistry and Biophysics. In each Unit, candidates will be required to undertake research in one of the fields currently under study in the Unit, the subject to be approved by the Professor of Medical Biology, and the work to be carried out under the detailed supervision of the Unit Head and the general supervision of the Professor. Candidates will also normally be expected to attend a lecture course on Experimental Immunology and Oncology given by members of the Institute staff, and to attend the weekly seminar series. The results of research will normally be published, and a thesis will be required in addition. This thesis will normally include a brief literature review in a prescribed por-tion of the relevant field.

131

CHAPTER 9

DETAILS FOR HIGHER DEGREES

DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF MEDICINE (Regulation 3.36)

Note (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Assistant Registrar (Medicine), formerly titled Faculty Secretary, with whom the latest details of Regulation 3.36 should also be checked. (2) Candidates admitted ad eundem statum to proceed by examination and dissertation or by thesis are required to present certificates of two years' approved association with this University.

(1) FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY EXAMINATION

PART I

500-712 PHYSIOLOGY, BIOCHEMISTRY AND PHARMACOLOGY

SYLLABUS Systematic Physiology, Biochemistry and Pharmacology to the standard indicated by the prescribed books.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks: •Wright S K е ele C A and Neil E Applied Physiology 12th ed, OUP

1971 •Guyton A C Textbook of Medical Physiology, 5th ed, Saunders 1976 •Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology 4th ed, Churchill 1973 (b) Recommended for reference: As for M.B., B.S. and Campbell E J Dickenson C J and Slater J D Clinical Physiology 4th ed,

Blackwell 1975 Bowman W C and Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology, Blackwell

1978 Dayson H & Eggleton M G Starling's Principles of Human Physiology,

14th ed Churchill 1968 Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics,

5th ed Macmillan 1975 Best C H Taylor N B & Brobeck J R Physiological Basis of Medical

Practice 9th ed, Williams & Wilkins 1973 Davidson S Passmore R et al Human Nutrition and Dietetics 6th ed,

Churchill Livingstone 1975 Lehninger A L Biochemistry 2nd ed, Worth 1975 Stanbury J B Wyngaarden J B& Frederickson D S The Metabolic

Basis of Inherited Disease 3rd ed, McGraw-Hill 1972 Martin E W Hazards of Medication, Lippincott 1971 lelrin K L & Morrelli H F Clinical Pharmacology, Macmillan 1972 Passmore R & Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol II:

Pharmacology, Microbiology, General Pathology and Related Sub- jects, 2nd ed, Blackwell 1976

Wade 0 L Adverse Reactions to Drugs, Heinemann 1970 White A Handler P & Smith E L Principles of Biochemistry 5th ed,

McGraw-Hill 1973. References to the original literature will be given. Candidates are expected to be familiar with the more important of the recent developments In

132

Higher Degrees

Physiology, Biochemistry and Pharmacology and with their application to medicine.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; oral examination.

500-713 PATHOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY

SYLLABUS General and Special Pathology and Microbiology in relation to Medicine. The practical examination entails description and diagnosis of macroscopic specimens and histological preparations and commentaries thereon. It is recommended that in addition to standard textbooks of Pathology and Microbiology, the pathological and microbiological sections of some standard work on Medicine be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals published in the English language will be expected.

BOOKS Recommended as a basis of study:

Robbins S L Pathologic Basis of Disease, Saunders 1974 or Payling Wright G & Symmers W St C Systemic Pathology, 1st ed

Longmans 1967 or Anderson W A D Pathology, 6th ed Mosby 1971 Briody, В A Microbiology and Infectious Disease, McGraw-Hill 1974 Florey H General Pathology, 4th ed Lloyd-Luke 1970 Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972 Humphrey J H & White R G Immunology for Students of Medicine, 4th

ed Blackwell 1974 Fenner F & White D 0 Medical Virology 2nd ed, Academic 1976 Wright S Applied Physiology, 12th ed OUP 1971

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; practical examination; viva voce examination.

PART Ii

Candidates proceeding to MD may do so in one of two ways:

(1) By passing Part I of the examination and by the submission of a dissertation;

or

(2) by the submission of a thesis.

(2) FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING TO PART II BY DISSERTATION

Candidates proceeding to Part I1 of the Degree by dissertation, must submit three copies of a dissertation on a specific aspect of medicine (not exclusively internal medicine) which must embody some observa-tions made by the candidate and which must Include a critical review of the literature in the related field. On receipt of the dissertation, the Faculty of Medicine will determine if the subject matter is appropriate and, if so, will then appoint examiners. The examiners may require the candidate to undergo a written and/or viva voce examination.

133

Faculty of Medicine

(3) FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS

Any candidates proceeding to the degree by thesis shall submit three copies in the prescribed manner to the secretary, faculty of Medicine. The faculty will determine whether the subject matter is appropriate for the degree and, if so, will then appoint examiners. At the discretion of the examiners, candidates may be required to undergo a written and/or viva voce examination.

The faculty of Medicine has resolved that a thesis— (1) should not be any ordinary compilation from books,

(ii) nor be a mere compendium of cases, (iii) nor merely observational, (iv) but should be a substantial contribution to knowledge and its rela-

tionship to existing knowledge should be critically reviewed. This review need not be governed by section (v) hereof, and

(v) should be in a fit form for publication or be already published in ap-proved form.

A candidate who submits work which has been done in collaboration with other workers is required to submit a statement setting out the extent to which he was responsible for the initiation and prosecution of the work. The examiners shall take such steps as they think fit to assess the value of the candidate's share of the joint work and shall be satisfied that the individual candidate has been responsible for making a substantial con-tribution to the theory or practice of medicine.

DEGREE OF MASTER OF SURGERY (Regulation 3.37)

Note (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Secretary, Faculty of Medicine. (2) Before submitting a thesis for examination a candidate must possess a Bachelor of Medicine and a Bachelor of Surgery degree of not less than six years standing. (3) Candidates must satisfy the faculty that they have adequate experi-ence and training in general surgery or in any of its specialities. (4) Candidates admitted ad eundem statum are required to present certificates of two years approved association with this University.

NATURE OF THESIS

A Candidate shall submit three copies of his thesis in the prescribed manner to the Secretary, Faculty of Medicine. The faculty will determine whether the subject matter is appropriate for the degree, and if so, will then appoint examiners. At the discretion of the examiners, candidates may be required to undergo a written and/or viva voce examination. The Faculty of Medicine has resolved that a thesis:

(i) should not be any ordinary compilation of books, (ii) nor be a mere compendium of cases, (iii) nor merely observational, (iv) but should be a substantial contribution to knowledge and its rela-

tionship to existing knowledge should be critically reviewed. This review need not be governed by section (v) hereof,

(v) should be in a fit form for puЫ ication or be already published in approved form.

134

Higher Degrees

A candidate who submits work which has been done in collaboration with other workers is required to submit a statement setting out the extent to which he was responsible for the initiation and prosecution of the work. The examiners shall take such steps as they think fit to assess the value of the candidate's share of the joint work, and shall be satisfied that the individual candidate has been responsible for making a substantial con-tribution to the theory or practice of Medicine.

DEGREE OF MASTER OF GYNAECOLOGY AND OBSTETRICS

(Regulation 3.38)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the secretary, faculty of Medicine. (2) Before entering for the examination in Part I candidates are required to present a certificate of practice of two years spent in a resident ap-pointment. (3) Before entering for the examination in Part 11 candidates are re-quired to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates admitted ad еип dem statum are required, in addition, to present certifi-cates of two years' approved association with this University. (4) Before entering for examination by thesis candidates must comply with experience requirements specified for Parts I and 11 by examination.

(1) FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY EXAMINATION

PART I

516-731 ANATOMY

The examination may include questions relative to the anatomy of the female pelvis, mammary gland, abdomen, regions adjacent thereto and the new-born child.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied, 32nd or subsequent ed Long-

mans or Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human Body

Faber 1965 or Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy, 10th or subsequent ed OUP 1964 In addition, candidates are expected to keep themselves Informed of work appearing in periodical literature.


516-732 EMBRYOLOGY AND HISTOLOGY

The examination may include questions relative to the normal and ab-normal development (structure and function) of the embryo, foetus and new-born child, their component parts, the placenta and the extra-embryonic membranes.

135

Faculty of Medicine

The histology of the female genito-urinary system, the mammary glande, the liver and the endocrine glands.


Аге y L B Developmental Anatomy, 6th or subsequent ed Saunders or Patten B M Human Embryology, 3rd or subsequent ed McGraw-Hill Roberts J A F In Introduction to Medical Genetics, 4th ed OUP 1970 Ham A W Histology, 7th ed Lippincott 1974 In addition, candidates are expected to keep themselves informed of work appearing in current periodical literature.


500-732 PHYSIOLOGY, BIOCHEMISTRY AND PHARMACOLOGY

Candidates will be required to know reasonably well the physiology of the alimentary, circulatory, muscular, nervous, respiratory and urinary systems, and to have a detailed knowledge of the physiology of genital and endocrine systems and of the foetus. Questions may include aspects which require a knowledge of both general and special pharmacology of the preceding matters. The examination may cover dietetics, digestion, general and intermediary metabolism and its regulation; the chemistry and metabolic effects of endocrine products. A detailed knowledge of these aspects In relation to the genital system and the foetus is expected.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook:

•Best C H Taylor N B and Brobeck J R Physiological Basis of Medical Practice 9th ed, Williams & Wilkins 1973

and • Passmore R & Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol 1:

Anatomy, Biochemistry, Physiology and Related Subjects, 2nd ed, Blackwell 1976

(b) Recommended for reference: Ruch T C and Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics 20th ed, Saunders

1973 Mountcastle V B ed Medical Physiology 13th ed, Mosby 1973 Carey H M Modern Trends in Human Reproductive Physiology, Butter-

worth 1963 Shearman R P ed Human Reproductive Physiology, Blackwell 1972 Barnes A C Intra-Uterine Development, Lea & Febiger 1968 Bourne G L Human Amnion and Chorion, Lloyd-Luke 1962 Claye A & Boume A British Obstetrical and Gynaecological Practice, 3rd

ed Heinemann 1963 Dawes G S Foetal and Neonatal Physiology, Year Book Med Pub 1968 Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics,

5th ed, Macmillan 1975 Hytten F E & Leitch I The Physiology of Human Pregnancy 2nd ed,

Blackwell 1971 James V H T Recent Advances in Endocrinology, 8th ed Churchill 1968 Catt IC J An ABC of Endocrinology, Lancet 1971 Laurence D R Clinical Pharmacology, 4th ed Churchill 1973 Lehninger A L Biochemistry 2nd ed, Worth 1975 Martin E W Hazards of Medication, Lippincott 1971

136

Higher Degrees

leirin K L & Morrelli H F Clinical Pharmacology, Macmillan 1972 Passmore R & Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol II:

Pharmacology, Microbiology, General Pathology and Related Sub- jects, Blackwell 1970

White A Handler P and Smith E L Principles of Biochemistry 5th ed, McGraw-Hill 1973

Candidates are expected to be familiar with the more importent of the recent developments in Physiology, Biochemistry and Pharmacology and with their application to medicine.

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers; oral examination.

PART II

The experience required of a candidate before presenting for Part II shall be-

1. Practice of at least five years since graduation. 2. The special training required in Obstetrics shall consist of not less

than one year's experience as Resident Medical Officer in the Ob-stetrics Department of The Royal Women's Hospital, Melbourne, or Its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, all hospitals or departments recognized as Obstetric Clinical Schools by Australian Universities shall have equivalent standing; in the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized, the faculty of Medicine will re-quire from a candidate particular details of his experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Degree.

3. The special training required in Gynaecology shall consist of not less than one year's experience as Resident Medical Officer in the Gynae-cology Department of one or other of the Clinical Schools of the University of Melbourne or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, similar standing to that detailed in paragraph 2 (above) will be re-quired, mutatis mutandis.

500-733 PATHOLOGY AND MICROBIOLOGY

(In relation to Obstetrics and Gynaecology)

PATHOLOGY

The examination will include General Pathology and a special knowledge of the pathology of diseases peculiar to women. The practical examina-tion will test the candidates' ability to recognize and interpret specimens illustrating relevant morbid anatomy and histology. In addition to the standard textbooks, the pathology sections of stand-ard works should be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in cur-rent periodicals in the English language will be expected.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972 Novak E Gynecological and Obstetrical Pathology 7th ed, Saunders

1974 Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 4th ed, Churchill 1974

MICROBIOLOGY

The examination will require candidates to have a knowledge of:

137

Faculty of Medicine

(a) the general biological characters of bacteria and viruses; (b) a detailed knowledge of those organisms responsible for infections of

the genito-urinary system; (c) problems of infection including epidemiology and cross-infection In

hospitals; (d) ontogeny, organization and function of the immune system and its

role in disease; (e) principles of chemotherapy, sterilization and disinfection.

BOOkS Recommended for reference: Briody B A Microbiology and Infectious Disease, McGraw-Hili 1974 Cruickshank R Medical Microbiology Vol I 12th ed, Churchill Living-

stone 1973 Fenner F & White D O Medical Virology 2nd ed, Academic 1976 Humphrey J H and White R G immunology for Students of Medicine

4th ed, Blackwell 1974 O'Grady F & Brumfitt W Urinary Tract Infection, OUP 1968 Relevant microbiology topics in current Australian, American and English

medical journals.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test (Pathology only); viva voce examination.

500-734 OBSTETRICS, INCLUDING NEO-NATAL PAEDIATRICS AND GYNAECOLOGY

Candidates will be expected to have a thorough knowledge of both subjects, including a knowledge of recent advances in current literature in the English language.

Books Recommended for reference: Kerr J M M Operative Obstetrics 9th ed by Moir J C and Myerscough

P R, Bailliere Tindall and Cassell 1977 Stal[worthy J A & Bourse G L Recent Advances in Obstetrics and Gynae-

cology, 12th ed Churchill 1977 Greenhill J P and Friedman E A Biological Principles and Modern Prac-

tice of Obstetrics, Saunders 1974 Bonney V Howkins J and Stallworthy J A Bonney's Gynaecological

Surgery 8th ed, Bailliere Tindall 1974 Te Linde R W & Mattingly R F Operative Gynecology, rev 4th ed

Lippincott 1970 Jeffcoate T N A Principles of Gynaecology, 4th ed Butterworth 1975 Novak E R Jones G S and Jones H W Novak's Textbook of Gyna-

ecology 9th ed, Williams & Wilkins 1975

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper in Obstetrics; one 3-hour written paper in Gynaecology; clinical and viva voce examination in Ob-stetrics and in Gynaecology.

FOR CANDIDATES PROCEEDING BY THESIS

NATURE OF THESIS

Any candidates proceeding to the degree by thesis shall give notice of the fact in writing and shall name the subject and title of the thesis and provide a short synopsis of the scope and character of the work under-taken. The faculty of Medicine will then determine whether or not the candidate may proceed by thesis. If the thesis is acceptable, the faculty

(2)

138

Higher Degrees

of Medicine will then appoint examiners to consider the thesis and such examiners will be instructed to report upon the merit of the work sub-mitted and to give an Indication as to what portions of Part I and/or Part II of the examination shall be required of the candidate in addition to the thesis. It is appropriate for the examiners to recommend, if the thesis be of outstanding merit, that the candidate be exempt from the entire ex-amination.

The faculty of Medicine has resolved that a thesis— (i) should not be any ordinary compilation from books, (ii) nor be a mere compendium of cases, (iii) nor merely observational, (iv) but should be a substantial contribution to knowledge, (v) should be in fit form for publication or be already published In ap-

proved form and (vi) should show work at least equal to that involved in preparation for

the examination in Obstetrics and Gynaecology for the Degree of M.G.O. by written questions.

A candidate who submits work which has been done in collaboration with other workers is required to submit a statement setting out the extent to which he was responsible for the initiation and prosecution of the work. The examiners shall take such steps as they think fit to assess the value of the candidate's share of the joint work, and shall be satisfied that the individual candidate has been responsible for making a substantial contribution to the theory or practice or both of Gynaecology and Ob-stetrics or Gynaecology or Obstetrics. The examination in Clinical Obstetrics and Gynaecology for candidates proceeding by thesis may involve the examination of the candidate in any matter concerned with the practice of Clinical Obstetrics and Gynaeco-logy.

139

CHAPTER 10

POSTGRADUATE MEDICAL DIPLOMAS SUBJECT NUMBERS

DIPLOMA IN OPHTHALMOLOGY-

516-801 Part 1—Anatomy 536-801

Physiology and Pharmacology 576-801 Part Il—Ophthalmology 631-801

Pathology (including Microbiology)

DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY- 516-811 Part 1—Anatomy 536-811

Physiology 577-811 Part II—Otolaryngology

Pathology (including Microbiology)

DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY-

516-821 Year I—Anatomy 555-820 Radiodiagnosis 555-821 Physics 555-822 Year II—Radiodiagnosis 531-821 Pathology 555-823 Year lli—Radiodiagnosis

DIPLOMA IN THERAPEUTIC RADIOLOGY-

516-831 Part I—Anatomy 531-831

Pathology 555-831

Basic Radiotherapeutic Physics 555-832 Part Il—Radiotherapy

DIPLOMA IN ANAESTHETICS-

516-851 Part I—Anatomy 536-851

Physiology 534-851

Pharmacology 531-851 Part Il—Internal Medicine 556-851

Anaesthetics

DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE- 516-841 Part 1—Neuroanatomy 536-841

Physiology 554-841

Medical Psychology 554-003

Introduction to Clinical Psychiatry 554-842 Part II—Psychiatry Comprising 554-004

General Psychiatry 554-005

Psychotherapy and Psychopathology 554-006

General Medicine 554-007

Neurology and Neuropathology 554-008

Child Psychiatry

140

Diplomas

DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY-

577-861 Acoustics 577-865 Anatomy and Physiology 536-861 Biophysics 171-861 Psychology 577-862 Audiology 577-864 Otolaryngology

141

DIPLOMA IN PUBLIC HEALTH

(Regulation 3.39)

The course and examination for this Diploma are suspended.

DIPLOMA IN OPHTHALMOLOGY

(Regulation 3.40)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the secretary, faculty of Medicine.

(2) Before entering for the examination in Part I candidates are re-quired to present certificates of practice (at least three years in a general hospital). (3) Before entering for the examination in Part II candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates ad-mitted ed еи nd ет stetom are required, in addition, to present certificates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

PART I

516-801 ANATOMY

The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of the orbit and its contents, the anatomy of those regions adjacent to the orbit, those parts of the central nervous system concerned with visual functions and the relevant histology and embryology.


Wolff E The Anatomy of the Eye and the Orbit, 5th ed Lewis 1961 Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology, Vols 1, Il and Ill, Kimpton 1968

1961 1963-4 Whitnall S E Anatomy of the Human Orbit, OUP 1932 Mann 1 C Developmental Abnormalities of the Eye, 2nd ed CUP 1957 Mann I C The Development of the Human Eye, 3rd ed Grune & Stratton

1964 Агеу L B Developmental Anatomy, 6th or subsequent ed Saunders or Patten B M Human Embryology, 3rd or subsequent ed McGraw-Hill Ham A W Histology, 7th ed Lippincott 1974 or Bloom W & Fawcett D Textbook of Histology 10th ed, Saunders 1975 In addition, candidates are expected to keep themselves informed of work appearing in periodical literature.


536-801 PHYSIOLOGY AND PHARMACOLOGY

(i) Cellular and systemic physiology, with special emphasis on sys-tems of importance to the ophthalmologist, e.g. cardiovascular, nervous and endocrine systems.

142

Diplomas

(ii) Physiology of the visual system and of the associated orbital struc-tures. This is to include: basic ideas concerning visual perception, visual sensitivity, brightness discrimination, adaptation, colour vision, the per-ception of space, form and movement, stereopsis; retinal function, includ-ing elementary photochemistry and neural organization; central mecha-nisms of vision, including the structure and function of the lateral geni-culate body and visual cortex, neural coding of light intensity, colour, movement and depth in field of vision; visual functions of prestriate, inferotempora1 and frontal cortex; subcortical neural mechanisms of vision—the retinotectal system. The generation and maintenance of the optical image on the retina; accommodation, and pupillary control. Extra-ocular muscle function in relation to image formation, conjugate eye movements and binocular vision. The physiology of ìntraocular fluids, of the cornea and lens. Lacrimal secretion.

(iii) Physical optics. Geometrical optics, including thick lenses, spectacle lenses, prisms, optics of contact lenses and of devices for the correction of subnormal visual acuity. Optical principles of instruments used in ophthalmology.

Illumination. Physiological optics, Including the following: Optical system of the eye-Anomalies of the optical system of the eye including ametropia, accom-modative anomalies and anisonvetropia. Binocular vision and its anomalies, both motor and sensory. Principles of clinical refraction. Measurement of visual acuity. Investi-gation and treatment of the optical and motor anomalies of the eyes, together with the anomalies of binocular perception. (iv) Pharmacology. The mechanisms of action of drugs used for the in-vestigation and treatment of ocular disease, particularly mydriatrics and cycloplegics, miotics, local anaesthetics, antiglaucoma agents, drugs for treating infections and diagnostic agents. The general principles of drug absorption and the special preparations of drugs for ophthalmic use. The ocular and general side-effects of drugs.

BOOKS recommended

Physiology

Mountcastle V B ed Medical Physiology 13th ed, Mosby 1973 Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics 20th ed Saunders

1973 Dayson H Physiology of the Eye 3rd ed Churchill 1972 Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology Vol IV Kimpton 1968 Handbook of Sensory Physiology Vol VII 1 2 3 and 4, Springer-Verlag

1972 Best C H Taylor N B and Brobeck J R Physiological Basis of Medical

Practice 9th ed, Williams & Wilkins 1973

Optics Dayson H Physiology of the Eye (Sections Ill IV & V only) 3rd ed,

Churchill 1972 Duke-Elder S System of Ophthalmology Vol. V, Kimpton 1970 Duke-Elder S S у stem of Ophthalmology Vol IV (selected portions only)

Kimpton 1973 Dayson H The Eye Vol 4, Part 1 2nd ed Academic 1969 Bennett A G Emsiey end Swaine's Ophthalmic Lenses, Hatton 1968

143

Faculty of Medicine

Bennett A G Optics of Contact Lenses 4th ed, Assoc of Dispensing Opticians 1966

Fincham W H A Optics 7th ed, Hatton 1965 Reinecke R D & Herme R J Refraction A Programmed Text, Appleton-

Century-Crofts 1965 Glossary of terms relating to ophthalmic lenses, British Standard 3521

1962

Pharmacology

Ellis P P & Smith D L Handbook of Ocular Therapeutics and Pharma-cology 3rd ed, Mosby 1969

O'Connor D P H The Actions and Uses of Ophthalmic Drugs, Barrie & Jenkins 1972

Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics 5th ed, Macmillan 1975

Bowman W C and Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology, Blackwell 1978

The conjoint medical library of the Australian College of Ophthalmolo-gists (А .М .А .) and the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, contains an extensive literature relating to ophthalmology. COURSES Information on courses which will be conducted during the year can be obtained from the Department of Ophthalmology. EXAMINATIONS Two three-hour written examinations. Half of the first paper will deal with physiology and the remainder with pharmacology. Half of the second paper will also deal with physiology, and the remainder with optics. Some candidates may also have an oral examination.

PART II The experience required of a candidate presenting for Part 11 shall be- 1. A period of three years' general hospital experience of inpatient

Medicine and Surgery. 2. Not less than three years' experience as Resident Medical Officer

in The Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, Melbourne, or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, all hospitals or departments recognized as Ophthalmic Clinical Schools by Australasian Universi-ties shall have equivalent standing. In the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized, the faculty of Medicine will require from a candidate particular details of his experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Diploma. The candidate must also present evidence of having had experience of ophthalmology in relation to internal medicine.

3. Evidence of having performed under the supervision of one or more consultants in ophthalmology all the common procedures in the specialty. These procedures shall include the diagnostic and treat-ment techniques, including the conduct of pre-operative, operative and post-operative procedures.

576-801 OPHTHALMOLOGY The examination may include questions relevant to any aspects of the medicine and surgery of abnormal conditions affecting the visual appartus and adnexae. BOOKS The conjoint library of the Australian College of Ophthalmologists

(А .М .А .) and the Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital contains an extensive literature relating to ophthalmology.

144

Diplomas

EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, one in each of Ophthalmic Medicine and Ophthalmic Surgery. These papers will include questions designed to test the candidate's knowledge of the general medical and general surgical aspects of the conditions related to the specialty. Clinical ex-amination, Including estimation of errors of refraction and of visual field defects, one or other being compulsory.

531-801 PATHOLOGY (INCLUDING MICROBIOLOGY)

PATHOLOGY

The examination in Pathology will test the candidate's knowledge of the general pathological processes and of the special pathology of conditions effecting the apparatus of vision, adnexae and adjacent structures. It will include the recognition and Interpretation of specimens illustrating rele-vant morbid anatomy and histology. It is recommended that, In addition to standard textbooks of Pathology. the pathological sections of standard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge of relevant pathological topics appearing in current medical periodicals in the English language will be expected.


Hogan M American Academy of Ophthalmology Ophthalmic Pathology, Saunders 1962

Greer C H Ocular Pathology 2nd ed, Blackwell 1972 Reese A B Tumors of the Eye 2nd ed, Floeber 1963 Florey H General Pathology, 4th ed Lloyd-Luke 1970 or Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 4th ed, Churchill 1974 Hurley .j V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972

MICROBIOLOGY

The examination will require candidates to have a knowledge of: (a) the general biological characters of micro-organisms; (b) a detailed knowledge of those organisms responsible for infections

of the eye; (c) epidemiology, including cross-infection in hospitals; (d) the principles of chemotherapy, sterilization and disinfection; (e) organization and function of the immune system and its role in

disease.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Briody B A Microbiology and Infectious Disease, McGraw-Hill 1974 or Cruickshank R Medical Microbiology Vol I 12th ed, Churchill Living-

stone 1973 Fenner F & White D O Medical Virology 2nd ed, Academic 1976 Humphrey J H & White R G Immunology for Students of Medicine, 4th

ed Blackwell 1974 Relevant microbiological topics in current American, Australian and

English medical journals.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test; oral examination.

145

Faculty of Medicine

DIPLOMA IN LARYNGOLOGY AND OTOLOGY (Regulation 3.40)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the secretary, faculty of Medicine. (2) Before entering for the examination in Part 1 candidates are required to present certificates of practice (at least two years, including one year spent in a resident appointment in a general hospital). (3) Before entering for the examination in Part 11 candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates ad-mitted ed eundem statum are required, In addition, to present certificates of three months approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

PART 1

516-811 ANATOMY The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of the head, neck and thorax, with special reference to the ear, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi and bronchial tree, and oesophagus, to-gether with the histology and development of these parts. Candidates will also be expected to be familiar with those parts of the central nervous system associated with the functions of the parts outlined above.


Frazer J E Anatomy of the Human Skeleton, 6th ed Churchill 1965 Gray's Anatomy. Descriptive and Applied, 32nd or subsequent ed Long-

mans or Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy, 10th or subsequent ed OUP or Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human Body,

Faber1965 Brock R C Anatomy of the Bronchial Tree, 2nd ed OUP 1954 Negus V E Comparative Anatomy and Physiology of the Larynx, Heine-

mann 1949 Negus V E The Comparative Anatomy and Physiology of the Nose and

Paranasal Sinuses, Livingstone 1958 Аг eу L B Developmental Anatomy, 6th or subsequent ed Saunders or Patten B M Human Embryology, 3rd or subsequent ed McGraw-Hill Bloom W & Fawcett D Textbook of Histology 10th ed, Saunders 1975 In addition, candidates are expected to keep themselves informed of work appearing in periodical literature.


536-811 PHYSIOLOGY

Systemic physiology: Cardiovascular respiratory, gastrointestinal and endocrine systems. Detailed study of the nervous system. Physiological functions of particular importance in the field of otolaryngology will be emphasized.

146

Diplomas

BOO К S (a) Prescribed textbooks:

•Mountcastle V B Medical Physiology, 13th ed Mosby 1973 or •Ruch T C & Patton H D Physiology and Biophysics 20th ed, Saunders

1973


К eidel W D and Neff W D Handbook of Sensory Physiology, vol 5 i Auditory System anatomy physiology ear, Springer Verlag 1974

Hinchcliffe R and Harrison D Scientific Foundations of Otolaryngology, Heinemann 1976

Tobias J V Foundations of Modern Auditory Theory, Academic Press

1970 Bekesy G von Experiments In Hearing Tr and ed by E G Wever, McGraw-

Hill 1960

EXAMINATION One 3-hours' written examination. Candidates may also be called for an oral examination.

PART li The experience required of a candidate presenting for Part Il shall be-

1. A period of two years as a resident medical officer in a general hospital with experience equivalent to four months as Resident Medical Officer to each of In-patient Medicine and Surgery.

2. The special training required In Otolaryngology shall consist of not less than three years' experience as Resident Medical Officer in the ENT Department of The Royal Victorian Eye and Ear Hospital, Mel-bourne, or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, all hospitals or departments recognized as ENT Clinical Schools by Australasian universities shall have equivalent standing. In the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized, the faculty of Medicine will require from a candidate particular details of his experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Diploma.

3. Documentary evidence of having performed under the supervision of one or more consultants in otolaryngology all the common pro-cedures of the specialty and obtained a satisfactory level of com-petence. These procedures shall include the diagnostic and treat-ment techniques, Including the conduct of pre-operative, operative and post-operative procedures.

577-811 OTOLARYNGOLOGY This subject consists of two sections, (a) Otolaryngology and (b) Pathology including Microbiology.

OTOLARYNGOLOGY The examination may include questions relating to the etiology, patho-logy, diagnosis, treatment (including operative) and prevention of any disease affecting or adjacent to the respiratory pathways, the auditory mechanisms and the alimentary tract as far as the cardiac sphincter. In addition, candidates will be expected to possess a sound knowledge of the general medical and general surgical aspects of all conditions related to the specialty.

147

Faculty of Medicine


Brown J B and McDowell F Plastic Surgery of the Nose rev 2nd print-ing, Thomas 1965

Davis H and Silverman S R eds Hearing and Deafness 3rd ed, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970

Friedman I Pathology of the Ear. Blackwell 1973 Mawson S R Diseases of the Ear 3rd ed, Lewis 1974 Scott-Brown Ballantyne J and Groves J Diseases of the Ear, Nose and

Throat 3rd ed, Butterworth 1972 Shambaugh G E Surgery of the Ear 2nd ed, Saunders 1967 Stell P and Maran A G D Head and Neck Surgery, Heinemann 1972 Wilson T G Diseases of the Ear Nose and Throat in Children 2nd ed.

Heinemann 1962


Anson B J and Donaldson J A Surgical Anatomy of the Temporal Bone and Ear 2nd ed, Saunders 1973

Brain W R Clinocal Neurology 4th ed, OUP 1973 Burns W Noise and Man 2nd ed, Murray 1973 Fomon S Cosmetic Surgery: Principles and Practice, Lippincott 1960 Fomon S апд Bell J Rhinoplasty—New Concepts, Thomas 1970 Hinderer K H Fundamentals of Anatomy and Surgery of the Nose,

Aesculapius 1971 Jackson C Bronchoscopy and Oesophagoscopy: A Manual of Parorel

Endoscopy and Laryngeal Surgery 2nd ed, Saunders 1927 Katz J ed Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Williams & Wilkins 1972 Kleinsasser O Microlaryngoscipy and Endolaryngeal Micro-Surgery;

Techniques and Typical Cases trans Hoffman P W. Saunders 1968 Linthlcum F H and Schwartzman J Micropathology of the Temporel

Bone, Saunders 1973 Lore J M An Atlas of Head and Neck Surgery 2 vols 2nd ed, Saunders

1973 Macintosh, R and Ostiere M Local Analgesia Heed and Neck rev re-

print, Williams & Wilkins 1967 Moss W T and Brand W N Therapeutic Radiology: Rationale Technique

Results 3rd ed, Mosby 1969 Rees T D and Wood-Smith D Cosmetic Facial Surgery, Saunders 1973 Schucknacht H F Chasin W D and Kurkjan J M Stereoscopic Atlas of

MastoidotympanDplastic Surgery, Mosby 1966 Stevenson R S & Guthrie D A History of Oto-laryngology, Livingstone

1949 Tobias, J V ed Foundations of Modern Auditory Theory 2 vols, Aca-

demic 1970-1972 Wolferman A Reconstructive Surgery of the Middle Ear, Grune & Stг at-

ton 1970

Current Journals

Acta Oto Laryngologica Annals of Otology, Rhinology & Laryngology Archives of Otolaryngology Audiology Clinical Otolaryngology Journal of Laryngology and Otology

148

Diplomas

Journal of the Oto-Laryngological Society of Australia Laryngoscope Scandinavian Audiology

EXAMINATION Three 3-hours' papers. Clinical examination, viva voce examination.

PATHOLOGY INCLUDING MICROBIOLOGY

Pathology

The examination will include General Pathology, and will require a special knowledge of pathological conditions affecting the ear and adjacent structures, nose, throat, pharynx, larynx, trachea, bronchi, lungs and oeso-phagus. The practical examination will test the candidates' ability to recognize and interpret specimens Illustrating relevant morbid anatomy and histology. It is recommended that, in addition to standard textbooks of Pathology, the pathological sections of standard works on the specialty be studied. A knowledge of relevant pathological topics appearing in current medical periodicals in the English language will be expected.

BOOKS Recommended as a basis of study:

Turner A L ed Diseases of the Nose, Throat end Ear 7th ed, Wright 19 68

Walter J B and Israel M S General Pathology 4th ed, Churchill 1974 Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972 Radiation Protection Standards NH & MRC 1964

Microbiology

The examination will require candidates to have a knowledge of:

(a) the general biological characters of bacteria and viruses; (b) a detailed knowledge of those organisms responsible for infections

of the ear, nose and throat; (c) epidemiology, including cross-infection in hospitals; (d) organization and function of the immune system and its role in

disease. (e) principles of chemotherapy, sterilization and disinfection.


Briody B A Microbiology end Infectious Disease, McGraw-Hill 1974 Cruickshank R Medical Microbiology Vol I 12th ed, Churchill Living-

stone 1973 Fenner F and White D 0 Medical Virology 2nd ed, Academic 1976 Humphrey J H & White R G Immunology for Students of Medicine, 4th

ed Blackwell 1974 Relevant microbiological topics in current American, Australian and English medical journals.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test; oral examination.

149

Faculty of Medicine

DIPLOMA IN DIAGNOSTIC RADIOLOGY (Regulation 3.406) Note. (1 ) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the Secretary, Faculty of Medicine. Candidates are required to present the following documents— (a) certificates of medical practice, at least two years or its equivalent,

in a resident medical appointment in a general hospital approved by the University, including four months of experience in each of general Medicine and Surgery, or the equivalent.

(b) evidence that the candidate has been appointed to a full-time position in a department of Diagnostic Radiology of a general hospital approved by the University.

(2) Before entering for the examination candidates are required to present the following documents—

(a) certificates of attendance at the various lecture courses and tu-torials as specified below.

(b) certificates, signed by the Directors of Diagnostic Radiology of the various departments in which the candidate has trained, to in-

dicate that the three-year training programme, as specified below, of practical training in Radiodiagnosis has been completed satis-factorily.

(c) evidence that he has passed the examinations in Anatomy and Physics as prescribed by the Royal Australasian College of Radiolo-gists, or its equivalent, as recognised by Faculty.

EXAMINATION The examination will be held in April and October. Candidates will be examined orally and there will be a written film reporting test. Candidates may be examined on all aspects of the Course, but the emphasis will be on knowledge expected of a consultant general radiologist.

YEAR 1

516-821 ANATOMY

The examination may include questions covering any aspect of human anatomy but with particular reference to those structures demonstrable by radiographical techniques.


Frazer J E Anatomy of the Human Skeleton, 6th ed Churchill 1965 Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied, 32nd or subsequent ed Long-

mans or Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy, 10th or subsequent ed OUP or Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human Body,

Faber 1965 Аг eу L B Developmental Anatomy, 6th or subsequent ed Saunders or Patten B M Human Embryology, 3rd or subsequent ed McGraw-Hill


Meschan I Anatomy Basic to Radiology, Saunders 1975 Hamilton W J Simon G & Hamilton S G Surface and Radiological

Anatomy, Macmillan 1975

150

Diplomas

In addition, candidates are expected to keep themselves informed of work appearing in periodical literature.

555-821 PHYSICS

The transformer: principles, construction, transformation ratio, regu-lation, efficiency, current and voltage limits calibration. Special features of diagnostic x-ray transformer. Auto transformer. Thermionic currents, diode valve and solid state recitifiers. (As back-ground knowledge only, it is recommended that candidates revise the following aspects of Physics studied previously: Direct current electricity, including Ohm's Law; simple treatment of voltage, current resistance, power, capacity, heating and magnetic effects of a current. Electro-magnetic induction, Lenz's Law, Simple theory of alternating current, wave form and fre-quency, RMS and peak voltage and current). The electro-magnetic spec-trum. Production and properties of x-rays; general and characteristic x-rays; distribution of energy in an x-ray spectrum. Absorption and scattering of x-rays and practical factors influencing processes. The diagnostic x-ray tube; principles of operation and construction; line and dual focus tubes, stationary and rotating anode tubes, grid con-trolled tubes; rating charts and cooling curves for x-ray tubes; causes of x-ray tube failure. High tension circuits used in diagnostic x-ray equipment with relative advantages and disadvantages of each self-rectified, four valve, three phase and condenser discharge circuits. Control of high voltage and current in x-ray equipment. Special features of shock-proof equipment. Auxiliary apparatus for x-ray equipments in-cluding timers (hand, valve, synchronous motor, impulse, electronic, photo-electric and ionization types); stabilizers; metres; overload pro-tection; line voltage compensation; tube and filament current boosters; monitor controlled equipment. Factors determining the quality of radiographic and flouroscopic images. X-ray film: structure; sensitivity; characteristic curves. Processing of films; function of developer and fixer; effect of processing procedures on film quality; manual and automatic processing; processing faults in films. Storage of films. Darkroom planning and procedures. Intensifying screens Including design, construction, speed, and detail, care of inten-sifying screens and cassettes. Scattered radiation and methods of minimizing the effect of scattered radiation on the radiographic and fluorescent images (including beam defining devices, stationary, and moving grids). Physical principles underlying special radiographic pro-cedures and equipment (including tomography, stereoradlography, local-ization of foreign bodies, cineradiography, photofluorography, high kilo-voltage radiography, soft tissue radiography, enlargement techniques,

-plane radiography and filmchangers, contrast media, substraction techniques). Physical principles of fluoroscopy; limitation of the eye in conventional fluoroscopy; image intensification and television chains; spot film radiography; minor cameras used in fluoroscopy. Nature of radioactivity and radioactive decay; the curie; half-life (physi-cal, biological and effective). Nature and properties of alpha, beta and gamma radiations. Positrons and annihilation radiation. Staff e and radio-isotopes; principles of production of radio-isotopes and radio-pharmaceuticals (illustrated by materials more commonly used in medical diagnosis). Principles of use of radio-Isotopes in medical diag-nosis. Physical principles of methods of detection and measurement of radioactivity. Ionization chambers; Geiger counters; scintillation and

151

Faculty of Medicine

proportional counters; organ imaging equipment and application of these equipments in medical diagnosis. Quality control of radio-pharma-ceuticals. Radiological protection including the protection of personnel patients and the public in use of x-rays and radio-isotopes in medical diagnosis including dose limits, working rules, personnel monitoring, design and layout of radiology and nuclear medicine departments, mean bone marrow and genetic doses, disposal of radioactive waste, trans-port and storage of radioactive isotopes.

BOOKS

•van der Plaats G J Medical X-ray Technique 3rd ed, Philips Technical Library 1969

Jaundrell-Thompson F & Ashworth W J X-ray Physics end Equipment, Blackwell Scientific Publications 1970

Chesney D N & M O Radiographic Photography, Blackwell Scientific Publications 1965

• Wagner Henry N Principles of Nuclear Medicine, Saunders 1968 Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Pro-

tection, ICRP Publication 9 Pergamon Press 1966 'Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Pro-

tection, ICRP Publication 15 Pergamon Press 1970 Radiological Hazards to Patients, Second Report of the Committee

HMSO 1960 •Revised Radiation Protection Standards for Individuals Exposed to Ioniz-

ing Radiation, National Health and Medical Research Council 1967 'Dose Equivalents, Maximum Permissible Doses and Dose Limits of

Ionizing Radiation, National Health and Medical Research Council, 1969

'Minimizing of Radiological Hazards to Patients, National Health and Medical Research Council 1966

Notes on Medical Procedure for Radiation Accidents and Radioactive Contamination, National Health and Medical Research Council 1968

(Copies of NH & MRC publications may be obtained free of charge from the Secretary, National Health and Medical Research Council, PO Box 100, Curtin, ACT 2605.)

555-822 RADIODIAGNOSIS

The course is over three years and candidates are expected to have an adequate knowledge of:

(a) The radiographic techniques required in the examination of all parts of the body, including a knowledge of patient positioning, equipment, radiographic factors, recording methods and process-ing.

(b) The interpretation of the results of radiography and report writing. (c) The procedural techniques required in special radiological examin-

ations and the hazards of performing such procedures Including the management of the complications.

(d) The roles of isotopic and ultrasonic imaging and computerised axial tomography.

(e) The principles of protection of patients and personnel against radi-ation hazards.

(f) Departmental organization and the keeping of records. The course will include

152

Diplomas

Three years of full-time practical training in a Department of Diagnostic Radiology of an approved hospital. This training programme is orientated towards general Radiology but will include experience in paediatric, obstetrical and gynaecol- gical radiology, isotopic imaging as well as tuition in the techniques of specialised radiological investigation of the gastrointestinal tract, binary system, urinary tract, bronchial tree, female genital tract, central nervous system and cardiovascular system. Lecture demonstrations covering the Radiology of the various systems. Weekly film reading tutorials. Opportunities for study of the audio-visual programmes in the film library of the Department.

In the first year the academic course will include a series of tutorials in radiodiagnosis and radiography.


(During the three years of the course.)

General—

Sutton and Grainter A Textbook of Radiology 1st ed, Livingstone Keats T E An Atlas of Normal Roentgen Variants, Medical Pub Year

Book 1973 Lasser Elliot C Dynamic Factors in Roentgen Diagnosis, Williams &

Wilkins 1967 Shanks S C and Kerley P eds Textbook of x-ray Diagnosis 2nd ed,

Lewis

Radiography and Radiographic Anatomy— Clarke K C Positioning in Radiography 5th ed, Heinemann 1973 Meschar I Radiographic Positioning and Related Anatomy, Saunders

1968 Meschan I An Atlas of Normal Radiographic Anatomy, Saunders 1957

Central Nervous System and Head- Prendergrass E P Schaffer J P and bades P J Head and Neck in Roent-

gen Diagnosis, Thomas 1957 Hutchinson A C W Dental and Oral X-ray Diagnosis, Livingstone 1954 Shapiro R Myelography 2nd ed, Mед iса l Pub Year Book, 1968 Traveras J M and Wood E H Diagnostic Neuroradiology, Williams &

Wilkins 1964

Paediatrics- Caffey J Paediatric X-ray Diagnosis 4th ed, Medical Pub' Year Book

Skeletal System & Soft Tissues— Murray R 0 and Jacobson H G The Radiology of Skeletal Disorders,

Churchill Livingstone 1971 Kohler A Borderlands of the Normal end Early Pathological In Skeletal

Roentgenology English trans, Grune & Stratton 1956 Egan B L Mammography, Thomas 1964 G. I. Tract- Margulis and Burhenne Alimentary Tract Roentgenology Vols I & II,

booby 1967

Cardiovascular— Abrams H L Angiography Vols 1 & I1 2nd ed 1971

(1)

(2)

( з ) (4)

153

Faculty of Medicine

Chest- Felson B Chest Roentgenology, Saunders 1973 Fraser and Pare Diagnostic Diseases of the Chest Vols I & II, Saunders

1970

Genito-Urinary Tract—

Emmett and Witten Clinical Urography Vols I Il Ill 3rd ed. Saunders

YEAR 2

531-821 PATHOLOGY

The examination will test the candidates' knowledge of Pathology and of general and regional morbid anatomy and histology with special reference to structural and functional variations which may be demon-strated by radiodiagnostic methods. The examination will test the candidates' ability to recognize and Interpret specimens illustrating relevant morbid anatomy and histology.

In addition to the standard textbooks, the pathological sections of standard works should be studied. A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the English language will be expected.


Cappell D F and Anderson J R Muir 's Textbook of Pathology 10th ed, Arnold 1976

or

Robbins S L Pathologic Basis of Disease. Saunders 1974 Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 4th ed, Churchill 1974 (b) Recommended for reference: Anderson W A D Pathology 6th ed, Mosby 1971 Payling Wright G and Symmers W St C Systemic Pathology 1st ed,

Longmans 1967 Illingworth C F W and Dick B M Textbook of Surgical Pathology 10th

ed, Churchill 1968 Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972 Willis R A Spread of Tumours in the Human Body 3rd ed, Butterworth

1973 Willis R A Pathology of Tumours 4th ed, Butterworth 1968

555-822 RAD1ODIAGNOSIS 2

A series of lecture demonstrations will cover the Radiology of the various systems of the body. Weekly film reading tutorials will be conducted. Students are encouraged to make use of the Audiovisual teaching library.

YEAR 3

555-823 RADI0DIAGNOSIS 3

A series of lectures will deal with more advanced aspects of radio-logical diagnosis. Weekly film reading tutorials will be conducted.

154

Diplomas

DIPLOMA IN THERAPEUTIC RADIOLOGY (Regulation 3.40)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the secretary, faculty of Medicine. (2) Before entering for the examination in Part I candidates are required to present certificates of practice (at least two years, including one year spent in a resident appointment in a general hospital). (3) Before entering for the examination in Part 11 candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates admitted ad eundem statum are required, in addition, to present certifi-cates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

PART I

516-831 ANATOMY

The examination may include questions covering any aspect of human anatomy but with particular reference to the structures concerned with the spread of malignancy.


Frazer J E Anatomy of the Human Skeleton, 6th ed Churchill 1965 Gray's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied, 32nd or subsequent ed Long-

mans or Cunningham's Textbook of Anatomy, 10th or subsequent ed OUP or Lockhart R D Hamilton G F & Fyfe F W Anatomy of the Human body,

Faber 1965 Агеу L B Developmental Anatomy, 6th or subsequent ed Saunders or Patten B M Human Embryology, 3rd or subsequent ed McGraw-Hill Ham A W Histology, 7th ed Lippincott 1974



555-831 BASIC RADIOTHERAPEUTIC PHYSICS

PRELIMINARY READING Candidates are advised to revise the topics of electricity, atomic structure and electromagnetic radiation as given In the syllabus for Physics (Medical Course) for the degrees of M.B., B.S. for details and prescribed textbooks.

SYLLABUS

1. X-ray Equipment—construction of x-ray tubes (superficial and deep therapy, contact and beryllium window); causes of x-ray tube failure; circuits (self rectified with and without Inverse Suppressor; two valve rectification; Greinacher); cooling of x-ray tubes; tube voltage and current controls and meters; rectifiers (valve and solid state); timers; monitors; filter interlocking devices; design and construction of treatment cones.

155

Faculty of Medicine

2. Absorption and Scattering of Radiation—photoelectric and recoil processes; unmodified scattering; pair production; positron annihila-tion; characteristic radiation; absorption of homogeneous radiation; absorption coefficients; mass absorption coefficients; half-value layer; effective keV.

з . Production of Radiation—electron interactions; characteristic radia-tion; Bremstrahlung.

4. Radioactivity—natural and artificial; decay and half-life; isotope charts; modes of disintegration; production of isotopes; growth of activity; radioactive equilibrium; units of activity.

5. Spectra and Photon Energy Distribution—angular distribution of x-ray beams; energy distribution spectrum of x-ray beams; changes in spectrum with kilovoltage, tube current and filtration; relation be-tween photon energy and wave-length; energy distribution spectrum of x-rays from radioactive isotopes; typical spectrum of gamma rays from Cobalt-60 tele-therapy units.

6. Exposure—definition of and unit of electronic equilibrium standard chamber; air-wall material; thimble chambers; dosemeters; calibration of dosemeters; monitors; measurement of high energy radiation.

7. Sealed Radioactive Sources—radium decay series; radioactive equi-librium; construction of, care of and testing of radium and radon containers; growth and decay of radon and decay products; con-struction of Strontium-90 applicators, Cobalt-60, Caesium-137 needles, tubes, etc.. Tantalum-182 wires, lntercomparison of sealed sources used for therapeutic purposes; isodose distributions; non-uniformly loaded containers; measurement of activity and/or output of sources.

8. Absorbed dose—definition of and unit of; relation between absorbed dose and exposure; dose quivalent; relative biological effectiveness.

9. High Energy Machines—linear accelerators; betatron; resonant trans-former; van den Graaf generator; teletherapy units (Cobalt-60 and Caesium-137); comparison of high energy machines.

10. Instrumentation for Isotopes—construction and use of Geiger and scintillation counters and associated auxiliary apparatus; statistics of counting, scalers and ratemeters; resolving time and loss of counts, etc., measurement of activity of radioactive samples.

11. Other methods of measurement of radiation—use of chemical dose-meters; photographic film; silver-activated phosphate glass; thermo-luminescent dosemeters; semiconductors, etc.

12. Radiation Protection—Background information; ICRP recommenda-tions on personnel dose, population dose, design of equipment, maximum permissible concentrations, medical examinations etc.; design of departments; procedures for custody use and disposal of radioactive sources; nursing procedures; reduction of dose to patients and others.

13. Personnel Monitoring—use of pocket dosemeters, thermolumines-cent dosemeters, fdm badges; relative advantages and disadvan-tages; interpretation of results obtained.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper.

531-831 PATHOLOGY The examination in Pathology will test the candidate's knowledge of both general and systematic pathology, with emphasis on those fields which are relevant to the practice of Radiotherapy.

156

Diplomas

SУ LLA В US

General Pathology: The structure of cells and connective tissue, and the effects of damage on them. The inflammatory reaction, mechanisms of Im-munity, hospital infections and anti-bacterial chemotherapy. Disorders of growth, precancerous conditions and carclnogenesis, the classification, structure and spread of tumours. Reaction to haemorrhage, disturbances in body fluid and electrolyte balance. The red cell and mechanisms of anaemia; the white cells, bone marrow and spleen. Platelets and clotting factors, blood groups and blood transfusion. Systematic Pathology: A sound general knowledge of the specific types of tumour occurring in the various organs of the body.

PRACTICAL WORK The candidate is advised to attend necropsy ex-aminations, and avail himself of the material becoming available in the Pathology Department of his Institution to assist him in his study of the gross and microscopic manifestations of representative disease processes and tumours. The candidate's knowledge of these aspects of pathology will be tested by a practical examination.

BOOKS recommended as a basis of study:

Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology 4th ed, Churchill 1974 Robbins S L & Angell M Basic Pathology, Saunders 1971 Payling Wright G & Symmers W St C Systematic Pathology, 2nd ed

Churchill Livingstone 1975 Willis R A Pathology of Tumours, 4th ed Butterworth 1968 Willis R A Spread of Tumours in the Human Body 3rd ed, Butterworth

1973 Ackerman L V and Rosai J Surgical Pathology 5th ed, Kempton 1974 Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test; viva voce examination.

PART II

The experience required of a candidate presenting for Part 11 shall be- 1. A period of twelve months as a resident medical officer in a general

hospital with experience equivalent to four months as Resident Medical Officer to each of In-patient Medicine and Surgery.

2. Two years at a special hospital or clinic with full-time attendance under the supervision of a senior practitioner or practitioners in Radiotherapy, or its equivalent. In assessing equivalence, ali hos-pitals or departments recognized as Radiotherapeutic Clinical Schools by Australasian Universities shall have equivalent standing. In the case of public hospitals or departments not so recognized, the faculty of Medicine will require from a candidate particular details of his experience, the acceptance of which will enable the candidate to proceed with the Diploma.

3. Evidence of having performed under the supervision of one or more consultants in Radiotherapy all the common procedures of the specialty. These procedures shall include the diagnostic and treat-ment techniques Including the conduct of pre-operative, operative and post-operative procedures. Candidates are advised to confer with the Chairman of the Standing Committee for advice concerning the current common procedures.

157

Faculty of Medicine

555-832 RADIOTHERAPY

APPLIED RADIOTHERAPEUTIC PHYSICS

SYLLABUS

1. Calibration of x-ray equipment—measurement of free-air output, measurement of HVL, cone factors; test of inverse square law.

2. Tissue Dose—phantoms; back-scatter factor—variation with treat-ment area; HVL and depth of underlying tissue; depth dose curves—variation with treatment area, source—skin distance, HVL and type of cone; tissue-air ratios; measurement of back-scatter factor and percentage depth dose; calculation of back-scatter factor and per-centage depth dose for points off central axis; isodose curves; in-tegral dose; exit dose; use of bolus, etc., comparison of depth dose values with different radiation sources.

3. Correction for Body lnhomogeneities—spectral distributions of scat-tered radiation; variation of HVL with irradiated tissue; effects of bone, lung etc., on depth dose curves; dose within cavities in bone; density of bone; effect of bone position in tissue on depth dose curves.

4. Beam Direction Devices—pin and arc; back pointer; protractor, etc. 5. Treatment Simulators—principles involved, comparison of radio-

therapeutic and radiological equipment and techniques. 8. Treatment Techniques—cross fire; multiple field; rotation; grids;

wedges, etc. 7. Use of Sealed Radioactive Sources—specific gamma-ray emission;

clinical applications using sealed sources—Paterson Parker rules; Manchester techniques; Sievert integrals; radiographic control of implants; dosage with gamma-ray emitters other than radium and radon; integral dose; dosage using beta-ray applicators.

8. Clinical Uses of Unsealed Radioactive Isotopes—diagnostic pro-cedures with isotopes; isotope scanning; dosimetry of the internally administered isotopes; dose administered from diagnostic pro-cedures; therapeutic treatments with unsealed sources; integral dose.

9. Electron Dosimetry—sources of electron beams; measurement of in-tensity of absorbed dose; dose distribution ln tissue.

10. Neutron Dosimetry—sources of neutron beams; relationship between neutron energy and biological response; dosemeters for measure-ment of neutron dose; dose distribution in tissue.

11. Inaccuracies Arising in Dosimetry—use of incorrect settings, factors and tables; variation of line voltage and frequencies; incorrect loca-tion and size of tumours; incorrect beam alignment, faulty cones; variation of spectra of beam in tissue; variation of absorbed dose with densities of tissue; biological response effects; incorrect place-ment of radioactive sources etc.

12. Radiation Protection—revision of section in Part I and practical ap-plication in radiotherapeutic practice.

PRACTICAL WORK Candidates are advised to arrange attendances at equipment calibration sessions, treatment planning departments, isotope scanning and isotope treatment sessions, and physics departments to experience at first hand the applications of radiotherapeutic physics in their own and allied hospitals and clinics.

158

Diplomas

BOOKS Prescribed textbook for Parts I and II: Johns H E The Physics of Radiology, 2nd ed Thomas 1964

Recommended for reference:

Wagner H N Principles of Nuclear Medicine, Saunders 1968 Recommendations of the International Commission on Radiological Pro-

tection 1CRP Publications 2, 3, 4, 5, 9, Pergamon Press Revised Radiation Protection Standards NH & MRC, 1967 Code of Practice for the Control and Safe Handling of Sealed Radio-

active Sources Used in Radiation Therapy (other than Teletherapy), NH & MRC 1962. Special Report Series No. 11

Code of Practice for Nursing Staff Exposed to Ionizing Radiations from Radioactive Substances NH & MRC 1965

Safe Handling of Corpses Containing Radioactive Substances, NH & MRC 1966

Notes on Medical Procedure for Radiation Accidents and Radioactive Contamination, NH & MRC 1968

(Publications of NH & MRC are available on request, free of charge from the Australian Radiation Laboratory, 36 Lonsdale Street, Melbourne, 3000.)

EXAMINATION Sections of the Radiotherapy written paper and part of the oral examinations will cover this subject.

RADIOTHERAPY

The candidate will be expected to possess a sound knowledge of patho-logical, medical and surgical aspects of all conditions for which any form of radiation therapy is a recognized treatment. In addition, detailed knowledge of all technical procedures in Radiotherapy will be required, together with an understanding of the general principles of radiation bio-logy. The candidate should be able to carry out the prescription, planning and calculating of treatment, and should be able to demonstrate the physi-cal principles involved. He should be familiar with the detailed organiza-tion of a radiotherapeutic department.

BOOKS Recomended for reference: Cade S S Malignant Disease and Its Treatment by Radium, Wright 1952 McKee & Cipollaro X-rays and Radium in The Treatment of Diseases of

The Skin, Lea & Fed ger 1947 Paterson Treatment of Malignant Disease by Radium and X-rays, Arnold Meredith Radium Dosage, the Manchester System, Livingstone Carling, Windeyer & Smithers British Practice in Radio Therapy, Butter-

worth 1955 Beirwalters W H Johnson P C & Solari A J Clinical Use of Radioiso-

topes, Saunders 1957 Mitchell J S Studies in Radiotherapeutics, Blackwell 1960 A knowledge of appropriate matter in current periodicals in the English language will be expected.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper in Radiotherapy—Clinical. One 3-hour written paper in Radiotherapy—Radiation Biology, applied Radio-therapeutic Physics, and Radiation Protection and clinical and oral examinations.

159

Faculty of Medicine

DIPLOMA IN PSYCHOLOGICAL MEDICINE (Regulation 3.40А )

Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the secretary, faculty of Medicine. Before entering for the examination in Part I a candidate is required to present evidence that he has spent at least one year in a resident medical appointment in a general hospital during which he has had the equivalent of four months' experience in each of in-patient Medicine and Surgery. Candidates are advised to discuss their psychiatric training with Dr Burrows, department of Psychiatry before embarking upon their course of training for DPM. Before entering for the examination in Part I1 candidates are required to present certificates of experience, as specified below. Candidates are admitted ad eundem statum are required, in addition, to present certifi-cates of at least three months' approved experience in any hospital of the Mental Health Authority, Hospitals and Charities Commission or Repatriation Commission which has substantial association with the University department of Psychiatry and is from time to time approved by the Chairman of the Board of Examiners in Psychiatry.

PART I

EXAMINATIONS

The examinations for Part I comprise four 3-hour written papers namely, two papers on 554-841 Medical Psychology (oral examination may be held); one paper on 516-841 Anatomy and one paper on 536-841 Physio-logy, including a section on 534-841 Pharmacology (oral examination may be held).

554-841 MEDICAL PSYCHOLOGY

A course of 50 hours of lectures and seminars to introduce psychiatrists-in-training to the general field of psychology with special emphasis on areas relevant to clinical practice. The chief sections of the course will be: Introduction and methodology; Developmental psychology throughout the lifespan; Social Psychology; Cognitive Psychology; Motivation and emotion; Personality.


Hilgard E R Atkinson R C and Atkinson R L Introduction to Psychology 5th ed, Harcourt Brace Jovanovich 1971

Lindgren H C An Introduction to Social Psychology 2nd ed, John Wiley 1973


Milton T Theories of Psychopathology and Personality 2nd ed, Saunders 1973

Mowbray R M and Rodger T F Psychology in Relation to Medicine 3rd ed, Livingstone 1973

Eysenck H J and Wilson G D A Textbook of Human Psychology, MTP 1976

Beech H R Changing Man's Behaviour, Penguin 1969

160

Diplomas

Maxwell A E Basic Statistics in Behavioural Research, Penguin 1970 Price R H Abnormal Behaviour. Perspective in Conflict, Holt Rinehart

& Winston 1972 Knutson A L The Individual Society and Health Behaviour, Russel Sage

Foundn 1965 Further reading will be suggested during the course. The Penguin Modern Psychology Readings and the Penguin Science of Behaviour series are valuable resources for developing topics of particular interest.

516-841 NEUROANATOMY

A course of 52 lecture/demonstrations. The subject includes the gross and microscopic structure of the nervous system including its embryo-logical development. The examination may include questions relative to the development and histogenesis of the nervous system, the neuron and neuroglia, cranial nerves, peripheral nerves, autonomic nervous sys-tem, spinal cord, medulla, pons, miд brап , diencephalon and basal ganglia, rhinencephalon, olfactory pathways, limbic system, cerebral cortex, meninges and cerebrospinal fluid, blood supply of the central nervous system, and the skull.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Barr M L The Human Nervous System 2nd ed, Harper & Row 1974 Bridal A Neurological Anatomy in Relation to Clinical Medicine 2nd ed,

OUP 1969 Carpenter M B Human Neuroanatomy 7th ed, Williams & Wilkins, 1975 Crosby E C Humphrey T and Lauer E W Correlative Anatomy ot the

Nervous System, Macmillan 1962 Patten B M Human Embryology 2nd or subsequent ed, Blackiston Ре elе T L The Neuroanatomic Basis for Clinical Neurology, McGraw-

Hill 1961 Research Publications of the Association for Research in Nervous and

Mental Disease. Williams & Wilkins.


GENERAL PHYSIOLOGY AND NEUROPHYSIOLOGY AND PHARMACOLOGY

536-841 PHYSIOLOGY OF THE NERVOUS SYSTEM The course will comprise 20 lecture/seminars which will deal with Important parts of the syllabus.

(a) The neurone: Determinants of transmembrane potential, axon con-duction, synaptic transmission. (b) Sensory processes: (i) The measurement of sensory function; de-tection discrimination and scaling of stimuli. (ii) Transmission and processing of stimulus information within mammalian sensory systems; representation of physical space within sensory systems. (iii) Somatic sensation, neural mechanisms of touch, kinesthesis, thermal sensibility and pain. (iv) The visual system—visual perception; photochemistry and neural organization of retina; central neural mechanisms of vision. (v) Physiology of hearing—sensory correlates of sound stimuli; peripheral neural mechanisms of hearing, including processing of information in

F 161

Faculty of Medicine

the auditory nerve; central neural mechanisms of hearing. (vi) Forebrain mechanisms of perception—functional localization in central cortex; the divided brain. (c) Motor Function: (i) Organization of the motor systems; feedback control of movement and posture. (ii) Peripheral mechanisms in the control of skeletal muscle. (iii) Functional organization of the spinal cord-spinal reflexes and the control of movement. (iv) The cerebellum and motor function. Motor function of the forebrain—cerebral cortex and basal ganglion. (v) The autonomic nervous system—peripheral organi-zation and central regulatory mechanisms. (vi) The hypothalamus—neuro-endocrine and other functions. (vii) Synaptic transmitter substances in the central nervous system. (d) Higher functions of the brain: (i) The conscious state; sleep and wakefulness; the electro-encephalogram. (ii) Neural mechanisms in memory learning, motivated and emotional behaviour. (iii) Neural cor-relates of speech. (e) Physiology of cerebrospinal fluid and cerebral circulation

Books Prescribed textbooks: Mountcastle V B Medical Physiology Vol I 13th ed, Mosby 1973 or Ruch T C and Patton H D eds Physiology and Biophysics 20th ed,

Saunders 1974

EXAMINATION A two-hour written examination, and an essay to be handed in at the time of the examination. Details of the assessing pro-cedure and the subject of the essay will be issued at the beginning of the course.

534-841 PHARMACOLOGY

The course will consist of 20 lectures covering the following topics: Neurochemical transmitter mechanisms in the peripheral and central nervous systems, with special reference to the relationship of central transmitter mechanisms to normal and abnormal processes and be-haviour. General principles of pharmacology; absorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion of drugs, with special reference to psycho-tropic drugs. Pharmacological actions and uses of the autacoids and their antagonists. Drugs acting on the central nervous system: anti-depressants, antipsychotics, anti-anxiety drugs, anti-parkinsonien drugs, anti-convulsants, stimulants, psychotomimetics, sedatives, hypnotics, an-algesics, pharmacological actions and mechanisms involved in their therapeutic, unwanted and toxic actions. Drug interactions. Drug evalu-ation. Drug abuse.

BOOKS: Goodman L S and Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics

5th ed, Macmillan 1975 Bowman W C and Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology, Blackwell

1977 Levine R R Pharmacology Drug Actions and Reactions, Little Brown Rech R H and Moore K E An Introduction to Psychopharmacology,

North Holland

EXAMINATION A 1-hour written examination consisting of multiple choice and/or short-answer type questions will be held at the end of the course.

162

Diplomas

554-003 INTRODUCTION TO CLINICAL PSYCHIATRY

A course of 34 tutorials/seminars. The course is divided into two sections. Section 1 consists of the History of Psychiatry, Behaviour Therapy, Phenomenology, Psychopharmacology and Social Psychiatry. Section 2 consists of Child Development: (a) from infancy to adolescence; (b) parenthood; (c) family structure and functioning; (d) social, cultural and anthropological determinants of child and family behaviour. Be-havioural characteristics. Parenthood. The family. Social factors.

TUTORING IN HOSPITALS Students will require to have a minimum of 4 hours per week of teaching supervision by the approved psychiatric unit.

PART 11

The experience required of a candidate presenting for Part I1 shall be: (1) He shall possess Part I of the D.P.M. (2) He has been in practice for at least five years. (3) Not less than twelve months experience as a full-time (or equiva-lent) medical officer in a Mental or Psychiatric Hospital approved by the faculty of Medicine in which experience has been gained with adult male and female patients suffering from acute and chronic psychiatric disorders. (4) Three years' full-time practice In Clinical Psychiatry at an approved hospital, centre or department (or approved equivalent experience) which will include: (a) attendance at an approved child psychiatric unit for at least 30

half-day sessions within an 8-month period, and (b) at least 15 half-day sessions at a neurological clinic in a recognized

hospital.

EXAMINATIONS

Paper 1: 3-hour paper, comprising 554-843 General Medicine, 554-007 Neurology and Neuropathology; A Clinical examination will also be held. Paper 2: 3-hour paper, comprising 634-842 General Psychiatry, including 554-008 Child Psychiatry; A clinical examination will be held. Paper 3: 3-hour paper, comprising 554-004 General Psychiatry. An oral examination will also be held.

554-005 INTERVIEWING TECHNIQUES, ELEMENTARY PSYCHOTHERAPY, PSYCHOPATHOLOGY

A course of 40 tutorials/seminars, together with individual case super-vision. The course will include psychological management of patients and practical aspects of psychopathology.

554-004 GENERAL PSYCHIATRY

A course of 40 tutorials/seminars. The course will include seminars on classification in psychiatry; functional psychoses; neuroses; personality disorders; psychosomatic medicine; forensic psychiatry; organic brain syndromes; sexual deviations; epidemiology; mental retardation; re-

163

Faculty of Medicine

search; social psychiatry; the theory and practice of behaviour therapy and treatment of psychiatric illness.

TUTORING IN HOSPITALS

Students will require to have a minimum of 4 hours per week of teach-ing supervision by the approved phychiatric unit.

554-007 NEUROLOGY AND NEUROPATHOLOGY

A course of 15 tutorials/seminars.

1. Neurology (5 tutorials/seminars)-

The evaluation of the neurological history; Clinical examination of the nervous system; Discussion of various neurological syndromes; The electroencephalogram, carotid angiography air studies and brain scanning in clinical diagnosis; Therapy in neurological disorders.

2. Neuropathology (8 tutorials/seminars)-

Normal and abnormal neurons (changes in disease); Normal and ab-normal Cilia (changes in disease); C.S.F. production, circulation and absorption, Hydorcephalus, Brain herniations; Tumours of central nervous system; Vascular abnormalities (a) ischaemia; Vascular abnormalities (b) haemorrhage; Demyelinating disorders; Infections (a) virus; In-fections (b) bacterial, protozoal, etc; Parkinson's disease, Dementia; The nervous system in alcoholism, Trauma; Disorders of Muscle; Disorders of peripheral nerve. The course will include slide sessions and demonstrations of routine "brain cutting".

554-006 GENERAL MEDICINE

A course of 12 tutorials/seminars on the following topics:

1. Alcoholism—

Physical complications, Social implications, Detoxification, Rehabilitation.

2. Cardiovascular—

Cardiac failure—causes and management, Hypeп ension—causes, Inves-tigation and management, Coronary artery disease.

З . Respiratory—

Chronic obstructive airway disease—Asthma, Respiratory causes of dis-turbed behaviour and of consciousness, Acute respiratory Insufficiency.

4. Renal—

Urinal Tract Infections, Chronic Renal Failure, Acute Renal Failure.

5. Castro-intestinal-

Ulcerative colitis, irritable colon and diverticular disease, Hepatic in-sufficiency and portocaval encephalopathy, Alcoholic liver disease.

G. Endocrine—

Pituitary, thyroid and adrenal disease; hyperactive or hypoactive disease.

7. Metabolic Disturbances of Consciousness

8. Management of Terminal Malignancy

164

Diplomas

9. Psychosocial Problems of Leukaemia and Chronic Haematological Disorders in Children

554-008 CHILD PSYCHIATRY

A course of 30 seminars Is conducted consisting of clinical case work and seminars.

Clinical Case Work— 1. Demonstration interviews, of children at dif-ferent developmental stages; with parents; and also demonstration of joint therapist and family interviews. 2. The candidate, with supervision, will undertake diagnostic work with children, parents and families, and therapy with particular children, parents and families.

Seminars—Child Development; family parenthood; parent-child and family relationships; and social and community influences an the child; Classification and terminology; Special Topics; Principles of Manage-ment; Child Psychiatric Services.

BOOKS Recommended for reference Davidson L S P ed Principles and Practice of Medicine 6th ed, Living-

stone 1970 Mayer-Gross W et al Clinical Psychiatry 3rd ed, Cassell 1969 Brain R Diseases of the Nervous System 8th ed, OUP 1972 Hilliard L T and Kirman B H Mental Deficiency 2nd ed, Churchill 1965 Kanner L Child Psychiatry 4th ed, Black 1972 Zilboorg G A History of Medical Psychology, Norton Sainsbury P and Krietman N Methods of Psychiatric Research, OUP

1963 Wily H J and StalIworthy K R Mental Abnormality end the Law,

Регуе r 1962 Greenfield J G Neuropathology 2nd ed, Arnold 1963 Russell D and Rubinstein L J The Pathology of Tumours of the Ner-

vous System 3rd ed, 1971 Complete Reading List available in Department of Psychiatry. Current reviews, journals and yearbooks.

DIPLOMA IN ANAESTHETICS (Regulation 3.40)

Note. (1) Candidates are advised to register in the first instance with the secretary, faculty of Medicine. (2) Before entering for the examination in Part I candidates are required to present certificates of practice (at least two years, Including one year spent in a rе siдеп t appointment in a general hospital). (3) Before entering for the examination in Part Il candidates are required to present certificates of experience as specified below. Candidates ad-mitted ad eundem statum are required, in addition, to present certificates of three months' approved experience in the Clinical Schools of this University.

165

Faculty of Medicine

PART 1

516-851 ANATOMY

(In its relation to Anaesthesia)

The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of (i) the respiratory system (including its histology and development), (il) the heart and pericardium, (iii) the peripheral nerves, (iv) the nervous system, (v) the meninges and the subarachnoid spaces with their contents, (vi) the superficial venous system.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: Grey's Anatomy, Descriptive and Applied, 32nd or subsequent ed Long-

mans Brock R C Anatomy of the Bronchial Tree, 2nd ed OUP 1954 Ham A W Histology, 7th ed Lippincott 1974


536-851 PHYSIOLOGY

(In its relation to Anaesthesia)

The examination may include questions relating to the physiology of (I) respiration, (ii) circulation, (iii) metabolism, (iv) excretion, (v) the ner-vous system.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbook: •Best C H Taylor N B & Brobeck J R Physiological Basis of Medical

Practice, 9th ed Williams & Wilkins 1973


Campbell E J M Dickinson C J & Slater J D H Clinical Physiology, 4th ed Blackwell 1975

Weisberg H F Water, Electrolyte and Acid-Base Balance, 2nd ed Wil-liams & Wilkins 1962

Comroe J H Physiology of Respiration, Yearbook Medical Publishers Incorp 1965

Scurr C F and Feldman S Foundations of Anaesthesia, Heinemann 1970 West J B Respiratory Physiology the Essentials, Williams & Wilkins

1974

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper; viva voce examination.

534-851 PHARMACOLOGY

The course will include the pharmacology of drugs in common use in medicine, and especially those of interest in anaesthetic practice. Empha-sis will be placed on the pharmacological principles underlying the medi-cinal use of drugs, including the following topics: mode of action; ab-sorption, distribution, metabolism and excretion; side-effects; drug inter-action, antagonisms and synergism; tolerance and idiosyncrasy; and, the pharmacological aspects of the introduction of new drugs.


Bowman W C and Rand M J Textbook of Pharmacology, Blackwell 1978

166

Diplomas

•Goodman L S & Gilman A The Pharmacological Basis of Therapeutics, 5th ed Macmillan 1975

•Wood-Smith F G & Stewart H C Drugs in Anaesthetic Practice, 3rd ed Butterworth 1968

Goldstein A Aronow L and Kalman S M Principles of Drug Action 2nd ed, Wiley 1974

Passmore R & Robson J S A Companion to Medical Studies Vol II Pharmacology, Microbiology, General Pathology and Related Sub-jects, Blackwell 1970

Macintosh R R Mushin W W & Epstein H G Physics for the Anaesthetist, 3rd ed reprint, Blackwell 1970

Hewer C L Recent Advances In Anaesthesia, 10th ed Churchill 1967 Relevant articles in Advances in Pharmacology, Annual Review of Phar-

macology, Pharmacological Reviews and Progress in Medicinal Chemistry.

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper, viva voce examination.

PART 11

Preliminary Requirements: Before presenting himself for examination in Part II, the candidate shall produce evidence of having conformed to the following requirements: 1. A period of two years as Registrar in the Department of Anaes-

thetics of a hospital forming part of a Clinical School recognized by the Australasian Universities. In the case of a hospital or depart-ment not so recognized, the faculty of Medicine will require from the candidate particular details of his experience, acceptance of which will enable him to proceed with the diploma.

2. In addition, not less than twelve months' full-time practice in Anaesthetics or its equivalent, as approved by faculty.

3. Participation in, or attendance at, anaesthetic practice in special branches of Anaesthesia and Analgesia, as approved by faculty.

4. Up to six months of the total of three years training would be ac-cepted if It were spent in approved posts involving Clinical Medi-cine, intensive care units or respiratory units.

Any candidate unable to satisfy all of the above requirements should sub-mit details of his experience for consideration and for advice as to his eligibility for candidature.

EXAMINATION The subjects of examination in Part I1 are two, Internal Medicine and Anaesthetics.

531-851 INTERNAL MEDICINE

The examination may include questions relating to the aetiology, path-ology, diagnosis and treatment of diseases which may be of importance in relation to anaesthesia. Candidates are expected to have a detailed knowledge of the commoner diseases of the respiratory, cardiovascular and renal systems. A broad general knowledge is required of the commoner diseases of the nervous system, endocrine, haemopoietic and alimentary systems. Candidates may be required to demonstrate familiarity with the usual bio-chemical, pathological, electrocardiographic and radiological Investiga-tions. They will also be required to identify, from macroscopic or micro-

167

Faculty of Medicine

scopic specimens, the pathological changes characteristic of the various disease states.


Cecil R L & Loeb R F A Textbook of Medicine, 13th ed Saunders 1971 or Harrison T R with Adams R D Bennett I L jr Resnik W H Thorn G W

Wintrobe M W (eds) Principles of Internal Medicine, 6th ed McGraw-Hill 1970

Davidson Sir Stanley (ed) Textbook of Medicine, 10th ed Livingstone 1971

Muir R and Anderson J R Muir 's Textbook of Pathology, 10th ed Arnold 1976 (especially Chs 1-15)

or Robbins S L Pathologic Basis of Disease, Saunders 1974 (especially

Chs 1-12, 15, 16, 19) Walter J B & Israel M S General Pathology, 4th ed Churchill 1974 Hurley J V Acute Inflammation, Churchill Livingstone 1972 Burton A W Medical Ethics and the Law, Aust Medical Publ Co 1971 Simpson K (ed) Taylor's Principles and Practice of Medical Jurispru-

dence 2 vols, 12th ed Churchill 1965 Walsh R J & Ward H K A Guide to Blood Transfusion, 2nd ed Aus-

tralasian Medical Publishing Co 1960 Mollison P L Blood Transfusion in Clinical Medicine, 5th ed Blackwell

OUP 1972

EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Viva voce examination.

556-851 ANAESTHETICS

The subject of Anaesthetics comprises two parts (1) Theory of Anaesthe-sia. and (ii) Anaesthetic Practice.

(I) THEORY OF ANAESTHESIA

SYLLABUS This part of the subject covers the physiology of anaesthesia; the pharmacology of anaesthetic and analgesic drugs; the methods of their administration, and the hazards which may attend their use. The candidate is required to show knowledge of the common applications of chemistry, physics and clinical pathology to anaesthetics, and of the principles and everyday technique of resuscitation, transfusion of blood and inhalational therapy.

BOOKS The candidate is expected to have read widely in the literature of anaesthetics, which may be conveniently grouped under the following headings: (i) basic scientific principles; (ii) history; (iii) general text-books; (iv) monographs upon special aspects of the subject, such as obstetrical analgesia, regional analgesia or resuscitation; (v) current journals, both British and foreign.

EXAMINATION The examination consists of a 3-hour written paper and a viva voce examination.

(II) ANAESTHETIC PRACTICE

SYLLABUS This part of the subject includes the structure of anaesthetic apparatus, past and present; its physiological merits and defects; its

168

Diplomas

maintenance and repair. The candidate is required to have knowledge of the ordinary methods of clinical research used in anaesthetics, such as spirometry, gas-analysis and estimation of the chemistry of the blood.

EXAMINATION Viva voce.

DIPLOMA IN AUDIOLOGY (Regulation 3.80)

Audiology is the clinical science concerned with the diagnosis, preven-tion, and treatment of loss of hearing and the associated disorders of communication. As a result It plays a significant role in the medical educational and social services available to children and adults with hearing disabilities. This discipline should be of interest to those with a scientific background who are interested in working with people.

BASIC SCIENCES

577-861. ACOUSTICS

The examination may include questions relating ta wave motions and vibrations in gases, liquids and solids, sound absorption and reflection acoustical Impedance, room acoustics, sound fields and noise, the measurement of sound and psychoacoustics.

BOOKS (a) Prescribed textbooks Durrant J D and Lovrinic D H Bases of Hearing Science, Williams &

Wilkins 1977

(b) Recommended for reference: Gerber S E Introductory Hearing Science Physical and Psychological

Concepts, Saunders 1974 Smith B J Acoustics, Longman 1971

EXAMINATION One 2-hours' paper and during the course.

577-865. ANATOMY AND PHYSIOLOGY The examination may include questions relating to the anatomy of the ear, the histology and ultrastructure of the inner ear, middle ear function, cohlear physiology, psychoacoustics, vestibular neuroanatomy, auditory and vestibular neurophysiology.

BOOKS Recommended for reference: lurato S Submicroscopic Structure of the Inner Ear, Pergamon 1967 Keidel W D and Neff W D eds Auditory System Anatomy Physiology

Ear, Handbook of Sensory Physiology Vol V/1, Springer-Verlag 1974

Mountcastle V B Medical Physiology 13th ed Vol II, Mosby 1973 Tobias J V Foundations of Modern Auditory Theory Vols I and II,

Academic 1970 and 1972


536-861. BIOPHYSICS

The examination may include questions relating to instrumentation,

169

Faculty of Medicine

electoacoustical transducers, basic electronics, electrical safety, data acquisition and processing in biology and analog and digital comput-ation.

BOOKS Prescribed textbook:

Dewhurst D J An Introduction to Biomedical Instrumentation. Perga-mon 1976.


171-861 PSYCHOLOGY

The examination may include questions relating to developmental stages, the basic psychological processes Including cognition, perception, neuro-psychology, conditioning, motivation, memory and memory disorders, personal and social influences, tests of ability and achievement, the biological factors in behaviour, non-organic deafness, non-verbal com-munication, the psychology of deafness, the principles of psychometric measurement, psychophysics, statistics and social research methods.


Elkind D and Flavell J H eds Studies in Cognitive Development, OUP 1969

McNeil D The Acquisition of Language, Harper & Row 1970 Myklebust H Psychology of Deafness, Grune & Stratton 1971 Sartain A Q North A J et al Psychology Understanding Human Be-

haviour 4th ed, McGraw Hí11 1973 Tervoort B T Development Features of Visual Communication, North

Holland 1975 Wright D S et al Introductory Psychology An Experimental Approach,

Penguin 1972

EXAMINATION One 2-hours' paper, one 3-hours' paper and during the course.

CLINICAL SCIENCES

577-862. AUDIOLOGY

EDUCATIONAL AUDIOLOGY

The examination may include questions relating to psychology of deaf-ness, role of the family, the deaf child at home and at school, parent guidance, auditory training, educational guidance and school place-ment, vocational guidance for the deaf, hearing aids for home and school language assessment in the classroom and educational manage-ment of the hearing-impaired child.


Dale D M C Deaf Children at Home and at School LUP 1967 Ewing A and Ewing E Teaching Deaf Children to talk, Manchester UP

1971 Gregory S The Deaf Child and His Family, Allen & Unwin 1978 Parsons M Helping Our Deaf Children, NZ Ccl Educational Res 1973 Sanders D A Aural Rehabilitation, Prentice Hal' 1971 Watson T J The Education of Hearing Handicapped Children, LUP 1967


170

Diplomas

GENERAL AUDIOLOGY

The examination may include questions related to pure tone audiometry, masking, speech audiometry, differential diagnosis of deafness, impe-dance audiometry, non organic hearing loss, evoked response audi-ometry, brain stem audiometry, central auditory problems. history taking and clinical examination, interpretation of results, ethics, psycho acoustics and instrumentation and calibration.


Durrant J D and Lovrinic D H Bases of Hearing Science, Williams & Wilkins 1977

Gerber S E Introductory Hearing Science Physical and Psychological Concepts, Saunders 1974

Katz J Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Williams & Wilkins 1977


Bradford L J ed Physiological Measures of the Audio Vestibular Sys- tem, Academic 1975

Davis H and Silverman S R Hearing and Deafness 3rd ed, Holt Rine- hart & Winston 1970

Gulick W L Hearing Physiology and Psychophysics, OUP 1971 Hirsh I J The Measurement of Hearing, McGraw-Hill 1952 Jerger J Modern Developments in Audiology 2nd ed, Academic 1974

EXAMINATION One 3-hours' paper and during the course; viva voce examination.

GERIATRIC AUDIOLOGY

The examination may include questions relating to the ageing process, hearing aids for the elderly, aural rehaЬ litatiОП , speech reading, clinical assessment of the elderly and presbyacusis.

BOOKS Recommended for reference Bolton B Psychology of Deafness for Rehabilitation Counsellors, Univ

Park 1976 Brocklehurst J C Textbook of Geriatric Medicine and Gerantology,

Churchill Livingstone 1973 Davis H and Silverman S Hearing and Deafness, Holt Rinehart &

Winston 1970 Liden ed Geriatric Audiology, Almquist & Wiksell 1968 Katz J Handbook of Clinical Audiology, Williams & Wilkins 1972


HEARING AIDS

The examination may Include questions relating to the design and operation of hearing aids, hearing aid characteristics, selection and evaluation of hearing aids, binaural listening, hearing aids for home and school, counselling and aural rehabilitation.

BOOKS Recommended for reference

Davis H and Silverman S Hearing and Deafness 3rd ed, Holt Rinehart & Winston 1970

Donnelly K Interpreting Hearing Aid Technology, Thomas 1974 Gerber S E Introductory Hearing Science Physical and Psychological

Concepts, Saunders 1974

171

Faculty of Medicine

Pollack M C Amplification for the Hearing Impaired, Grune and Strat-ton 1975

Rubin M Hearing Aids Current Developments and Concepts, Univ Park 1976

Victoreen J A Basic Principles in Optometry, Thomas 1973


INDUSTRIAL AUDIOLOGY

The examination may include questions relating to instrumentation, noise abatement, hearing conservation programmes, acoustic trauma, hearing handicap, noise and communication and medico-legal aspects.


Burns W Noise and Man, Murray 1968 Henderson D et a1 Effects of Noise on Hearing, Raven 1976 Kryter K D The Effects of Noise on Man, Academic 1970 Robinson D W Occupational Hearing Loss, Academic 1971 Sataioff J and Michael P L Hearing Conservation, Thomas 1973 Ward W D and Fricke J E Noise as a Public Health Hazard, Amer

Speech & Hearing Assoc 1969


PAEDIATRIC AUDIOLOGY

The examination may include questions relating to the development of the infant and young child, emotional and social development of children with Impaired hearing, causes of deafness, hearing assessment in in-fants and children, at risk registers, genetics, communication dis-orders and auditory information processing, mental retardation, cereb-ral palsy, autism and psychoses, central language disorders, psycho-genic deafness, deprivation and the multiply handicapped deaf child.


1I1ingworth R G The Development of the Infant and Young Child Nor-mal and Abnormal 4th ed, Livingstone 1973

Sheridan M D Children's Developmental Progress, NFER Pub 1973

(b) Recommended for reference Ferguson C F and Kendig E L Paediatric Otolaryngology Vol II, Saund-

ers 1972 Fraser G R The Causes of Profound Deafness in Childhood, Johns Hop-

kins UP 1976 Freeman P Understanding the Deaf Blind Child, Heinemann 1975 Fulton P R and Lloyd L L Auditory Assessment of the Dificult to Test,

Williams & Wilkins 1975 Gerwin K and Glorig A Detection of Hearing Loss and Ear Diseases

in Children, Thomas 1974 Northern J L ed Hearing Disorders, Little Brown 1976 Northern J L and Downs M Hearing in Children, Williams & Wilkins

1974 Taylor I G Neurological Mechanisms of Hearing and Speech in Child-

ren. Manchester UP 1964 Whetnall E and Fry D B The Deaf Child, Heinemann 1971

172

Diplomas

EXAMINATION One 3-hours' paper and during the course, viva voce examination.

SPEECH AND LANGUAGE

The examination may include questions relating to anatomy, physiology, pathology of the vocal tract, acoustic phonetics, linguistics, psycho-linguistics, language of the deaf child, speech pathology and rehabili-tation.


Ainsworth W A Mechanisms of Speech Recognition, Pergamon 1976 Denes P and Pinson E The Speech Chain, Anchor Science Study Ser-

ies

(b) Recommended for reference Adams P Language in Thinking, Penguin 1972 Dale P S Language Development Structure aпд Function, Dryden 1972 McNeil D The Acquisition of Language, Harper & Row 1970 Miller G A Language and Communication, McGraw-Hill 1957 SIobi n D 1 Psycholinguistics, Scott Foresman 1971 Travis L E ed Handbook of Speech Pathology and Audiology, Appleton

Century Crofts 1971


577-864. OTOLARYNGOLOGY

The examination may include questions relating to pathology of the ear, methods of clinical examination, diseases of the external ear, diseases of the middle ear, diseases of the Inner ear, congenital deaf-ness, otoscleriosis, presbyacusis, acoustic neuroma, Meneres Disease, vestibular disorders, otoneurology. BOOKS

Recommended for reference. Maloney W H Otolaryngology, Hagerstewn 1972 Mawson R S Diseases of the Eer 3rd ed, Lewis 1974 EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper and during the course viva voce examination.

173

APPENDIX

GENERAL PRINCIPLES OF SELECTION FOR FIRST-YEAR COURSES•

Selection Committee

The selection committee for each course shall consist of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned and such other members as may be approved by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of that Faculty or Board of Studies. If any member of a selection committee is unable to act, the Chairman of the Professorial Board may approve the appointment of a substitute, on the recommenda-tion of the Dean of the Faculty or the Chairman of the Board of Studies concerned. Each selection committee shall have power to reach decisions on a majority vote and shall report its decisions to the Professorial Board as soon as possible. Such report shall include a list of those applicants who were selected and enrolled.

Applications Applicants for selection in a quota must submit applications on the prescribed form by the date set down in the list of Principal Dates—the Friday nearest 1 November. No application for selection lodged after the due date shall be considered unless the selection committee concerned is satisfied that special cir-cumstances exist justifying the Iate application. Persons of aboriginal extraction seeking admission to the University will, if they so wish, be considered by the Professorial Board under Regulation 1.1.2. Persons wishing to be considered under this regulation should apply to the Registrar.

Selection

1. Each selection committee shall be responsible for selecting, up to the number fixed by Council, those applicants who are considered most likely to pursue successfully the course concerned. 2. (a) Selection shall be based primarily on academic merit as judged

by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination. Provided that the qualifications of the applicants who have not attempted the Victorian HSC Examination shall be equated as far as possible with the HSC Examination.

(b) Selection committees may also take into account: (i) The results of any subsequent examinations attempted. (ii) The age of applicants when attempting the examination

under consideration. (iii) Any illness, war or military service, or other serious cause,

as a result of which the studies or performance of an appli-cant have, in the opinion of the committee, been hampered.

(iv) Physical handicaps or defects. (v) The number of years spent preparing for the Victorian Higher

School Certificate Examination. This is to be considered only where the original scoring puts a candidate who did not sit in his first year of preparation for the HSC in a mar-ginal position in the order-of-merit list.

• At the time of going to press. these generel principles were under review. Interested persons should consult the facuty office for details.

174

Faculty of Medicine

(vi) Information revealed by such Interviews as the selection committee may conduct.

(vii) Any other factors approved by the Professorial Board and the Council on the recommendation of the Faculty or Board of Studies concerned.

(c) Headmaster's reports shall not be taken into consideration, ex-cept in cases of illness or where an applicant has applied for a place in the succeeding year's quota.

(d) No weight shall be given to the order of an applicant's course preferences, i.e., a first preference of one applicant is not to rate above a lower preference of another candidate with a higher selection score.

3. In assessing academic merit as judged by reference to results in the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination, the formula adopted by the Victorian Universities Admissions Committee shall be used. Provided that:

(i) Prerequisites approved by the Professorial Board and the Council may be included in the "best four subjects".

(ii) Where prerequisite subjects must be included in the basic quota score, an applicant who has had more than one sitting at the Higher School Certificate Examination shall be credited with the best of his prerequisites from any sitting, with the proviso that, in order to be credited with the marks of a prerequisite taken at any sitting, a candidate must have passed in three subjects other than English at that sitting.

(iii) special debits and bonuses may be applied if stated in special principles of selection recommended by a Faculty or Board of Studies and approved by the Professorial Board and the Council.

(iv) A selection committee shall have the right to consider an appli-cant's record as a whole in deciding between candidates near the borderline.

4. Under-age applicants in the selection range must be interviewed by or on behalf of the selection committee concerned before being selected.

5. In the absence of special reasons, applicants for admission to a quota who have not yet attempted a university course shall be preferred to graduates.

8. The percentage of overseas applicants admitted to any course should not normally exceed by more than 10 per cent the annual average per-centage of such students admitted to that course over the past three years. No overseas applicant shall be selected in preference to an Aus-tralian applicant of equal or superior merit. ("Overseas" means a student whose home Is overseas and who either has presented for the Victorian Higher School Certificate Examination or has been admitted ad eundem statum.)

7. If an applicant is not selected for the course of his first choice, his application must be considered for the course of his second and, if necessary, subsequent choice and he must be selected in preference to any other applicant of Inferior academic merit.

8. An order of merit shall be prepared according to the above prin-ciples, and places up to the number fixed by the Council shall be fiIled in order from this list.

175

Appendix

Reservation of places In quotas

Places in the succeeding year's quota may be reserved for such appli-cants and in such numbers as may be decided by the Faculty or Board of Studies in accordance with its principles of selection on request, for applicants in the top 80% of those whose marks are above the cut-off point for admission to the quota concerned and, if there are special circumstances, for applicants in the lower 20%.

Students accepted for fixed courses

Once a student is accepted for a fixed course (that is, one for which there are no alternative subjects) and if he is not later prevented by failure from continuing in the course, the University must provide facili-ties for the student to complete the course as planned, should he so request.

Note: Students should consult the appropriate Faculty handbook for special principles of selection, if any.

Brown Prior Anderson Pty Ltd 5 Evans Street Burwood 3125

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s:

The University of Melbourne

Title:

Handbook: Faculty of Medicine 1978

Date:

1978

Persistent Link:

http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128880

Documents

Handbook: Faculty of Medicine 1978